Professional Documents
Culture Documents
for
By
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Contents
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page I
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page II
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Linear Algebra
ME – 2005 5. Match the items in columns I and II.
1. Which one of the following is an Column I Column II
P. Singular 1. Determinant is not
Eigenvector of the matrix[ ]? matrix defined
Q. Non-square 2. Determinant is
matrix always one
R. Real 3. Determinant is
(A) [ ] (C) [ ] symmetric zero
matrix
S. Orthogonal 4. Eigen values are
matrix always real
(B) [ ] (D) [ ] 5. Eigen values are
not defined
(A) P - 3 Q - 1 R - 4 S - 2
(B) P - 2 Q - 3 R - 4 S - 1
2. A is a 3 4 real matrix and Ax=B is an (C) P - 3 Q - 2 R - 5 S - 4
inconsistent system of equations. The (D) P - 3 Q - 4 R - 2 S - 1
highest possible rank of A is
(A) 1 (C) 3 ME – 2007
(B) 2 (D) 4 6. The number of linearly independent
Eigenvectors of 0 1 is
ME – 2006
3. Multiplication of matrices E and F is G. (A) 0 (C) 2
Matrices E and G are (B) 1 (D) Infinite
os sin 7. If a square matrix A is real and symmetric,
E [ sin os ] and
then the Eigenvalues
(A) are always real
G [ ]. What is the matrix F? (B) are always real and positive
(C) are always real and non-negative
os sin (D) occur in complex conjugate pairs
(A) [ sin os ]
ME – 2008
sin os
(B) [ os sin ] 8. The Eigenvectors of the matrix 0 1 are
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 2
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 3
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
i i
8. The inverse of the m trix 0 1 is 14. The inverse of the matrix 0 1
i i
(A) 0 1 (C) 0 1 is
( ) i i
(B) 0 1 (D) 0 1 0 1
i i
i i
( ) 0 1
CE – 2008 i i
9. The product of matrices ( ) is ( ) i i
0 1
i i
(A) (C)
i i
(B) (D) PQ ( ) 0 1
i i
10. The Eigenvalue of the matrix
CE – 2012
[P] = 0 1 are
15. The Eigenvalues of matrix 0 1 are
(A) and 8 (C) n
(A) 2.42 and 6.86
(B) and 5 (D) n
(B) 3.48 and 13.53
11. The following simultaneous equation (C) 4.70 and 6.86
x+y+z=3 (D) 6.86 and 9.50
x + 2y + 3z = 4
x + 4y + kz = 6 CE – 2013
will NOT have a unique solution for k 16. There is no value of x that can
equal to simultaneously satisfy both the given
(A) 0 (C) 6 equations. Therefore, find the ‘le st
(B) 5 (D) 7 squares error’ solution to the two
equations, i.e., find the value of x that
CE – 2009 minimizes the sum of squares of the
12. A square matrix B is skew-symmetric if errors in the two equations.
(A) (C) 2x = 3 and 4x = 1
(B) (D)
17. What is the minimum number of
CE – 2011 multiplications involved in computing the
13. [A] is square matrix which is neither matrix product PQR? Matrix P has 4 rows
symmetric nor skew-symmetric and , - and 2 columns, matrix Q has 2 rows and
is its transpose. The sum and difference of 4 columns, and matrix R has 4 rows and 1
these matrices are defined as column. __________
[S] = [A] + , - and [D] = [A] , - ,
CE – 2014
respectively. Which of the following
statements is TRUE? 18. Given the matrices J = [ ] n
(A) Both [S] and [D] are symmetric
(B) Both [S] and [D] are skew-symmetric
(C) [S] is skew-symmetric and [D] is K [ ], the product K JK is
symmetric
(D) [S] is symmetric and [D] is skew
19. The sum of Eigenvalues of the matrix, [M]
symmetric
is, where [M] = [ ]
[ ] is ________________ CS – 2007
5. Consider the set of (column) vectors
defined by X={xR3 x1+x2+x3=0, where
CS – 2005
XT =[x1, x2, x3]T }. Which of the following is
1. Consider the following system of
TRUE?
equations in three real
(A) {[1, 1, 0]T, [1, 0, 1]T} is a basis for
variables x x n x
the subspace X.
x x x
(B) {[1, 1, 0]T, [1, 0, 1]T} is a linearly
x x x
independent set, but it does not span
x x x
X and therefore, is not a basis of X.
This system of equation has
(C) X is not the subspace for R3
(A) no solution
(D) None of the above
(B) a unique solution
(C) more than one but a finite number of
CS – 2008
solutions
6. The following system of
(D) an infinite number of solutions
x x x
x x x
2. What are the Eigenvalues of the following
x x x
2 2 matrix?
Has unique solution. The only possible
0 1 value (s) for is/ are
(A) n (C) n (A) 0
(B) n (D) n (B) either 0 or 1
(C) one of 0,1, 1
CS – 2006 (D) any real number except 5
3. F is an n x n real matrix. b is an n real
vector. Suppose there are two nx1
7. How many of the following matrices have
vectors, u and v such that u v , and
an Eigenvalue 1?
Fu=b, Fv=b. Which one of the following
statement is false? 0 1 0 1 0 1 n 0 1
(A) Determinant of F is zero (A) One (C) three
(B) There are infinite number of (B) two (D) four
solutions to Fx=b
CS – 2010
(C) There is an x 0 such that Fx=0
8. Consider the following matrix
(D) F must have two identical rows
A=[ ]
x y
If the Eigen values of A are 4 and 8, then
(A) x = 4, y = 10 (C) x = 3, y = 9
(B) x = 5, y = 8 (D) x = 4, y = 10
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 5
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
⁄
⁄ 6. The rank of the matrix [ ]
(B) [ ]
⁄
⁄ (A) 0 (C) 2
(B) 1 (D) 3
(C) [ ]
ECE – 2007
7. It is given that X1 , X2 …… M are M non-
⁄
zero, orthogonal vectors. The dimension
⁄
(D) [ ] of the vector space spanned by the 2M
⁄
⁄ vector X1 , X2 … XM , X1 , X2 … XM is
(A) 2M
⁄ (B) M+1
2. Let, A=0 1 and = 0 1.
(C) M
Then (a + b)=
(D) dependent on the choice of X1 , X2 …
(A) ⁄ (C) ⁄
(B) ⁄ (D) ⁄ XM.
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 7
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 8
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE – 2005
5. The following vector is linearly
1. If R = [ ] , then top row of is dependent upon the solution to the
previous problem
(A) , - (C) , -
(B) , - (D) , - (A) [ ] (C) [ ]
EE – 2014 IN – 2006
21. Given a system of equations: Statement for Linked Answer Questions 3
x y z and 4
x y z A system of linear simultaneous
Which of the following is true regarding equations is given as Ax=B where
its solutions?
(A) The system has a unique solution for [ ] n [ ]
any given and
(B) The system will have infinitely many 3. The rank of matrix A is
solutions for any given and (A) 1 (C) 3
(C) Whether or not a solution exists (B) 2 (D) 4
depends on the given and
(D) The system would have no solution 4. Which of the following statements is true?
for any values of and (A) x is a null vector
(B) x is unique
22. Which one of the following statements is (C) x does not exist
true for all real symmetric matrices? (D) x has infinitely many values
(A) All the eigenvalues are real.
(B) All the eigenvalues are positive. 5. For a given matrix A, it is observed
(C) All the eigenvalues are distinct. that
(D) Sum of all the eigenvalues is zero.
0 1 0 1 n 0 1 0 1
Then matrix A is
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 11
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
IN – 2014
16. For the matrix A satisfying the equation
given below, the eigenvalues are
, -[ ] [ ]
ME
1. [Ans. A] and G = [ ]
Now E × F = G
[ ] os sin
∴ ,E- [ sin os ]
h r teristi equ tions is | I|
( )( )( )
4. [Ans. A]
∴ Real eigenvalues are 5, 5 other two are
For S matrix, if Eigenvalues are
complex
… … … … … then for matrix,
Eigenvector corresponding to
the Eigenvalues will be , , ………
is ( I)
For S matrix, if Eigenvalues are 1 and 5
(or) →( )
then for matrix, the Eigenvalues are 1
Verify the options which satisfies relation
and 25.
(1)
Option (A) satisfies.
5. [Ans. A]
2. [Ans. B]
6. [Ans. B]
Given n in onsistent
0 1 Eigenv lues re 2, 2
No ( I) ( I) . /
( ⁄ ) No. of L.I Eigenvectors
( ) n ( ⁄ ) (no of v ri les) ( I)
( ( ) minimum of m n)
For inconsistence
( ) ( ⁄ ) 7. [Ans. A]
∴ he highest possi le r nk of is ( I) .
olving for , Let the symmetric and real
3. [Ans. C] matrix be A = 0 1
os sin
Given , E = [ sin os ] Now | |
Which gives ( )
⟹
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 13
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
⟹
x
Hence real Eigen value. [ ][ ] 0 1
x
8. [Ans. B]
Equating the elements x ⁄
Let 0 1 eigenv lues re n
Eigen vector corresponding to 12. [Ans. A]
is ( I) 0 1 → Eigenv lues re
x
. / .y/ . / Eigenve tor is x x verify the options
By simplifying
K 13. [Ans. C]
. / . / y t king K
Eigen vector corresponding to =2 [ ] [ ]
is ( I)
x
. / .y/ . / → [ ]
K
By simplifying ( ) 4 5 by
K ⁄ → [ ]
taking K
( ) infinite m ny solutions
⁄
14. [Ans. B]
⁄
Eigenvalues of a real symmetric matrix
9. [Ans. C] are always real
Sum of the diagonal elements = Sum of 15. [Ans. B]
the Eigenvalues
⟹ 1 + 0 + p = 3+S 0 1 eigenv lues v lue
⟹ S= p 2 Eigen vector will be . /
10. [Ans. B] Norm lize ve tor
( ⁄ ) [ ] √( ) ( )
[ ] [√( ) ( ) ]
⁄
→ * √ +
[ ] ⁄
→
√
→ [ ] 16. [Ans. C]
The given system is
If system will h ve solution x y z
x y z
11. [Ans. A] x y z
iven M M → MM I Use Gauss elimination method as follows
Augmented matrix is
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 14
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
, | - [ | ] So, | |
→ [ | ] | |
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 15
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
[ | ]→ [ | ] 8. [Ans. A]
Inverse of 0 1 is
→ [ | ] 0 1 0 1
( )
( ⁄ ) ∴0 1 0 1
( ) ( )
( ) ( ⁄ ) 0 1
∴ olution is non – existent for above
system.
9. [Ans. B]
( ) P=( )P
5. [Ans. B]
( )( )
∑ = Trace (A)
=( ) (I) =
+ + = Trace (A)
= 2 + ( 1) + 0 = 1
10. [Ans. B]
Now = 3
∴3+ + =1 A=0 1
Characteristic equation of A is
Only choice (B) satisfies this condition.
| |=0
6. [Ans. B] (4 )( 5 ) 2 × 5 =0
∑ = Trace (A) + 30 = 0
+ + =1+5+1=7 6, 5
Now = 2, = 6
∴ 2+6+ =7 11. [Ans. D]
=3 The augmented matrix for given system is
x
7. [Ans. A] [ | ] 6y7 [ ]
k z
The augmented matrix for given system is
Using Gauss elimination we reduce this to
an upper triangular matrix to find its rank
[ | ]
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 16
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
15. [Ans. B] [ ]
0 1
Sum of the Eigenvalues = 17 Interchanging Column 1& Column 2 and
Product of the Eigenvalues = taking transpose
From options, 3.48 + 13.53 = 17
(3.48)(13.53) = 47 [ ]
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 17
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
* ( ) ( )+ ( )( )
= ( )
= 1, 6
21. [Ans. 2] ∴ The Eigenvalues of A are 1 and 6
[ ]
3. [Ans. D]
→ Given that Fu =b and Fv =b
If F is non singular, then it has a unique
[ inverse.
( ) ( ) ( )
Now, u = b and v= b
] Since is unique, u = v but it is given
( ) ( ) th t u v his is contradiction. So F
must be singular. This means that
[ ] (A) Determinant of F is zero is true. Also
(B) There are infinite number of
( ) no. of non zero rows = 2
solution to Fx= b is true since |F| = 0
CS (C) here is n su h the is
1. [Ans. B] also true, since X has infinite number
The augmented matrix for the given of solutions., including the X = 0
solution
system is [ | ] (D) F must have 2 identical rows is false,
since a determinant may become
Using elementary transformation on above zero, even if two identical columns
matrix we get, are present. It is not necessary that 2
identical rows must be present for
[ | ]
|F| to become zero.
4. [Ans. C]
→ [ ⁄ | ] It is given that Eigenvalues of A is
⁄ ⁄ 5, 2, 1, 4
I
→ Let P = 0 1
[ | ] I
Eigenvalues of P : | I|
Rank ([A B]) = 3 I
| |
I
Rank ([A]) = 3
( ) I
Since
I
Rank ([A B]) = Rank ([A]) = number of I
variables, the system has unique solution. Eigenvalue of P is
( 5 +1 ), ( 2+ 1), (1+ 1), (4+1 ),
2. [Ans. B] ( 5 1 ), ( 2 1 ),(1 1), (4 1)
0 1 = 4, 1, 2, 5, 6, 3,0,3
The characteristic equation of this matrix
5. [Ans. B]
is given by |x
X= {x x x +
| I|
= ,x x x - then,
| |
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 18
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
=0 = 0, 0 ( )( )
( )( )
Eigenvalues of 0 1
| |= 0 √
( ) =0 Eigenvalues of A are √ n √
( ) respectively
= i or 1 So Eigenvalues of
= 1 –i or 1 + i (√ ) n ( √ )
Eigenvalues of 0 1 n
n
| | =0
√ n √
( )( ) =0
( ) =0
= –1, 1
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 19
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
3. [Ans. C] 8. [Ans. B]
0 1 Approach 1:
Given 4x + 2y =7
(A I)=0 and 2x + y =6
( 4 ) (3 ) 2 4=0
4 2 x 7
2 + 20=0 = 5, 4 2 1y 6
x1
Putting = 5, 0 1 =0 0 0 x 5
x2 2 1y 6
x + 2x = 0 x = 2x
On comparing LHS and RHS
x x
1= 2 0= 5, which is irrelevant and so no
2 1 solution.
Hence, 0 1 is Eigenvector. Approach 2:
4x + 2y =7
4. [Ans. C] 7
or 2x y=
0 1 We know th t it is Eigenvalue 2
Then Eigenvector is x x 2x+y=6
Verify the options (C) Since both the linear equation represent
parallel set of straight lines, therefore no
5. [Ans. A] solution exists.
Approach 3:
or m trix 0 1 Rank (A)=1; rank (C)=2,
We know |I A|=0 As Rank (A) rank (C) therefore no
| | solution exists.
| | =0
[ ]
( )(( ) )=0
( )
, j j
12. [Ans. B]
Given equations are x y z et of , - et of [ ]
x y z and x y z
If and ,
then x y z have Infinite solution
16. [Ans. D]
If and , then
Matrix multiplication is not commutative
x y z ( ) no solution
in general.
x y z
If n
17. [Ans. *] Range 0.99 to 1.01
x y z will have solution
Let ‘ ’ e Eigenv lue of ‘ ’ hen ‘ ’ will
x y z
e Eigenv lue of ‘ ’
and will also give solution
A. =I=
13. [Ans. B] Using Cauchey Hamilton Theorem,
0 1
Characteristic Equations is
18. [Ans. *] Range 0.99 to 1.01
By Cayley Hamilton theorem I J I J
I I
∴
( I) | |
I
[ ]
14. [Ans. A]
I I [ ] → [ ]
( ) ( | ) no of v r les
Infinitely many solutions
Then AB = [4]; BA [ ]
21. [Ans. B]
Here m = 1, n = 4
And et(I ) et(I ) onsi er 0 1
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 22
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
∴ (not positive)
2. [Ans. D]
( ) is not true
Since matrix is triangular, the Eigenvalues
(A), (C), (D) are true using properties of
are the diagonal elements themselves
Eigenvalues
namely = 3, 2 & 1.
Corresponding to Eigenvalue = 2, let
22. [Ans. *] Range 48.9 to 49.1
us find the Eigenvector
Real symmetric matrices are diagnosable
Let the matrix be [A - ] x̂ = 0
x x
0 1 s tr e is [ ][x ] [ ]
x
So determinant is product of diagonal x
entries Putting in above equation we get,
x
So | | x x
[ ][x ] [ ]
∴ M ximum v lue of etermin nt x
x x Which gives the equations,
∴| | 5x x x =0 . . . . . (i)
x =0 . . . . . (ii)
EE 3x = 0 . . . . . (iii)
1. [Ans. B] Since eqa (ii) and (iii) are same we have
5x x x =0 . . . . . (i)
R= [ ]
x =0 . . . . . (ii)
j( ) , of tor( )- Putting x = k, we get
x = 0, x = k and 5x k =0
| | | |
x = k
| |=| | ∴ Eigenvectorss are of the form
x k
= 1(2 + 3) – 0(4 + 2) – 1 (6 – 2) = 1
x
[ ] * k +
Since we need only the top row of , we x
need to find only first column of (R)
which after transpose will become first i.e. x x x = k : k : 0
row adj(A). = :1:0
cof. (1, 1) = + | |=2+3=5 =2:5:0
x
cof. (2, 1) = | |= 3 x
∴ [ ]=[ ] is an Eigenvector of matrix p.
x
cof. (2, 1) = + | |= +1
3. [Ans. A]
∴ cof. (A) = [ ] Rank [P|Q] = Rank [P] is necessary for
existence of at least one solution to
Adj (A) =, of ( )-
x q.
=[ ]
4. [Ans. A]
We need to find orthogonal vectors, verify ( )
the options. i i
Option (A) is orthogonal vectors
8. [Ans. B]
( )( ) xy xy xx x n xy yx
xx xy x xy
Option (B), (C), (D) are not orthogonal | yx y y | |y x y |
x y (x y)
5. [Ans. B]
The vector ( ) is linearly = Positive when x and y are linearly
dependent upon the solution obtained in independent.
Q. No. 4 namely , - and , - 9. [Ans. A]
We can easily verify the linearly
A=0 1
dependence as
|A – | = 0
| |
| | =0
A will satisfy this equation according to
6. [Ans. B] Cayley Hamilton theorem
hen n n m trix xx i.e. I=0
x x x x x x Multiplying by on oth si es we get
x x x x x x
* + I=0
x x x x x x I =0
Take x common from 1st row,
x common from 2nd row …… 10. [Ans. A]
x common from nth row. To calculate
It h s r nk ‘ ’ Start from I = 0 which has
derived above
7. [Ans. D] I
⃗
k
L(x) = | | ( I)( I)
x x x I
= (x ) ( ) ⃗(
k x ) ( I) I
x I
= x ⃗ =[
x k ]
x ( I)( I)
x
I
L(x) = M [x ]
x ( I) I
Comparing both , we get, I
M=[ ] ( I)
Hence Eigenvalue of M : | M | ( I)
I
| |
( ) ( )
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 24
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
11. [Ans. A] x
If rank of (5 6 ) matrix is 4,then surely x
* + *x + * +
it must have exactly 4 linearly x
independent rows as well as 4 linearly
independent columns.
Argument matrix C =* +
12. [Ans. D]
If characteristic equation is
→ , * +
=0
Then by Cayley – Hamilton theorem,
I=0 nk ( ) nk( )
= Number of variables = 4
Multiplying by on both sides, Since, Rank (A) = Rank(C) < Number of
variables
= I = ( I)
Hence, system of equations are consistent
and there is multiple non-trivial solution
13. [Ans. D]
exists.
Choice (A) = A is correct
Since =A[( ) -A
17. [Ans. B]
= A[( ) -
Characteristic equation | I|
Put =P
Then A [ ] = A. = A | |
Choice (C) = is also correct since
=( ) (1 ) ( )( )
= I
Eigenve tors orrespon ing to is
14. [Ans. B] ( I)
Let orthogonal matrix be x
os in [ ] [x ] [ ]
P=0 1 x
in os
By Property of orthogonal matrix A 2x x x x
I At x x
x os x in x x x x
So, x⃗ = [ ]
x in x os At x ,x
|| x⃗ || =
Eigenvectors = c[ ]{Here c is a constant}
√(x os x in ) (x in x os )
|| x⃗ || = √x x 18. [Ans. D]
, - ,L-, - ⟹ Options D is correct
|| x⃗ || = || x̅|| for any vector x̅
19. [Ans. D]
15. [Ans. C] x x … (i)
Trace = Sum of Principle diagonal } (i) n (ii) re s me
x x … (ii)
elements. ∴x x
So it has multiple solutions.
16. [Ans. D]
On writing the equation in the form of
AX =B
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 25
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
2. [Ans. B]
AX=0 and (A) = 2
Solving
n=3
0 1 0 1 No. of linearly independent solutions
= n r
21. [Ans. B] = 3
Since there are 2 equations and 3 variables =1
(unknowns), there will be infinitely many
solutions. If if then 3. [Ans. C]
x y z x y z x z y There are 3 non-zero rows and hence
For any x and z, there will be a value of y. rank (A) = 3
∴ Infinitely many solutions
4. [Ans. C]
22. [Ans. A] Rank (A) = 3 (This is Co-efficient matrix)
For all real symmetric matrices, the Rank (A:b) =4(This is Augmented matrix)
Eigenvalues are real (property), they may s r nk( ) r nk ( ) olution oes
be either ve or ve and also may be same. not exist.
The sum of Eigenvalues necessarily not be
zero.
5. [Ans. C]
We know Hen e from the given
23. [Ans. C]
p q problem, Eigenvalue & Eigenvector is
0 1 known.
r s
( pplying → p q 1 1
→r s element ry tr nsform tions) X1 , X2 2 , 1 1, 2 2
p q pr qs 1
[ ] We also know that , where
pr qs r s
∴ hey h ve s me r nk N 1 1
P X1 X2
1 2
IN
1 0 1 0
1. [Ans. B] & D=
0 2 0 2
Given: 0 1
Hence
Characteristic equation is,
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 26
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
0 1 0 1 [ ]
0 10 1 0 1
→ [ ]
Now | I |
| |
→ [ ]
( )( )=0
∴ ( )
Approach 2: By rank – nullity theorem
Eigenvalues of ( I) is = 1, 1/2 Rank [A]+ nullity [A]= no. of columns[A]
Eigenvalues of (X+5I) is = 3, 2 Nullity [A]= 3
Eigenvalues of ( I) (X+5I) is = , ∴ Nullity , -
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 27
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
j x
[ ] 0x 1 0 1
j
x
x j
j
j x
[ ] 0x 1 0 1
j
x j
x
16. [Ans. C]
A[ ]=[ ]
→| | | | | |
→| |
( | |
| |)
=Product of eigenvalues
Verify options
Options (C) correct answer
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 28
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ME - 2005 ME - 2008
1. A single die is thrown twice. What is the 6. A coin is tossed 4 times. What is the
probability that the sum is neither 8 nor probability of getting heads exactly 3
9? times?
(A) ⁄ (C) ⁄ (A) ⁄ (C) ⁄
(B) ⁄ (D) ⁄ (B) ⁄ (D) ⁄
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 30
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 31
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 32
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
CS - 2006 CS - 2008
3. For each element in a set of size 2n, an 7. Let X be a random variable following
unbiased coin is tossed. The 2n coin normal distribution with mean +1 and
tosses are independent. An element is variance 4. Let Y be another normal
chosen if the corresponding coin toss variable with mean of 1 and variance
were head. The probability that exactly n unknown If (X ) (Y≥ ) the
elements are chosen is standard deviation of Y is
(A) ( n ⁄ ) (C) ( ⁄ n ) (A) 3 (C) √
(B) ( n ⁄ ) (D) ⁄ (B) 2 (D) 1
(A) pq+(1 – p)(1 – q) 15. If two fair coins flipped and at least one of
(B) (1 – q)p the outcomes is known to be a head, what
(C) (1 – p)q is the probability that both outcomes are
(D) pq heads?
(A) 1/3 (C) 1/4
11. What is the probability that a divisor of (B) 1/2 (D) 2/3
is a multiple of ?
(A) 1/625 (C) 12/625 CS - 2012
(B) 4/625 (D) 16/625 16. Suppose a fair six – sided die is rolled
once. If the value on the die is 1,2, or 3 the
12. If the difference between the expectation
die is rolled a second time. What is the
of the square if a random variable ( ,x -)
probability that the some total of value
and the square if the exopectation of the
that turn up is at least 6?
random variable ( ,x-) is denoted by R,
(A) 10/21 (C) 2/3
then (B) 5/12 (D) 1/6
(A) R = 0 (C) R≥
(B) R< 0 (D) R > 0 17. Consider a random variable X that takes
CS - 2011 values +1 and 1 with probability 0.5
13. A deck of 5 cards (each carrying a distinct each. The values of the cumulative
number from 1 to 5) is shuffled distribution function F(x) at x = and
thoroughly. Two cards are then removed +1 are
one at a time from the deck. What is the (A) 0 and 0.5 (C) 0.5 and 1
probability that the two cards are (B) 0 and 1 (D) 0.25 and 0.75
selected with the number on the first card
CS - 2013
being one higher than the number on the
18. Suppose p is the number of cars per
second card?
minute passing through a certain road
(A) ⁄ (C) ⁄
junction between 5 PM and 6 PM, and p
(B) ⁄ (D) ⁄
has a Poisson distribution with mean 3.
14. Consider a finite sequence of random What is the probability of observing
values X = [x1, x2 … xn].Let be the fewer than 3 cars during any given
me n nd σx be the standard deviation of minute in this interval?
X. Let another finite sequence Y of equal (A) ⁄ e (C) ⁄ e
length be derived from this as yi, a*xi+b, (B) ⁄ e (D) ⁄ e
where a and b are positive constants. Let
μy be the me n nd σy be the standard CS - 2014
deviation of this sequence. Which one of 19. Suppose you break a stick of unit length
the following statements is INCORRECT? at a point chosen uniformly at random.
(A) Index position of mode of X in X is Then the expected length of the shorter
the same as the index position of stick is ________ .
mode of Y in Y.
(B) Index position of median of X in X is 20. Four fair six – sided dice are rolled. The
the same as the index position of probability that the sum of the results
median of Y in Y. being 22 is x/1296. The value of x is
(C) μy μx + b ____________
(D) σy σx + b
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 34
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 35
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
CD F conditional probability
(B) 1 C
D (x y |x y| )
F
1 (A) 0 (C) ⁄
(B) ⁄ (D) 1
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 36
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(A) Both the student and the teacher are (C) ( (x) (x)) x
right (D) ( (x) (x)) x ≥
(B) Both the student and the teacher are
wrong ECE - 2014
(C) The student is wrong but the teacher 17. In a housing society, half of the families
is right have a single child per family, while the
(D) The student is right but the teacher is remaining half have two children per
wrong family. The probability that a child picked
at random, has a sibling is _____
ECE - 2010
12. A fair coin is tossed independently four 18. Let X X nd X , be independent and
times. The prob bility of the event “the identically distributed random variables
number of times heads show up is more with the uniform distribution on [0, 1].
th n the number of times t ils show up” is The probability P{X is the largest} is _____
(A) ⁄ (C) ⁄
(B) ⁄ (D) ⁄
19. Let X be a random variable which is
uniformly chosen from the set of positive
ECE - 2011
odd numbers less than 100. The
13. A fair dice is tossed two times. The
expectation, E[X], is __________.
probability that the second toss results in
a value that is higher than the first toss is
20. An unbiased coin is tossed an infinite
(A) 2/36 (C) 5/12
number of times. The probability that the
(B) 2/6 (D) 1/2
fourth head appears at the tenth toss is
(A) 0.067 (C) 0.082
ECE\EE\IN - 2012
(B) 0.073 (D) 0.091
14. A fair coin is tossed till a head appears for
the first time probability that the number 21. A fair coin is tossed repeatedly till both
of required tosses is odd , is head and tail appear at least once. The
(A) 1/3 (C) 2/3 average number of tosses required is
(B) 1/2 (D) 3/4 _______.
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 37
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE - 2005 EE - 2008
1. If P and Q are two random events, then 5. X is a uniformly distributed random
the following is TRUE variable that takes values between 0 and
(A) Independence of P and Q implies that 1. The value of E{X } will be
probability (P Q) = 0 (A) 0 (C) 1/4
(B) Probability (P ∪ Q)≥ Probability (P) (B) 1/8 (D) 1/2
+Probability (Q)
EE - 2009
(C) If P and Q are mutually exclusive,
6. Assume for simplicity that N people, all
then they must be independent
born in April (a month of 30 days), are
(D) Probability (P Q) Probability (P)
collected in a room. Consider the event of
2. A fair coin is tossed three times in atleast two people in the room being born
succession. If the first toss produces a on the same date of the month, even if in
head, then the probability of getting different years, e.g. 1980 and 1985. What
exactly two heads in three tosses is is the smallest N so that the probability of
(A) ⁄ (C) ⁄ this event exceeds 0.5?
(B) ⁄ (D) ⁄ (A) 20 (C) 15
(B) 7 (D) 16
EE - 2006
3. Two f ir dice re rolled nd the sum “ r ” EE - 2010
of the numbers turned up is considered 7. A box contains 4 white balls and 3 red
(A) Pr (r > 6) = balls. In succession, two balls are
randomly selected and removed from the
(B) Pr (r/3 is an integer) = box. Given that the first removed ball is
(C) Pr (r = 8|r/4 is an integer) = white, the probability that the second
removed ball is red is
(D) Pr (r = 6|r/5 is an integer) =
(A) 1/3 (C) 1/2
(B) 3/7 (D) 4/7
EE - 2007
4. A loaded dice has following probability ECE\EE\IN - 2012
distribution of occurrences 8. Two independent random variables X and
Dice Value Probability Y are uniformly distributed in the interval
1 ⁄ , -. The probability that max , - is
2 ⁄ less than 1/2 is
3 ⁄ (A) 3/4 (C) 1/4
(B) 9/16 (D) 2/3
4 ⁄
5 ⁄ EE - 2013
6 ⁄ 9. A continuous random variable x has a
If three identical dice as the above are probability density function
thrown, the probability of occurrence of f(x) e x . Then *x + is
values, 1, 5 and 6 on the three dice is (A) 0.368 (C) 0.632
(A) same as that of occurrence of 3, 4, 5 (B) 0.5 (D) 1.0
(B) same as that of occurrence of 1, 2, 5
(C) 1/128
(D) 5/8
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 38
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE - 2014 IN - 2005
10. A fair coin is tossed n times. The 1. The probability that there are 53 Sundays
probability that the difference between in a randomly chosen leap year is
the number of heads and tails is (n – 3) is (A) ⁄ (C) ⁄
(A) (C) (B) ⁄ (D) ⁄
(B) (D)
2. A mass of 10 kg is measured with an
11. Consider a dice with the property that the instrument and the readings are normally
probability of a face with n dots showing distributed with respect to the mean of
up is proportional to n. The probability of 10 kg. Given that
the face with three dots showing up is ∫ exp . / d =0.6
√
_______________ and that 60per cent of the readings are
found to be within 0.05 kg from the mean,
12. Let x be a random variable with
the standard deviation of the data is
probability density function
(A) 0.02 (C) 0.06
for |x| (B) 0.04 (D) 0.08
f(x) { for |x|
otherwise 3. The measurements of a source voltage are
The probability P(0.5 < x < 5) is_________ 5.9V, 5.7V and 6.1V. The sample standard
deviation of the readings is
13. Lifetime of an electric bulb is a random (A) 0.013 (C) 0.115
variable with density f(x) kx , where x (B) 0.04 (D) 0.2
is measured in years. If the minimum and
maximum lifetimes of bulb are 1 and 2 IN - 2006
years respectively, then the value of k 4. You have gone to a cyber-cafe with a
is__________ friend. You found that the cyber-café has
only three terminals. All terminals are
14. The mean thickness and variance of unoccupied. You and your friend have to
silicon steel laminations are 0.2 mm and make a random choice of selecting a
0.02 respectively. The varnish insulation terminal. What is the probability that
is applied on both the sides of the both of you will NOT select the same
laminations. The mean thickness of one terminal?
side insulation and its variance are (A) ⁄ (C) ⁄
0.1 mm and 0.01 respectively. If the (B) ⁄ (D) 1
transformer core is made using 100 such
5. Probability density function p(x) of a
varnish coated laminations, the mean
random variable x is as shown below. The
thickness and variance of the core
value of is
respectively are
p(x)
(A) 30 mm and 0.22
(B) 30 mm and 2.44
(C) 40 mm and 2.44 α
(D) 40 mm and 0.24
0 α α b α c
(A) c (C)
( )
(B) c (D)
( )
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 39
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
6. Two dices are rolled simultaneously. The measurements, it can be expected that the
probability that the sum of digits on the number of measurement more than 10.15
top surface of the two dices is even is mm will be
(A) 0.5 (C) 0.167 (A) 230 (C) 15
(B) 0.25 (D) 0.125 (B) 115 (D) 2
IN - 2007 IN - 2011
7. Assume that the duration in minutes of a 12. The box 1 contains chips numbered 3, 6,
telephone conversation follows the 9, 12 and 15. The box 2 contains chips
exponential distribution f(x) = e ,x≥ numbered 6, 11, 16, 21 and 26. Two chips,
one from each box, are drawn at random.
The probability that the conversation will
The numbers written on these chips are
exceed five minutes is
multiplied. The probability for the
(A) e (C) product to be an even number is
(B) e
(D) e (A) ⁄ (C) ⁄
(B) ⁄ (D) ⁄
IN - 2008
8. Consider a Gaussian distributed random IN - 2013
variable with zero mean and standard 13. A continuous random variable X has
deviation . The value of its cummulative probability density f(x) = .
distribution function at the origin will be Then P(X > 1) is
(A) 0 (C) 1 (A) 0.368 (C) 0.632
(B) 0.5 (D) σ (B) 0.5 (D) 1.0
IN - 2010
11. The diameters of 10000 ball bearings
were measured. The mean diameter and Assuming independence of failures of the
standard deviation were found to be machines, the probability that a given job
10 mm and 0.05mm respectively. is successfully processed (up to third
Assuming Gaussian distribution of decimal place)is ______________
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 40
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ME 4. [Ans. D]
1. [Ans. D] ( oth defective)
( oth defective)
The number of ways coming 8 and 9 are S mple sp ce
(2,6),(3,5),(4,4),(5,3),(6,2),(3,6),(4,5),
(5,4),(6,3)
Total ways =9
So Probability of coming 8 and 9 are 5. [Ans. D]
X and Y are independent
∴ ( ) ( ) ( ) re true
So probability of not coming these Only (D) is odd one
6. [Ans. A]
Number of favourable cases are given by
2. [Ans. B]
HHHT
Probability of defective item = HHTH
Probability of not defective item = 1 0.1 HTHH
= 0.9 THHH
So, Probability that exactly 2 of the Total number of cases
chosen items are defective = 2C1 2C1 2C1 2C1 =16
= ( ) ( ) ∴ Probability =
3. [Ans. B] 7. [Ans. A]
Mean (t)̅ = ∫ t f(t) dt A uniform distribution and density
function
∫ t( t)dt ∫ t( t)dt
0,x a
x x a
6
t t
7 6
t t
7 f(x) f x dx , axb
0 b a
0, xb
[ ] [ ]
Density function
1 a,x b
f(x) b a
Variance = ∫ t f(t)dt 0 a x,x b
=∫ t ( t)dt ∫ t ( t)dt b
ab
=∫ (t t )dt ∫ t ( t)dt
Mean E(x)= x(F(x))
x a 2
Variance = F(x)2 f(x)
2
=0 1 0 1
2
= b
b
x2F(x) xF(x)
Standard deviation = √v ri nce x a x a
= Put the value of F(x), we get
√ 2
1
b
b 1
Variance x dx x.
2
dx
x a ba x a b a
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 41
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
b 2 3
x3 xL 1 7
(3 3 1)
3(b a) a 2 b a 2 8
b3 a3 (b2 a2 )2
9. [Ans. C]
3(b a) 4 b a 2
Probability of drawing 2 washers, first
(b a)(b2 ab a2 ) (b a)2(b a)2 followed by 3 nuts, and subsequently the
3(b a) 4 b a
2
4 bolts
8. [Ans. D]
Let probability of getting atleast one head 12. [Ans. C]
= P(H) then
P (at least one head) = 1 P(no head)
P(H)=1 P(all tails)
But in all cases, 23=8
1 7 X=0
X=1
P (H) = 1
8 8 Below X (X ) is
Alternately (X ) has to be less than 0.5 but
Probability of getting at least one head greater than zero
( ) ( )
13. [Ans. D]
1 7 A event that he knows the correct
1
8 8 answer
Alternately B event that student answered
From Binomial theorem correctly the question P(B) = ?
Probability of getting at least one head ( ) ( )
pq
( ) ( ) ( )
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 42
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
( ) ( ) ( ⁄ )
( ) ⁄
( ⁄ )
( ) ⁄ 18. [Ans. A]
14. [Ans. D]
x 1 2 3
P(x) 0.3 0.6 0.1
(x) x (x)
So from figure
(x)
Mean value = 1
x (x) V ri nce : μ me n x defective pieces
(x μ)
σ V(x) (x ) , (x)- σ
n(n )
x (x) ( x (x)) ( ) ( ) ( )
( ) ( ) ( )
σ √
( )
15. [Ans. A]
19. [Ans. *](Range 49 to 51)
∫ e dz
17. [Ans. *] Range 0.64 to 0.66 σ√
Let number of men = 100 ∴ of s ving ccount holder
Number of women = 100
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 43
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
e 5 Calculators
(x )
1 Defective 4 Non-defective
CE p( defective in c lcul tors)
1. [Ans D]
A, B, C are true
(D) is not true. Since in a negatively
skewed distribution
4. [Ans. C]
mode > median > mean
σ
μ
2. [Ans. D]
Let the mean and standard deviation of
5. [Ans. B]
the students of batch C be μ and σ
Given f(x) = x for x
respectively and the mean and standard
= 0 else where
deviation of entire class of first year
students be μ and σ respectively
Now given, μ ( x ) ∫ f(x)dx ∫ x dx
σ
and μ
σ =0 1
In order to normalise batch C to entire
The probability expressed in percentage
class, the normalize score must be
equated P=
since Z = = 2.469% = 2.47%
Z = =
6. [Ans. A]
Now Z = = Given
Equation these two and solving, we get P(private car) = 0.45
= P(bus 1 public transport) = 0.55
Since a person has a choice between
x = 8.969 ≃ 9.0
private car and public transport
P(public transport) = 1 – P(private car)
3. [Ans. B]
= 1 – 0.45 =0.55
Since population is finite, hypergeometric
P(bus) = P(bus public transport)
distribution is applicable
(bus public tr nsport)
(public tr nsport)
= 0.55 × 0.55
= 0.3025 ≃ 0.30
Now P(metro)
= 1 [P(private car) + P(bus)]
= 1 (0.45 + 0.30) = 0.25
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 44
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
[ ]
-0.44
The shades area in above figure is given
by F(0) –F ( 0.44)
= ( )( )
( ) ( )
= 0.5 – 0.3345 13. [Ans. 0.4]
= 1.1655 ≃ 16.55%
Closest answer is 16.7% ( ) ∫ f( )d ∫ d
8. [Ans. C]
( )| ( )
P(2 heads) =
9. [Ans. C]
P(one ball is Red & another is blue) 14. [Ans. *] Range 0.26 to 0.27
= P(first is Red and second is Blue) Avg= 5
= Let x denote penalty
(x ) (x ) (x )
(x ) (x )
10. [Ans. A]
Given μ = 1000, σ = 200 e
ew (x n)
x
We know that Z
e e e e
p(x )
When X= 1200, Z
Req. Prob = P (X ) e [ ]
(Z )
( Z )
Less than 50%
15. [Ans. B]
S * T+
11. [Ans. D]
n( )
(X ) (X ) (X ) ( )
n(S)
( ) ( )
16. [Ans. *] Range 0.25 to 0.28
e ( t)
(n t)
n
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 45
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 46
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
6. [Ans. D] 8. [Ans. C]
umber of permut tions with ‘ ’ in the Let C denote computes science study and
first position =19! M denotes maths study.
Number of permutations with ‘ ’ in the P(C on Monday and C on Wednesday)
second position = 10 18! = P(C on Monday, M on Tuesday and C on
(Fill the first space with any of the 10 odd Wednesday)
numbers and the 18 spaces after the 2 + P(C on Monday, C on Tuesday and C on
with 18 of the remaining numbers in 18! Wednesday)
ways) =1 0.6 0.4+ 1 0.4 0.4
umber of permut tions with ‘ ’ in rd = 0.24 + 0.16 = 0.40
position =10 9 17!
9. [Ans. B]
(Fill the first 2 place with 2 of the 10 odd
It is given that
numbers and then the remaining 17
P (odd) = 0.9 P (even)
places with remaining 17 numbers)
Now since 𝜮P(x) = 1
nd so on until ‘ ’ is in th place. After
∴ P (odd) + P (even) = 1
that it is not possible to satisfy the given
0.9 P (even) + P (even) = 1
condition, since there are only 10 odd
numbers v il ble to fill before the ‘ ’ P(even) = = 0.5263
So the desired number of permutations Now, it is given that P(any even face) is same
which satisfies the given condition is i.e. P(2) = P(4) = P(6)
Now since,
… P(even) = P(2) or P(4) or P(6)
Now the probability of this happening is = P(2) + P(4) + P(6)
given by = ∴ P(2) = P(4) = P(6) = P(even)
( … )
= (0.5263)
Which are clearly not choices (A), (B) or (C) = 0.1754
It is given that
7. [Ans. A]
P(even | face > 3) = 0.75
Given μ = 1, σ = 4 σ =2 ( )
and μ = 1, σ is unknown = 0.75
( )
Given, P(X ) = P (Y ≥ 2 ) ( )
= 0.75
( )
Converting into standard normal variates, ( ) ( )
P(f ce ) = =0.468
.z / = P (z ≥ )
( ) 10. [Ans. A]
.z / = P (z ≥ )
The tree diagram of probabilities is
shown below
(z ) = P (z ≥ ) _____(i)
q decl red f ulty
Now since we know that in standard f ulty
p
normal distribution
q decl red not f ulty
P (z ) = P (z ≥ 1) _____(ii) decl red f ulty
not q
Comparing (i) and (ii) we can say that p
f ulty
=1 σ =3
q decl red not f ulty
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 47
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
11. [Ans. A]
( )
If b c …
Then, no. of divisors of ( ∪ ) ( t le st one he d)
(x )(y )(z )… ( TT )
iven
∴ o of ivisors of
So required prob bility
( )( )
( )( )
16. [Ans. B]
No. of divisors of which are multiples Required Probability
of = P (getting 6 in the first time)
o of divisors of + P (getting 1 in the first time and getting
( )( ) 5 or 6 in the second time)
+ P (getting 2 in the first time and getting
4 or 5 or 6 in the second time)
+ P (getting 3 in the first time and getting
∴ equired rob bility
3 or 4 or 5 or 6 in the second time)
( ) ( ) ( )
12. [Ans. C]
V(x) (x ) , (x)-
17. [Ans. C]
Where V(x) is the variance of x,
The p.d.f of the random variable is
Since variance is σ and hence never
x +1
negative, ≥
P(x) 0.5 0.5
The cumulative distribution function F(x)
13. [Ans. A]
is the probability upto x as given below
The five cards are * +
x +1
Sample space ordered pairs F(x) 0.5 1.0
P (1 card = 2 card + 1)
st nd
So correct option is (C)
*( )( )( )( )+
18. [Ans. C]
e
(k)
k
14. [Ans. D] P is no. of cars per minute travelling.
𝛔y = a 𝛔x is the correct expression
Since variance of constant is zero. For no cars. (i.e. k = 0)
For no cars. P(0) e
15. [Ans. A] So P can be either 0,1,2. (i.e. k = 0,1,2)
Let A be the event of head in one coin. B For k = 1, p(1)=e
be the event of head in second coin.
For k = 2 , P(2)=
The required probability is
* ) ( ∪ )+ Hence
( )| ∪ ) ( ) ( ) ( )
( ∪ )
( ) e e e
( ∪ )
( ) (both coin he ds) 4 5
e
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 48
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
( ⁄ )
e ( ) ( )
( )
e e ∴ equired prob bility is
( ) ( ∪ ∪ )
19. [Ans. *] Range 0.24 to 0.27
The smaller sticks, therefore, will range in
24. [Ans. 0.25]
length from almost 0 meters upto a
( ∪ ) P(S) = 1
maximum of 0.5 meters, with each length
( ) ( ) ( )
equally possible.
utu lly exclusive ( )
Thus, the average length will be about
( ) ( )
0.25 meters, or about a quarter of the
et ( ) x; ( ) x
stick.
P(A) P(B) = x( x)
Maximum value of y = x ( x)
20. [Ans. 10]
dy
22 occurs in following ways ( x) x
dx
6 6 6 4 w ys
= 2x = 1
6 6 5 5 w ys
x
equired prob bility (max)
x ximum v lue of y ( )
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 49
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
P x.dx 1
We know that, P
B PB
∴ ( ) ( ) ( )
Ke .dx 1
ax
= 0.6 0.2
or ∫ e dx ∫ e dx = 0.12
x x,for x 0
7. [Ans. A]
x for x 0 x
K K CDF: F x PDF dx
1
a a x
For x<0, F x x 1 dx
1
i
Then probability
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 51
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
20. [Ans. C]
EE 6
1. [Ans. D]
(A) is false since of P & Q are 7
independent
8
pr(P Q) = pr(P) pr(Q)
which need not be zero.
9
(B) is false since
pr(P ∪ Q) 10
= pr(P) + pr(Q) – pr(P Q)
(C) is false since independence and 11
mutually exclusion are unrelated
properties. 12
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 53
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
4. [Ans. C]
Dice value Probability
1
8. [Ans. B]
2 and is the entrie
rectangle
3
The region in which maximum of {x, y} is
4 less than ⁄ is shown below as shaded
region inside this rectangle
5
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 54
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
( x ) ∫ f(x)dx
∫ dx ∫ dx ∫ dx
x| x|
( ) ( )
13. [Ans. *] Range 0.4 to 0.5
∴ ∫ kx dx
x
k | k ∴k
(x ) ∫ e dx , e - IN
,e e - e 1. [Ans. D]
Since leap chosen will be random, so, we
assume it being the case of uniform
10. [Ans. B] probability distribution function.
Let number of heads = x, Number of days in a leap year=366 days
∴ Number of tails n x =52 weeks and 2 days are extra. Out of
∴ ifference x (n x)or (n x) x
7, (SUN MON) (or) (SAT SUN) are
x n or n x
favorable.
If x n n x n
So, Probability of this event=
x n
If n x n x or x 2. [Ans. C]
As x and n are integers, this is not Since the reading taken by the instrument
possible is normally distributed, hence
( )
∴ Probability 0 P(x x ) ∫ e .dx
√
Where, μ e n of the distribution
11. [Ans. *] Range 0.13 to 0.15 σ St nd rd devi tion of the
Let proportionality constant = k distribution.
∴ ( dot) k ( dots) k
Now ∫ exp( )dx
( dots) k √
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 55
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
3. [Ans. D] 8. [Ans. B]
Mean= =5.9 V. By definition of Gaussian distribution,
total area under the curve =1. Hence half
( ̅) ( ̅) ( ̅)
S √ of the area =0.5
V
(closest answer is 0.2) 9. [Ans. A]
P(x)= =
4. [Ans. C] Mean = μ ∫ x (x)dx = ∫ x dx = 6
( ) ( )
Var(x)= ∫ (x μ) (x)dx
1 2
=∫ (x ) dx =
3 3
c
Area under triangle = 1
2 11. [Ans. C]
α σ mm
μ mm
6. [Ans. A] Then probability
Probability that the sum of digits of two X μ
(X ) ( )
σ
dices is even is same either both dices
where x mm
shows even numbers or odd numbers on
the top of the surface ( ) ( )
∴ ( ) ( ) ( )
Where e
√
( ) Probability of occurring even
number of both the dices e
√
( ) Probability of occurring odd
number of both the dices So, number of measurement more than
( ) 10.15mm
P Total number of measurement
nd ( )
≃
∴ ( )
12. [Ans. D]
7. [Ans. A] For the product to be even, the numbers
from both the boxes should not turn out
∫ f(x) dx=P
to be odd simultaneously.
or ∫ e .dx =P
∴ ( ) ( )( )
or e |
or P = .
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 56
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
13. [Ans. A]
∫ f(x)dx ∫ e dx
e | e
14. [Ans. 2]
For valid pdf ∫ pdf dx ;
∫ dx ;k
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 57
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Numerical Methods
ME – 2005 ME – 2010
1. Starting from x = 1, one step of Newton – 6. Torque exerted on a flywheel over a cycle
Raphson method in solving the equation is listed in the table. Flywheel energy (in
x³ +3x 7=0 gives the next value (x₁) as J per unit cycle) using impson’s rule is
(A) x₁=0.5 (C) x₁ = .5 Angle (degree) Torque (N-m)
(B) x₁= . 0 (D) x₁=2 0 0
60 1066
2. With a 1 unit change in b, what is the
change in x in the solution of the system 120 323
of equation = 2 .0 0. = 180 0
(A) Zero (C) 50 units 240 323
(B) 2 units (D) 100 units 300 55
360 0
ME – 2006 (A) 542 (C) 1444
3. Match the items in columns I and II. (B) 992.7 (D) 1986
Column I Column II
(P) Gauss-Seidel (1) Interpolation ME – 2011
method 7. The integral ∫ dx, when evaluated by
(Q) Forward (2) Non-linear using impson’s / rule on two equal
Newton-Gauss differential subintervals each of length 1, equals
method equations (A) 1.000 (C) 1.111
(R) Runge-Kutta (3) Numerical (B) 1.098 (D) 1.120
method integration
(S) Trapezoidal (4) Linear algebraic ME – 2013
Rule equation 8. Match the correct pairs.
(A) 2 Numerical Order of Fitting
(B) 2 Integration Scheme Polynomial
(C) 2 . impson’s / 1. First
(D) 2 Rule
Q. Trapezoidal Rule 2. Second
4. Equation of the line normal to function . impson’s / 3. Third
f(x) = (x ) at (0 5) is Rule
(A) y = x 5 (C) y = x 5 (A) P – 2 , Q – 1, R – 3
(B) y = x 5 (D) y = x 5 (B) P – 3, Q – 2 , R – 1
(C) P – 1, Q – 2 , R – 3
ME – 2007 (D) P – 3, Q – 1 , R – 2
5. A calculator has accuracy up to 8 digits
2
ME – 2014
after decimal place. The value of sinxdx
0
9. Using the trapezoidal rule, and dividing
the interval of integration into three equal
when evaluated using this calculator by
sub intervals, the definite integral
trapezoidal method with 8 equal
intervals, to 5 significant digits is ∫ |x|dx is ____________
(A) 0.00000 (C) 0.00500
(B) 1.0000 (D) 0.00025
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 58
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
CE – 2010 CE – 2013
8. The table below given values of a function 12. Find the magnitude of the error (correct
F(x) obtained for values of x at intervals to two decimal places) in the estimation
of 0.25. of following integral using impson’s ⁄
x 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.0 Rule. Take the step length as 1.___________
F(x) 1 0.9412 0.8 0.64 0.50
∫ (x 0) dx
The value of the integral of the function
between the limits 0 to using impson’s
rule is CS – 2007
(A) 0.7854 (C) 3.1416 1. Consider the series =
(B) 2.3562 (D) 7.5000
= 0.5 obtained from the Newton-
CE 2011 Raphson method. The series converges to
9. The square root of a number N is to be (A) 1.5 (C) 1.6
obtained by applying the Newton (B) √2 (D) 1.4
Raphson iterations to the equation
CS – 2008
x = 0. If i denotes the iteration
2. The minimum number of equal length
index, the correct iteration scheme will be
subintervals needed to approximate
(A) x = (x ) 2
1
xe dx
x
to an accuracy of at least 106
(B) x = (x ) 1 3
using the trapezoidal rule is
(C) x = (x )
(A) 1000e (C) 100e
(D) x = (x ) (B) 1000 (D) 100
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 60
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 61
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 62
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 63
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
IN– 2011
7. The extremum (minimum or maximum)
point of a function f(x) is to be
( )
determined by solving = 0 using the
Newton-Raphson method.
Let f(x) = x x and x = 1 be the initial
guess of x. The value of x after two
iterations (x ) is
(A) 0.0141 (C) 1.4167
(B) 1.4142 (D) 1.5000
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 64
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ME y = sin ( ) =
1. [Ans. C] 2
( )
By N-R method , =x – x = y = sin ( ) = 0.70 0
( )
f(x) = x x 7 y = sin( ) = 0
f( ) = 5
y = sin ( ) = 0.70 0
( )
x =x ( )
y = sin ( )=
f (x) = x
f ( )= , 7
y = sin ( ) = 0.70 0
( )
=1 = (0.5) = .5
y = sin ( )=0
2. [Ans. C] Trapezoidal rule
Given x y = 2 (i) ∫ f(x)dx = [(y y ) 2(y y
.0 x 0.0 y = b (ii)
y )]
Multiply 0.99 is equation (i) and subtract
∫ sinx dx = [(0 0) 2(0.70 0
from equation (ii); we get
( .0 0. )x = b (2 0. ) 0.70 0 0.70 0 0.70 0 0=0
0.02x = b .
0.02Δx = Δb 6. [Ans. B]
ower = ω = Area under the curve.
Δx = = 50 units h
0.02 = [(y y ) (y y y )
3. [Ans. D] 2(y y )]
= [(0 0) ( 0 0 55)
4. [Ans. B]
/ 2( 2 2 )]
Given f(x) = (x )
= 2.7 /unit cycle.
2
f (x) = (x )
Slope of tangent at point (0, 5) 7. [Ans. C]
2 x 1 2 3
m = (0 ) / = 1
y=
Slope of normal = 3 x 2
h
(∵ roduct of slopes = 1) ∫ dx = (y y y )
x
Slope of normal at point (0, 5)
y 5 = (x 0) = ( )
2
y= x 5
= .
5. [Ans. A]
8. [Ans. D]
b a 2 0
h= = = By the definition only
n
y = sin(0) = 0
y = sin ( ) = 0.70 0
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 65
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
∫ dx = [y y 2(y )] f (x ) =
x 2
For N-R method
= [ 0. 2 0.5] x =x
( )
2 ( )
= . ( )
x =x
12. [Ans. *] Range 0.53 to 0.56
Let f(x) = 5x 2 cos x Simplifying which we get
f (x) = 5 2 sin x x = 2x ax
f(0) = f( ) = 2.
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 66
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
2. [Ans. B] f(x )
x =x
For a = 7 iteration equation f (x )
Becomes x = 2x 7x (x x )
=x
with x = 0.2 ( x )
x = 2x 7x = 2× 0.2 – 7(0.2) = 0.12 x x x x
and x = 2x 7x = 2× 0.12 7(0. 2) =
( x )
= 0.1392 2x
x =
x
3. [Ans. A]
f(x) = 1, 4, 15 at x = 0, 1 and 2
5. [Ans. A]
respectively
Given
∫ f(x)dx = (f 2f f ) x – 10 x + 31x 30 = 0
(3 points Trapezoidal Rule) One root = 5
Here h = 1 Let the roots be α β and γ of equation
∫ f(x)dx = (1 + 2(4) + 15) = 12 ax + bx + cx + d = 0
Approximate value by rapezoidal ule αβγ=
= 12 and α β βγ γα =
Since f(x) is second degree polynomial, let ( )
α βγ = 5 βγ = = 30
f(x) = a0 + a x + a x
f(0) = 1 βγ = (i)
a 0 0= Also
a = αβ βγ γα = 5β βγ 5γ = =
f(1) = 4 5 (β γ) βγ =
a a a = ince βγ = from (i)
1+ a a = 5 (β γ) =
a a = β γ=5
f(2) = 15 βγ =
a 2a a = 5 olving for β and γ
2a a = 5 β (5 β) =
2a a = β 5β =0
Solving (i) and (ii) a = and a = β = 2 and γ =
f(x) = 1 – x + 4 x Alternative method
Now exact value ∫ f(x)dx 5 1 0 31 0
0 5 25 30
=∫ ( x x )dx
1 5 6 0
= *x + = (x 5)(x 5x )=0
Error = exact – Approximate value (x 5)(x 2)(x )=0
x=2 5
= 2=
4. [Ans. A ] 6. [Ans. D]
Y = a + bx
Given f(x) = x x =0
Given
f (x) = x
n= ∑x = ∑y = 2 ∑x = 14
Newton – Raphson formula is
and ∑xy =
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 67
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
= 0.25( 0. 2 2 = [( 0 2 ) 2(2 ) ( )]
0. 0. 0.5) = 2 5.
= 0.7 5 The value of integral
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 68
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
x = = 1000 e
∫ (x 0) dx = * 0x+ ( )/
5
3. [Ans. C]
= 0 =2 .
5 x = (x )
Magnitude of error
= 2 5. 2 . = 0.5 At convergence
x =x =α
CS α= (α )
1. [Ans. A] 2α=α+
Given x = + , x = 0.5
2α =
when the series converges x =x =α
2α = α + R
α= +
α =R
α= α=√
8α = 4α +9 So this iteration will compute the square
root of R
α =
α = = 1.5 4. [Ans. D]
y=x
2. [Ans. A] dy
= 2x
Here, the function being integrated is dx
f(x)= x
f(x) = xe
.
f (x) = xe + e = e (x + 1) x = .5
.
f’ (x) = xe + e + e = e (x + 2) = . 07
Since, both are increasing
functions of x, maximum value of f ( ) in 5. [Ans. B]
interval 1 2, occurs at = 2 so f( ) = 5
max |f ( )| =e (2 2) = e f( ) = 5 72 = 57 7 0
Truncation Error for trapezoidal rule f( ) 0 f( ) 0
= TE (bound) x =( )=5 f(x ) 0
2
= max |f ( )|
oot lies between and
Where is number of subintervals
x =( )=2 f(x ) 0
= 2
After ' ' interations we get the root
= max |f ( )|
6. [Ans. D]
= (b – a) max |f ( )| 1 2
h
= (2 – 1) [e (2 + 2)] ∫ f(x)dx = [f(0) f( ) 2(∑f )]
2
= e . 0 2(0.0 0.
= [ ]
Now putting = 0 0. . . 7.2 )
( )
.
= [ 5 . ]
=
= 9.045
h=
Now, No. of intervals, =
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 69
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
7. [Ans. – ] 8 4
x1 2
Given (x) + f(x) + t cos x = 0 12 3
and f(x) = x sin x
f (x) = x cos x + sin x 3. [Ans. C]
f (x) = x ( sin x) + cos x + cos x Given : f(x)= x e
= 2 cos x – x sin x By Newton Raphson method,
= 2 cos x – f (x) f(x ) x e
x =x =x
2 cos x – f (x) + f(x) +t cos x = 0 f (x ) e
2 cos x = tcos x t = 2 e xn
1 x n
1 exn
8. [Ans. A]
f(x) = 0.75x 2x 2x 4. [Ans. C]
f (x) = 2.25x x 2 f(x )
x =2 f = 2 f = x =x
f (x )
f f(2) = (2 ) = √2 and
x =x =0 √2
f √
f = f = 2 f (2) = =
√ √
f x =2
(√ )
= .
x =x =2 √
f √
f = 2 f =
f 5. [Ans. D]
x =x =0 f(x) = a x a x a x a x a
f
Also, root does not lies between 0 and 1 If the above equation have complex roots,
So, the method diverges if x = 2 then they must be in complex conjugate
nly ( )is true. pair, because it’s given all co-efficients are
positive ( they are real )
9. [Ans. C] So if complex roots are even no. (in pair)
For value of K if trapezoidal rule is used then real roots will also be even.
then the value is either greater than ption ( )is wrong
actual value of definite integral and if From the equation
impson’s rule is used then value is exact roduct of roots = ( 0)
Hence both statements are TRUE As no. of roots = 4,
Product of roots < 1
ECE
either one root 0
1. [Ans. C]
(or)
By definition (& the application) of
Product of three roots < 0
various methods
ption ( )is rong.
2. [Ans. B] Now, take option (A),
y(t) =x3 x2 + 4x 4=0 Let us take it is correct .
x0 = 2 Roots are in complex conjugate pairs
f x0 =
Next approximation x1 x0
f ' x0
Product of roots
0
x03 x02 4x0 4 | | | | 0 which is not possible
x1 x0
3x02 2x0 4 ption (A) is wrong
orrect answer is option ( )
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 70
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
8. [Ans. D] 3. [Ans. C]
=e u(t)
∑ = . .. = e
n 2 x
x x
as e = . . . x in
2
EE t
1. [Ans. D] x = ∫ e u(t) dt = ∫ f(t) dt
Here, = At t = 0.01, x = Area of trapezoidal
.
x = [f(0) f(0.0 )] = [ e .
]
f(x y) =
= 0.0099
Euler’s method equation is
x = x h. f(x y )
4. [Ans. A]
x ( )
x = x h( ) x =x
( )
h h
x =( )x = x
h = *x +
or stability | |
h 5. [Ans. B]
u(x x ) = 0x sin x 0. = 0
since h = Δ here v(x x ) = 0x 0x cosx 0. = 0
Δ
The Jacobian matrix is
u u
Δ 2
x x
o maximum permissible value of Δ is 2 .
v v
[ x x ]
2. [Ans. A]
Here f(x) = e 0x cos x 0sinx
=[ ]
0x sinx 20x 0cosx
f (x) = e
The Newton Raphson iterative equation is The matrix at x = 0 x = is
( )
x =x 0 0
( ) =* +
0 0
f(x ) = e
f’(x ) = e 6. [Ans. D]
x =x x x x =0
–( ) (x )(x )=0
i.e. x =
x =0 x =0
( )
= x= x= j
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 71
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
x =5
Δ 2
/
x =5 = 1.70
6. [Ans. A]
2. [Ans. A] dv
Assume x = √ =v t
dt
f(x) = x =0 t v dv
=v t
f(x ) 2 dt
x =x = [x ] 0 0 0 0+0 0. = 0
f (x ) 2 x
0.1 0 0+0.1 0. = 0.0
3. [Ans. C]
Given p(x) = x + x + 2 7. [Ans. C]
There is no sign change, hence at most 0 f(x) = x x
positive root ( rom escarte’s rule of f (x) = x = g(x)
signs) x = initial guess
p( x) = x x+2 g (x) = x
g (x )
There is one sign change, hence at most 1 x =x
negative root ( rom escarte’s rule of g (x )
signs)
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 72
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
( )
= = .5
g(x )
x =x
g (x )
0.75
= .5
= . 7
8. [Ans. D]
dy
= 2xy x = 0 y = h = 0.2
dx
y =y h. f(x y )
= (0.2)f(0 ) =
and y = y [f(x y ) f(x y )]
= (0. )[f(0 ) f(0.2 )]
= 0.
is the value of y after first step, using
Euler’s predictor – corrector method
9. [Ans. B]
For convergence
x = x =x x= (2x )
x
x = x= √
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 73
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Calculus
ME – 2005 ME – 2006
1. The line integral ∫ ⃗ ⃗⃗⃗⃗ of the vector 2x2 7x 3
7. If f( x ) = , then limf(x) will
function ⃗ ( ) 2xyz ̂+ x²z + ̂ k²y ̂ from 5x2 12x 9 x 3
leads to
ME – 2007
I =∫ ∫ ( ) What is q?
( )
(A) 4y (C) X 10.
(B) 16y² (D) 8 (A) 0 (C)
(B) ⁄ (D) 1
5. ∫ ( ) is equal to
(A) ∫ 11. The area of a triangle formed by the tips
(B) 2∫ of vectors a , b and c is
(C) 2∫ ( ) (A) ( )( )
(D) Zero (B) |( ) ( )|
B
x+2y=2
1
P x X
A
0 2
(A) ⁄ (C) ⁄ (A) (C)
(B) ⁄ (D) 1 (B) (D) 1
ME – 2010 ME – 2012
26. Velocity vector of a flow field is given as 33. Consider the function ( ) in the
⃗ ̂ .̂ The vorticity vector at interval . At the point x = 0,
(1, 1, 1) is f(x) is
(A) 4 ̂ ̂ (C) ̂ ̂ (A) Continuous and differentiable.
(B) 4 ̂ ̂ (D) ̂ ̂ (B) Non – continuous and differentiable.
(C) Continuous and non – differentiable.
27. The function (D) Neither continuous nor
(A) o o ∀ R differentiable.
∀ R
(B) o o ∀ R 34. . / is
∀ R
(A) 1/4 (C) 1
except at x = 3/2
(B) 1/2 (D) 2
(C) o o ∀ R
∀ R
35. At x = 0, the function f(x) = has
except at x = 2/3
(A) A maximum value
(D) o o ∀ R except at x = 3
(B) A minimum value
∀ R
(C) A singularity
28. The value of the integral ∫ is (D) A point of inflection
(A) –π (C) π
36. For the spherical surface
(B) –π (D) π
the unit outward
29. The parabolic arc √ is normal vector at the point
revolved around the x-axis. The volume of . /
√ √
the solid of revolution is (A) ̂ ̂
(A) π (C) π √ √
42. . ( )
/ is equal to CE – 2005
(A) 0 (C) 1 1. Value of the integral ∮ ( ).
(B) 0.5 (D) 2 Where, c is the square cut from the first
quadrant by the lines x = 1 and y = 1 will
43. Curl of vector ( G ’ h o o h h
⃗ ̂ ̂ ̂ line integral into double integral)
(A) ( )̂ ̂ ̂ (A) ⁄ (C) ⁄
(B) ( )̂ ̂ ̂ (B) 1 (D) ⁄
(C) ̂ ̂ ̂
(D) ̂ ̂ ̂ 2. A rail engine accelerates from its
stationary position for 8 seconds and
44. The best approximation of the minimum travels a distance of 280 m. According to
value attained by (100x) for ≥ the Mean Value theorem, the
is _______ speedometer at a certain time during
acceleration must read exactly.
(A) 0 kmph (C) 75 kmph
(B) 8 kmph (D) 126 kmph
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 77
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
CE – 2008 (B) 2∫ √
8. The equation + = 0 can be
(C) ∫ √
transformed to + = 0 by substituting
(D) ∫ √
(A) (C) √
(B)
(D) √ . /
14. The is
(A) 2/3 (C) 3/2
9. The inner (dot) product of two vectors ⃗ (B) 1 (D)
and ⃗ is zero. The angle (degrees)
between in two vectors is 15. Given a function
(A) 0 (C) 90 ( )
(B) 30 (D) 120 The optimal value of f(x, y)
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 78
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
CE – 2011 CE – 2014
√
16. ∫ ? 22. . / o
√ √
(A) 0 (C) a (A) (C) 1
(B) a/2 (D) 2a (B) (D)
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 79
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
CS – 2005 CS – 2010
1
1. Let G(x) g(i)xi where |x|<1. 7. What is the value of . / ?
(1 x) i0
2
(A) 0 (C)
What is g(i)?
(B) (D) 1
(A) i (C) 2i
(B) i+1 (D) 2i
CS – 2011
8. Given i = √ , what will be the
CS – 2007
evaluation of the definite integral
2. Consider the following two statements
about the function f(x) =|x|: ∫
P: f(x) is continuous for all real values of x (A) 0 (C) –i
Q: f(x) is differentiable for all real values (B) 2 (D) i
of x
Which of the following is true? CS – 2012
(A) P is true Q is false 9. Consider the function f(x)= sin(x) in the
(B) P is false Q is true interval x ,π⁄ π⁄ -. The number and
(C) Both P and Q are true location(s) of the local minima of this
(D) Both P and Q are false function are
(A) One , at π⁄
CS – 2008 (B) One , at π⁄
x sinx (C) Two , at π⁄ and π
3. Lim equals
x x cosx (D) Two , at π⁄ and π
(A) 1 (C)
CS – 2013
(B) 1 (D)
10. Which one the following function is
continuous at x =3?
4. Let
P=∑ ∑
(A) ( ) {
where k is a positive integer. Then
(A) (C)
(B) ( ) 2
(B) (D)
(C) ( ) 2
5. A point on a curve is said to be extreme if
it is a local minimum or a local maximum. (D) ( )
The number of distinct extrema for the
CS – 2014
curve 3x 16x 24x 37 is
4 3 2
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 80
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
The integral sin d is given by
3
3.
15. The value of the integral given below is 0
1 4
∫ o (A) (C)
2 3
(A) π (C) – π 2 8
(B ) (D)
(B) π (D) π 3 3
(B) P P
2
(D) P 2P
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 81
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
1
h ∫ ( ) along
1
X the semicircle with the line segment PQ as
1 2 3
its diameter
(A) 1.0 (C) 4.0
(A) Is
(B) 2.5 (D) 5.0
(B) Is 0
(C) Is 1
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 82
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(A) 1
x 2 ..... volume V. If is the position vector of a
3! point inside S, with ̂ the unit normal of S,
1
x
2
.....
the value of the integral ∯ ̂⃗ is
(B) (A) 3V (C) 10V
3!
(B) 5V (D) 15V
1
x
2
.....
(C)
3! ECE\IN – 2012
x 2
23. The direction of vector A is radially
(D) 1 ..... outward from the origin, with
3!
where and K is
19. If a vector field ⃗ is related to another constant. The value of n for which
. A = 0 is
vector field ⃗ through ⃗ = ⃗ , which
(A) 2 (C) 1
of the following is true? Note: C and
(B) 2 (D) 0
refer to any closed contour and any
surface whose boundary is C.
ECE\EE – 2012
(A) ∮ ⃗ ⃗ = ∬ ⃗ ⃗
24. The maximum value of
(B) ∮ ⃗ ⃗ = ∬⃗ ⃗ ( ) in the interval
⃗ ⃗ = [1,6] is
(C) ∮ ∬⃗ ⃗
(A) 21 (C) 41
(D) ∮ ⃗ ⃗ = ∬⃗ ⃗ (B) 25 (D) 46
(A) 0 (C) 1
(B) ⁄√ (D) 2√
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 83
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
27. Consider a vector field ⃗ ( ) The closed 34. The magnitude of the gradient for the
loop line integral ∮ ⃗ can be expressed function ( ) at the
as point (1,1,1) is_______.
(A) ∯( ⃗ ) over the closed
35. The directional derivative of
surface boundary by the loop
( ) ( ) ( )in the direction
(B) ∰( ⃗ )dv over the closed volume √
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 84
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE – 2007 EE – 2010
6. The integral ∫ ( ) o 11. At t = 0, the function ( ) has
equals (A) a minimum
(A) o (C) (1/2) o (B) a discontinuity
(B) 0 (D) (1/2) (C) a point of inflection
(D) a maximum
EE – 2008
7. Consider function f(x)= ( ) where 12. Divergence of the three-dimensional
x is a real number. Then the function has radial vector field is
(A) only one minimum (A) 3 (C) ̂ ̂ ̂
(B) only two minima (B) 1/r (D) ̂( ̂ ̂)
(C) three minima
(D) three maxima 13. The value of the quantity P, where
∫ , is equal to
EE – 2009
(A) 0 (C) e
8. f(x, y) is a continuous function defined
(B) 1 (D) 1/e
over (x, y) [0, 1] [0, 1]. Given the two
constraints, x > and y > , the
EE – 2011
volume under f(x, y) is
14. The two vectors [1, 1, 1] and [1, a, ],
√
(A) ∫ ∫ ( ) √
where a = . /, are
(B) ∫ ∫ ( ) (A) orthonormal
(C) ∫ ∫ ( ) (B) orthogonal
(C) parallel
√ √
(D) ∫ ∫ ( ) (D) collinear
9. A cubic polynomial with real coefficients 15. The function f(x) = 2x – has
(A) can possibly have no extrema and no (A) a maxima at x = 1 and a minima at
zero crossings x=5
(B) may have up to three extrema and (B) a maxima at x = 1 and a minima at
upto 2 zero crossings x= 5
(C) cannot have more than two extrema (C) only a maxima at x = 1
and more than three zero crossings (D) only a minima at x = 1
(D) will always have an equal number of
extrema and zero crossings EE – 2013
16. Given a vector field
10. F(x, y) = ( )̂ ( )̂ ’ , the line integral
line integral over the straight line from ∫ evaluated along a segment on the x-
( ) = (0, 2) to ( ) = (2, 0) axis from x = 1 to x = 2 is
evaluates to (A) 2.33 (C) 2.33
(A) –8 (C) 8 (B) 0 (D) 7
(B) 4 (D) 0
17. The curl of the gradient of the scalar field
defined by
(A)
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 85
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(B)
√ (D)
21. To evaluate the double integral √
( ⁄ )
∫ .∫ . / / dy, we make the
2. Given a real-valued continuous function
substitution u = ( ) and . The f(t) defined over [0,1], ∫ ( ) is
integral will reduce to (A) (C) f(1)
( ) ∫ (∫ ) (B) 0 (D) f(0)
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 86
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
6. The plot of a function f(x) is shown in the (B) once differentiable but not twice
following figure. A possible expression for (C) twice differentiable but not thrice
the function f(x) is (D) thrice differentiable
f(x)
11. For real x, the maximum value of is.
1 (A) 1 (C) √
(B) e 1 (D)
x IN – 2008
0 12. Consider the function y = x2 6x + 9. The
(A) ( ) (C) ( ) maximum value of y obtained when x
(B) . / (D) . / varies over the interval 2 to 5 is
(A) 1 (C) 4
IN – 2006 (B) 3 (D) 9
7. The function ( ) is
approximated as where is in 13. The expression for x > 0 is equal to
radian. The maximum value of for (A) – (C)
which the error due to the approximation (B) x (D)
is within
(A) 0.1 rad (C) 0.3 rad 14. Given y = + 2x + 10, the value of |
(B) 0.2 rad (D) 0.4 rad
is equal to
(A) 0 (C) 12
8. The solution of the integral equation
(B) 4 (D) 13
()
() ( )∫ ( ) ( ) 15.
(A) Indeterminate (C) 1
(A) ( () ( )) (B) 0 (D)
(B) ( () ( )) IN – 2009
( () ( )) 16. A sphere of unit radius is centered at the
(C)
( () ( )) origin. The unit normal at a point (x, y, z)
( () ( )) on the surface of the sphere is
(D) ( ( ) ( ))
(A) (x, y, z) (C) . /
√ √ √
(B) . /
IN – 2007
√ √ √ (D) . /
√ √ √
9. The value of the integral
∫ ∫ dx dy is. IN – 2010
(C) Π 17. The electric charge density in the region
(A) √π⁄
(D) π⁄ R: is given as
(B) √π
σ( ) , where x and y are in
meters. The total charge (in coulomb)
10. Consider the function f(x) = , where x
contained in the region R is
is real. Then the function f(x) at x = 0 is
(A) π (C) π⁄
(A) continuous but not differentiable
(B) π (D) 0
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 87
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
IN – 2013
21. For a vector E, which one the following
statement is NOT TRUE?
(A) E E o o
(B) If E E is called conservative
(C) If E E is called irrotational
(D) E E -rotational
IN – 2014
22. A vector is defined as
̂ ̂ ̂
Where ̂ ̂ ̂ are unit vectors in
Cartesian ( ) coordinate system.
The surface integral ∯ f.ds over the
closed surface S of a cube with vertices
having the following coordinates:
(0,0,0),(1,0,0),(1,1,0),(0,1,0),(0,0,1),
(1,0,1),(1,1,1),(0,1,1) is________
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 88
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ME = 0 o 1
1. [Ans. A]
√ √
Since, potential function of ⃗ is x²yz = 0 1
( ) ( ) ( )
9. [Ans. B]
2. [Ans. D]
o h 10. [Ans. B]
π h π o ( ) ( )
For V to be max
This is of the form . /
Hence, h Applying L hospital rule
( )
. /
3. [Ans. A]
=
( ) | | | | =
=
11. [Ans. B]
Let the vectors be
4. [Ans. A]
After changing order ∫ ∫ ( )
12. [Ans. B]
Applying ’ Hospital rule, we get
Given: √ √ √
I=
( ) √
I=
( )
8. [Ans. A]
For
∫ 0 1 [ ]
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 89
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
16. [Ans. B]
h o o o Φ 20. [Ans. D]
⃗⃗ div {( )̂ ( )̂ ( )̂}
along a vector ⃗ ( Φ)
( ) ( ) ( )
Hence directional derivative is
( ̂ ̂) =3
(grad (x2+2y2+z)).
√
̂ ̂)
(2x ̂ ̂ ̂ ). ( 21. [Ans. C]
=
Hence at (1,1,2),
⇒
Directional derivative =
⇒ ( )
17. [Ans. A]
I = ∬ .dx dy
⇒ ( )
The limit of y is form 0 to and limit
of x from 0 to 2 ( )( )
I =∫ ∫ ∫ . /
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 90
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
24. [Ans. B]
x4
4x Y
16
or x4 64x B
or x(x 64) 0
3
or x3 64 A
X
or x 4 x = cos
y 4 y=sin
Required area = ∫ .√ / Path is x2 y2 1
2 x3
4
R e
2 x3 2
3 120 (x y)2 1 2sin cos
2 2
4 64 cos2
(4)3 2 (1 sin2)d
3 12 0 2 0
32 16 16 1 1
= 1
3 3 3 2 2 2 2
Alternately Alternately
For point where both parabolas cut each Given: x2 y2 1
other
Put x=cos , and y=sin
y2 4x, x2 4y
x 4 4x
2
x y 2 cos2 sin2 2sincos
= 1 sin2
or x2 8 x
or x4 64x
∫ ( )
or x3 64
x 4,0 ,(4,0) cos2 1 1
2
Required area 2 0 2 2 2
4 4
x2
4x dx 1
0 0 4 2
4
2 x3 16
2 x3 2 25. [Ans. C]
3 120 3
F 3xzi 2xyj yz2k
⃗ ⃗
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 91
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
( ) ( ) ( ) √
3z 2x 2yz
π ∫ π* +
At point (1, 1, 1), divergence =3+2 2=3
π
π( )
26. [Ans. D]
⃗
o ⃗ ⃗ 30. [Ans. D]
̂ ̂ ̂ If f(x) even function
∫ ( ) ∫ ( )
|| ||
31. [Ans. D]
̂ ( )̂ Standard limit formulae
o ( ) ̂ ̂
32. [Ans. B]
27. [Ans. C]
⇒ 33. [Ans. C]
The function is continuous in [ 1, 1]
It is also differentiable in [ 1, 1] except at
x = 0.
Since Left derivative = 1 and
Right derivative = 1 at x = 0
1 1 2
34. [Ans. B]
o
y is continuous for all x R, and
differentiable for all x R, except at , Using this standard limit, here a = 1 then
since at o o ’ h = ( ) /2 =1/2
value towards the left and right side of
35. [Ans. D]
( )
( )
28. [Ans. D] ( )
( )
∫ , - π
f(x) has a point of inflection at x =0.
∫ π ( )
Volume from x = 1 to x = 2, ̂ ̂ ̂
̂ ̂ ̂
∫π
( )
√ √
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 92
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
̂ 38. [Ans. A]
̂ ̂
√ √ By Gauss Divergence theorem,
√ ̂ √ ̂ ̂
√ √ ∬( ̅ ̅) ∭( )
The unit outward normal vector at point
P is (Surface Integral is transformed to
volume Integral)
( )
( ) ( ) ( )
(√ ̂ √ )̂
̂ ̂
√ √
∭( ) ∭
37. [Ans. A]
The area enclosed is shown below as
shaded π
π
( ) ∬( ̅ ̂) ∭( )
( π)
( ) π
The coordinates of point P and Q is
obtained by solving 39. [Ans. C]
y = x and y = simultaneously,
i.e. x = ∫(√ ) ( )
⇒ ( )
⇒ Using Integration by parts
Now, x = 0 ⇒ which is point Q(0,0) ∫ ∫
and x = 1 ⇒ which is point
P(1,1) Here,
So required area is f=ln(x) and dg=√
and g=
∫ ∫ o
∫(√ ) ( )
* + * +
[ ] ∫ ( )
[ ] [ ]
( )
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 93
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
40. [Ans. A] π
0 o 1
So the minimum value is
[Differentiating both . /
=
o o o w ’
Hospital method]
. / 45. [Ans. D]
o o o o ( ) o
o o
( ) ( )
otherwise it is said to be discontinuous.
41. [Ans. B] So the most appropriate option is D.
G o
46. [Ans. C]
̂ ̂ ̂ ( )
| |
Div
Vectors are linearly dependent
42. [Ans. B]
( )
) (
( ) 47. [Ans. B]
, ho - Let
o ( )( )
( )
( ) ( )
o ( )( ) ∫
( ) o ( )
43. [Ans. A] ∫
̂ ̂ ̂ o
( ) () o o
⃗
[ ]
48. [Ans. B]
̂[ ( ) ( )]
∫ ∫ ∫ |
̂[ ( ) ( )]
∫ , -
̂[ ( ) ( )]
,̂ - ,̂ - ̂, - ∫ ( ) |
( )̂ ( )̂ ( )̂
[ ]
44. [Ans. *] Range 1.00 to 0.94
h o , - , -
π
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 94
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Here I = ∮ ( )
, ∫ ∫ -
∮ (( ) ( ) )
= xy =∫ ∫ ( o )
= y and = 2y o
∫( )
’ h o w
I= ∫ ∫ , ( )-
π
. / | |
=∫ ∫
=∫ ∫ π π π √
. / ( )
2. [Ans. D] π π √
* ( )+
Since the position of rail engine S(t) is
continuous and differentiable function π π √
* +
according to Lagrange’s mean value
theorem more π √
( ) ( ) ( )
(t) = v(t) =
( )
= m/sec
= × kmph 4. [Ans. C]
= 126 kmph f = 2 +3 ( )⃗
Where v(t) is the velocity of the rail
engine.
= 4xi + 6yj + 2zk
3. [Ans. D] At P (2, 1, 3)
h ’ o h
r=2acos Directional derivation ̂
(i) r = a represents a circle with centre ( )
( )
( ) ‘ ’ √ ( )
(ii) r = 2acos represents a circle ( ) ( ) ( )
symmetric about OX with centre at
√
( ) ‘ ’
The circles are shown in figure below. At
√
h o o o ‘ ’
P 5. [Ans. A]
y Q
Potential function,
π 3
x
O A
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 95
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
8. [Ans. D]
Put √
Integrating ∫ ∫
=√
wh o
=√ …… ( )
⇒
Now given equation is
……….. (ii)
6. [Ans. B] h h h
Let I(α) ∫ dx …( ) ( ) ( )
=∫ ( ) . / = ( √ ) [ from eqn(i)]
= ∫
h
Then Integrating by parts we get, √ ( )
= 0 ( α o )1
h h
= . / √ ( ( ) )
=
h
dI = √ ( √ )
Integrating, I = α
( ) o () ( ) h
+C=0
C=
π Now substitute in eqn (ii) we get
(α) α
h h
π
( )
I(0) = h h
⇒
But from equation (i), I(0) = ∫ dx
h h
⇒
∫ dx =
Which is the desired form
7. [Ans. D]
√ is the correct transformation.
̅=5 +2 + 3y ⃗
(⃗ ) 9. [Ans. C]
̅ ̅=0
= 5y + 4y + 6yz
̅ ̅ o
At(1, 1, 1)
If ̅ ̅ = 0
div ( ) = 5.1 + 4.1 + 6.1.1
= 15 o
Since P and Q are non-zero vectors
o
0
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 96
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
10. [Ans. A] √
Since the limit is a function of x. We first √
√ √
integrate w.r.t. y and then w.r.t. x √
∫ ∫( )
13. [Ans. D]
Length of curve f(x) between x = a and
x = b is given by
∫ ∫( )
∫√ ( )
∫ * +
Here, 4h … … ( )
= 8h
∫ ( )
Since
and y = h at x =
∫ ( )
(As can be seen from equation (i), by
substituting x = 0 and x = L/2)
* ( ) ( )+
(Length of cable)
* + =∫ √ . /
h
ho ∫ √
11. [Ans. B]
f = + 3 +2 14. [Ans. A]
f = grad f = i +j +k
= i(2x) + j(6y) + k(4z)
The gradient at P(1, 2, 1) is
= i(2×1) + j(6×2) + k(4 ( ))
= 2i + 12j – 4k 15. [Ans. A]
( )
12. [Ans. B]
( )
⃗
⃗ ̂
⃗ Putting,
⃗
√
o ̂ Given,
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 97
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Since, π
⇒λ
Since, ⇒λ
We have either a maxima or minima at
. / 18. [Ans. A]
( )
19. [Ans. A]
Area = |̅ ̅ |
̅̅̅̅ ̅̅̅̅
R ( ) ( )
2I = |
∫ o o
I = a/2
⇒ o
17. [Ans. C]
For a function f(x) to be continuous, ⇒ ∫ ( )
at x=a
( ) ( ) ∫ ( )
If f(x) is continuous at x=
π λ o * +
. /
[ ]
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 98
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
( ) ( ) ( )
[ ] | |
π π
∫ o
∫ o ( o )
( )
∫ o o
o ( )
∫ o
( )
[ ] ⇒
Magnitude of acceleration
22. [Ans. C] =√ ( )
( ) 25. [Ans. B]
We have
⇒ ( )
∫ ( )
⇒
, ow - ∫ ( ) ∫ ( )
=1+0=1
Hence correct option is (C)
∫ ( )
23. [Ans. A]
(4, 3)
a
(2, 2)
c
b x ( )μ
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 99
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
26. [Ans. A]
=
α = =1
Use L – hospital Rule
4. [Ans. A]
α
P=∑ … ( –1)
o
= log x ‘ ’ w h a =1, l=2k 1
P= ( ) ( )
CS =
1. [Ans. B] Q=∑ … k
1
n 1 r
Cr xr ‘ ’ w h k
1 x r0
n
( ) ( )
1
Putting n=2, 21 r
Cr xr
1 x 2 r0
r1 Cr xr r1 C1xr ⇒
r 0 r 0
r 1 xr i 1 xi 5. [Ans. D]
r 0 i 0 y = 3 – 16 – 24 + 37
(since r is a dummy variable, r can be = 12 48 – 48 x = 0
replaced by i)
x (12 – 48x 48 ) = 0
x = 0 or 12 – 48x – 48 = 0
∑ ()
4x – 4 = 0
g(i) =i+1 √ √ √
x= = =
=2 √
2. [Ans. A]
f(x)= |x| = 36 96x 48
Continuity: In other words, Now at x = 0
f(x) = x o ≥ = 48 0
x for x< 0
Since, = =0 , At 2 ± √ also 0 (using
f (x) is continuous for all real values of x calculator)
Differentiability: There are 3 extrema in this function
( ) ( )
( ) 6. [Ans. D]
( )
Since ∫ ( ) =∫ ( )
R h
I =∫
So |x| is continuous but not differentiable
( )
at x=0 =∫
( )
Since tan (A B) =
3. [Ans. A]
⁄
= ⁄
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 100
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
[ ]
∫
[ ]
9. [Ans. B]
0 1
∫ f(x) = sin x
0 1 ⇒ ( ) o
( ) ⇒ o
( ) ( ) π π π π
∫ [ ]
( ) ( )
( )
∫ ∫ At . / gives maximum
value
=, ( )- At . / gives minimum
= ln ( sec ) – ln (sec 0) value
= ln (√ ) ( )
= ln ( )–0= 10. [Ans. A]
For x = , f(x) =
7. [Ans. B] For x = , f(x) = 3 – 1 = 2
For x = 3, f(x) = 2
( ) *( ) + ( ) ( ) = f(3)
* ( ) + 11. [Ans. C]
By Mean value theorem
. /
( ) [ ]
12. [Ans. A]
Define g(x) = f(x) – f(x + 1) in [0, 1]. g(0)
is negative and g(1) is positive. By
8. [Ans. D] intermediate value theorem there is
€( ) h h g(y) = 0
o That is f(y) = f(y + 1)
∫
o Thus Answer is (A)
∫ 13. [Ans. 2]
* w +
* w +
∫ For min maximum non – common
elements must be there
⇒ * +
* + must be common to any 2 elements
of V1
[ ] ( )minimum value = 2
, -( o π π )
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 101
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
14. [Ans. 4]
∫ | ∫∫
∫ π
o ( )
oπ π o (π)
π o π π
Hence option (A) is correct
∫ ∫( )
ECE
1. [Ans. C]
∫ ∫ (∫ )
dy
o ∫ o 0 for x< 0
dx
o dy
0 for x> 0
Substituting the limits dx
π o (π) o ( )
π 2. [Ans. A]
ex
∫ Given, f x
1 ex
f ' x
1 e .e e
x x 2x
ex
0
1 e x 2
∫ | ∫∫ 2
1 ex
= x cos 3. [Ans. C]
= π o ( π) π o π ∫
= π
LHS = I + II = π π π⇒
∫( o )
∫
| |
∫ ( ) ( )
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 102
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
8. [Ans. A]
Given, f x x2 x 2
df x
0
dx
4. [Ans. A] 2x 1=0
o ’ h o 1
x
∬( ) ∮ 2
d2f x
= 2 ve
5. [Ans. D] dx2
From vector triple product So it shows only minima for interval
( ) ( ) ( ) [ 4, 4], it contains a maximum value that
Here, will be at x= 4 or x=4
⇒ ( ) ( ) ( ) f( 4)=18 and f(+4)=10
( ) ( )
9. [Ans. D]
6. [Ans. A] y f x ; x 0,
( )
For strictly bounded, 0 limy
x x0 f' x0 x x0 f'' x0
2 x0
f x0 ...... or 0 lim y
1 2 x
x 22 2
So, y e x is strictly bounded
e (x 2)(e
2 2
)
2
e ......
2
e2 3 x
x 22 ...... 10. [Ans. A]
2 sin /2 1 sin /2
lim lim
0 0 2
/2
(Neglecting higher power of x)
1 sin /2 1
= lim
7. [Ans. C] 2 0 /2 2
ex e x
coth (x)= =
ex ex
11. [Ans. B]
x x2 x3 Two points on line are ( 1, 0) and (0, 1)
e 1 ..........
x
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 103
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
4
I 4x3 10 2x dx 4x3 160x4 dx
0 0
1
4x4 160 5
= x 33
5 0
(1, 0)
4
∫( ) 16. [Ans. A]
f(x)= +
(x)= =0 x=0
∫ ∫ (x)= + >0 x R.
Hence minimum at x=0
f(0)=1+1=2
[ | | ] Alternatively:
For any even function the maxima &
minima can be found by
13. [Ans. B] A.M. >= GM
Let f(x) ex sinx => exp(x) + exp( x) ≥ 2
o ’ Hence minimum value = 2
f x f a x a f'a
x a
2
f x f x f'
x
2
f''
2!
f '' P
Coefficient of (x )2 is
2
f'' ex sinx |at x e
Coefficient of (x )2=0.5 exp () ∫( )
14. [Ans. A]
∫ ∫
o [ | | ]
Thus, ( )w h o ow
( )w h ow
o ( )w h ow
o ( )w h ow
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 104
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
20. [Ans. C] ( )∭
̂ ̂ ( and is the position vector)
⃗⃗⃗ ̂ ̂
⃗⃗⃗ ⃗⃗⃗ 23. [Ans. A]
Y
̂ ̂
S R
3 ̅ ( )]
⇒ [
1 Q
P ⇒ [ ( )]
X ⇒ ( )
√ √
⇒ ( ) ⇒
∮ ⃗ ⃗⃗⃗
⇒
∫ ⃗ ⃗⃗⃗ ∫ ⃗ ⃗⃗⃗ ∫ ⃗ ⃗⃗⃗ ∫ ⃗ ⃗⃗⃗
√
24. [Ans. C]
√
∫ ⃗ ⃗⃗⃗ ∫ * + [ ] ( ) , -
√ √ ( ) ( )
= [ along PQ y =1 dy =0] ( ) ⇒
are the stationary points
∫ ⃗ ⃗⃗⃗ ∫ .√ / , - ( )
( ) ( )
∫ ⃗ ⃗⃗⃗
√
∫√ . / and f(2) = 25 and f(4)=21
√ √
M o ( ) , -
[ ] f(6)=41
∫ ⃗ ⃗⃗⃗ ∫ .√ / ( )
25. [Ans. B]
∮ ⃗ ⃗⃗⃗
⇒
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 105
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
o 30. [Ans. C]
E o
( )
π
⇒
31. [Ans. *] Range to 0.01
E o o ( ) ( )
26. [Ans. D] ( )
̅ ̂ ̂ ̂ ⇒
⇒
( )
= ( )
=1+1+1 ( )
=3 o h
∫ * +
∫
Given o …
( )( o )
29. [Ans. A]
o o
( )
̇( ) ⇒ ( ) o ⇒
⇒ ( ) o
Since ( ) is negative, maximum value of ⇒
o
f(x) will be where ( )
0( )
1
⇒ ⇒
o oh
⇒ ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ( )( ))
( )
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 106
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE ∫ ( ) ∫ ( π )
1. [Ans. C] On simplification we get option (D)
Grad u = ̂ ⁄
7. [Ans. B]
At (1, 3) Grad u = √ ,( ⁄ ) - f(x) = ( )
(x) = 2( )
=√ =4x( ) =0
x = 0, x = 2 and x = 2 are the stationary
2. [Ans. A] points.
f(x) = (x) = 4[x(2x) +( ) ]
(x) = ( ) = 4[2 -
= ( ) = 4 [3 -
Putting ( (x) = 0 = 12
( )=0 (0) = < 0, maxima at x = 0
( )=0 (2) =(12)
x = 0 or x = 2 are the stationary points. = 32 > 0, minima at x =
Now, ( 2) =12( )
(x) = ( ) ( )( ) = 32 > 0; minima at x =
= ( ( )) There is only one maxima and only two
= ( ) minima for this function.
At x = 0, (0) = ( )=2
Since (x) = 2 is > 0 at x = 0 we have a
minima.
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 107
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
8. [Ans. A] = , -
=, ( )-
= ( ) ( ) =1
1
14. [Ans. B]
0 Dot product of two vectors
=1+a+ =0
So orthogonal
√
15. [Ans. C]
∫ ∫ ( ) f(x) =
( )
( )
9. [Ans. C] So the equation f(x) having only maxima
( ) at x = 1
( )
( ) 16. [Ans. B]
( )
( ) ̇̂
̂
̂ ̂ ̂
10. [Ans. D]
̅=( ̂ ̂ ̂
)̂ ( )̂
( ) = (0, 2) ∫ ∫
( ) = (2, 0)
Along x axis ,y=0,z=0
Equation of starting line = The integral reduces to zero.
⇒ y = 2 – x , dy = – dx
̅ ̅ =( ) ( ) 17. [Ans. D]
Putting y = 2 – x and dy = – dx
∫̅ ̅ ∫ ∫ ( ) C o o ‘ ’
( )
11. [Ans. B] .( )̂ ( )̂
( )̂ /
( )
̂ ̂ ̂
But at is undefined
Discontinuous || ||
( ) ( ) ( )
12. [Ans. A] ̂ ( ) ̂ ( ) ̂ ( )
̂ ̂ ̂
=0
Div ( ) ⃗
̂
=. ̂ ̂ /( ̂ ̂ ̂) 18. [Ans. A]
= 1+1+1= 3 ( ) ( ) ( )
o ( ) ( )
13. [Ans. B] ⇒
M
P=∫
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 108
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
19. [Ans. B] π
0 . /1
∫⃗
∫ [ ]
⇒ o o π 23. [Ans. A]
( ⃗) ⃗ ⃗
∫ ( )( )( )
( ) ( )
⃗
o
∫ ( ) [ ]
π 24. [Ans. B]
( )
20. [Ans. C] ( ) ⇒
⇒
( ) ( )
⇒( )( )
( ) ⇒
( )
( ) w , -
For number of values of ( )
⁄ ( )
o ( ) ( )
( )
( ) ( )
( ) ( )
M ( )
21. [Ans. B] IN
G 1. [Ans. A]
o h o
⇒
o o
( )
⇒ o
Unit vector along y = x is
G ∫ (∫ ) π
̂ o
∫ (∫ ) ̂
√ √
o ̂
22. [Ans. 2] . /. /
( ) √ √
π π π √ √
∫ ∫ o . / . /
√
√
2. [Ans. D]
Using L Hospital Rule., numerator
()
becomes = = ( )
From the graph, distance at
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 109
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
3. [Ans. B] When
Given integral is, I=∫ ( ) ( )
Let f(x) = so curve of 1/ will be And when
f(x)
( ) ( )
The possible expression for f(x) is
1 . /
7. [Ans. B]
-1 0 1 x
Error,
This curve will be discontinuous at x=0
o ’ w o For error to be minimum
( o ) ( )
4. [Ans. A]
Let R ̂ z (t) ̂
̅ (t) =x (t) ̂+y (t) + ⇒ o
̅( ) =K (constant)
|R ⇒
i.e., (t) + (t) + (t) = constant.
⇒
On analyzing the given (A) option, we find √
̅( )
̅(t)
that R will give constant magnitude,
so first differentiation of the integration will √
be zero.
5. [Ans. C] 1
Given : G
f= + …… + o
where, (i=0 to n) are constant.
= +(n 1) ……
+ ⇒
√
and =0+ + ……
(n 1) +n ⇒
√
+
⇒ ( )
= , + + -
= nf ⇒
⇒
6. [Ans. B]
8. [Ans. B]
( ) ( )
When () ∫ ( ) …( )
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 110
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
() 14. [Ans. B]
, ()
Given y = x2 + 2x + 10
= 2x + 2
∫ ( ) -
|
1 +1 X
1
, - o
9. [Ans. D]
Area = ( )
Total charge = σ
10. [Ans. A]
This is a standard question of =
differentiability & continuity = coulomb.
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 111
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
21. [Ans. D]
.E=0 is not irrational (it is solenoidal)
22. [Ans. 1]
From Gauss divergence theorem, we have
∫ ̅ ̅ ∫ ̅ ∫ ̅
∫. /dxdydz
∫ ∫ ∫ ( )
̅ ̂ ̂ ̂
[ ]
⇒
23. [Ans. C]
24. [Ans. D]
/
π
π
o .
( π )
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 112
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Differential Equations
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 113
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ME – 2011 x x
,y- * + ,y-
12. Consider the differential equation t
x x
y x. The general solution with ,y- * + ,y-
t
constant c is
(A) y t n t n 17. If y = f(x) is the solution of with
(B) y t n ( ) the boundary conditions y t
(C) y t n ( ) x at x __________
(D) y t n( )
18. The general solution of the differential
equation os x y with c as a
ME – 2012
constant, is
13. Consider the differential equation
(A) y s n x y x
x x y with the boundary
(B) t n ( ) y
conditions of y(0) =0 and y(1) = 1. The
complete solution of the differential (C) os ( ) x
equation is (D) t n ( ) x
(A) x (C) s n( )
(B) s n ( ) 19. Consider two solution x(t) = x t and
(D) s n( )
x t x t of the differential equation
x t
ME – 2013 x t t su t t
14. The partial differential equation t
x t
u is a x |
t
(A) linear equation of order 2 x t
(B) non – linear equation of order 1 x |
t
(C) linear equation of order 1
x t x t
(D) non – linear equation of order 2 The wronskian W(t) =| | t
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 115
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
13. The solution to the ordinary differential 2. The following differential equation has
3
equation + 6y = 0 is d2y dy
3 4 y2 2 x
(A) y= + dt2 dt
(B) y= + (A) degree=2, order=1
(C) y= + (B) degree=1, order=2
(D) y= + (C) degree=4, order=3
(D) degree=2, order=3
14. The partial differential equation that can
be formed from z = ax + by + ab has the ECE – 2006
form (w t p n q ) d2y
3. For the differential equation 2
k2y 0
(A) z = px + qy dx
(B) z = px + pq the boundary conditions are
(C) z = px + qy + pq (i) y=0 for x=0 and
(D) z = qx + pq (ii) y=0 for x=a
The form of non-zero solutions of y
CE – 2011 (where m varies over all integers) are
15. The solution of the differential equation m x
y ∑ sn
+ = x, with the condition that y = 1 at
m x
x = 1, is y ∑ os
(A) y = + (C) y = +
y ∑ x
(B) y = + (D) y = +
y ∑
CE – 2012
16. The solution of the ordinary differential
equation y=0 for the boundary ECE – 2007
condition, y=5 at x = 1 is 4. The solution of the differential equation
(A) y (C) y d2y
k2 y y 2 under the boundary
(B) y (D) y dx2
conditions
CE – 2014 (i) y=y1 at x=0 and
17. The integrating for the differential (ii) y=y2 at x=, where k, y1 and y2 are
equation s constants, is
(A) y y y xp( x⁄ ) y
(A) (C)
(B) y y y xp x⁄ y
(B) (D)
(C) y y y s n x⁄ y
(D) y y y xp x⁄ y
ECE – 2005
1. A solution of the following differential
ECE – 2008
equation is given by
5. Which of the following is a solution to the
d2y dy
5 6y 0 differential equation x t x t
dx2 dx
(A) t
(A) y e e (C) y e e
2x 3x 2x 3x (C) x t t
(B) x t
(D) x t t
(B) y e e (D) y e e
2x 3x 2x 3x
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 116
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 117
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(B) y x (D) y x
EE – 2014
5. The solution for the differential equation
17. If a and b are constants, the most general x
solution of the differential equation x w t n t l on t ons x
t
x x x
x s n | s
t t t
(A) (C) bt (A) t t
(B) bt (D) (B) s n t os t
(C) s n t os t
18. With initial values y(0) = y (0) = 1, the
solution of the differential equation (D) os t t
y tx s
6. Consider the differential equation
x x y
EE – 2005
1. The solution of the first order differential Which of the following is a solution to this
qu t on x’ t 3x(t), x (0) = x is differential equation for x > 0?
(A) x (t) = x (C) x (t) = x (A) (C) x
(B) x (t) = x (D) x (t) = x (B) x (D) ln x
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 118
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 119
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
IN– 2014
11. The figure shows the plot of y as a
function of x
x
y
x
y
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 120
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ME 4. [Ans. B]
1. [Ans. D] The given differential equation may be
lnx written as
x y xy
x y y y
lnx ux l ry qu t on s
y y
x x
lnx
omp r ng w g t
x x
∫ ∫
ow x Substituting D=2, we get
y(I.F.) = ∫ x
( )
x y ∫ x x
3. [Ans. C] 6. [Ans. A]
Given equation is Order: The order of a differential equation
y y is the order of the highest derivative
p q appears in the equation
x x
p q y Degree: The degree of a differential
ut p n q equation is the degree of the highest
y order differential coefficient or derivative,
when the differential coefficients are free
from radicals and fraction.
The general solution of differential
y x qu t on o or r ‘n’ must nvolv ‘n’
arbitrary constant.
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 121
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
7. [Ans. C] y
( )y x …
y x x
v n y Standard form
x
y y
x y …
y x
Where P and Q function of x only and
nt gr t ng x
y solution is given by
y ∫ x
x
nx y ∫
Where, integrating factor (I.F)
r n x
x
y
x ∫
x
x
x olut on y x ∫x x x
x and x x
yx
8. [Ans. A] Given condition
y y y
y
A.E is, D2+2D+1 =0
2=0
m ns t x y
m 1
The C.F. is (C1+C2x)e-x
P.I. = 0
ow y ₁
n y ₂ ₂
x
r or yx
y x
y
x
9. [Ans. D]
ẍ x 11. [Ans. B]
Auxiliary equation is
is third order ( ) and it
m2 + 3 = 0
i.e. m = ±√ is linear, since the product is not
x os√ t sn√ t allowed in linear differential equation
ẋ √ os√ t s n√ t
At t = 0 12. [Ans. D]
1=A y
y x
0=B x
y
x = os √ t ∫ ∫ x
y
x os √ t
x
t n y
10. [Ans. A]
x
Given differential equation is y t n. /
y
x y x
x
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 122
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
n 19. [Ans. A]
u x Since the determinant of wronskian
matrix is constant values for, therefore it
is same for both t=0 and t=
Solving we get u = U( ) x t x t
t x t x t
t t
16. [Ans. A]
x
x y
t
y 20. [Ans. B]
x y y
t ∫ ∫ x x ln y x ln
So by observation it is understood that, y
y
x x ln ( ) x y
,y- * + ,y-
t
v ny
n y
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 123
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
CE y
tx s
1. [Ans. A] x
Given + p(t) y = q(t) y ; n > 0
Given, v = y
v y
n y
t t
y v n
t n y t
Substitution in the differential equation y ( os x sn x)
we get
+ p(t)y = q(t) y 3. [Ans. A]
Multiplying by (1 n) y we get …
v t
p t n y q t n Where, V = r
t
Now since y = v we get r
v r
n pv n q r
t t t
Where p is p (t) and q is q(t) Substituting in (i) we get
4 r = r )
2. [Ans. A]
r
y y
y t
x x dr = kdt
y
Integration we get
y
( ) r = kt + C
x
This is a linear differential equation At t = 0, r = 1
1= k×0+C
± C=1
y r = kt + 1
Now at t = 3 months r = 0.5 cm
( )
0.5 = k × 3 + 1
os x sn x
os x
sn x
os x r t
sn x utt ng r n solv ng g v s
t n
y os x sn x t
n y t = 6 months
os sn
4. [Ans. A]
sn x os x Given
y
os x sn x x xy – x x y
x
sn x
y
os x x xy x
x
Dividing by x
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 124
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
6. [Ans. B] = 25 + 35 × ( ) (s n )
Degree of a differential equation is the = 31.
power of its highest order derivative after ≈ C
the differential equation is made free of
radicals and fractions if any, in derivative
power.
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 125
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 126
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
m x
y ∑ sn
x
ot solut on s y
x
4. [Ans. D]
16. [Ans. D] k2D2y= y y2
y 2 1 y2
x
y D k2 y k2
y
1
y m1 =
y k
C.F. = C1e C2 e
x/k x/k
3. [Ans. A] 6. [Ans. B]
Given, Differential equation, The order of a differential equation is the
d2y order of the highest derivative involving
k2y 0
dx2 in equation, so answer is 2.
Auxilary equation is The degree of a differential equation is
y the degree of the highest derivative
± involving in equation, so answer is 1.
Let y os x sn x
At x=0, y = 0 A=0 7. [Ans. A]
y sn x P. ∫ ∫
At x=a, y=0 B sin ka=0
log y log x log
B0 otherwise y=0 always
y xw s qu t on o str g t l n
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 127
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Q. ∫ ∫ 11. [Ans. C]
S. ∫y y ∫x x
xt
x y … Equ t on o r l
12. [Ans. D]
8. [Ans. B]
Approach 1:
y x
y x x y t y t
x y t t
t t
x y Converting to s-domain
x y y old y +0.1 ( ) new s y s sy y sy s y
x y s
x y y
s s y s s
0 0 0+0 0+0.1×0=0 s
=0 y s
s s
0. 0 0.1+0 0+0.1×0.1=0.01 n nv rs pl tr ns orm
1 =0.1 y t t u t
0. 0.0 0.2+0.01 0.01+0.21×0.1 y t
t
2 =0.21
1 =0.031 t
The value of y at x= 0.3 is 0.031. y t
|
t
9. [Ans. D]
n x Approach 2:
y t y t
Auxiliary equation m m ± y t t
t t
olut on n x Applying Laplace Transform on both
Since, n sides
y
Since, n (hence s y s sy |
t
must be zero)
(sy s y ) y s
Therefore
s y s s sy s y s
The solution is, n x s s
y s
s s s s
10. [Ans. C]
y t t t
Given y and y x t
t t
ln y x y
y t t
When
y t
y y t
t
y t
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 128
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
y t z
| x ln xy xy x x ln xy x
t y xy
z
ox xy ln xy xy
13. [Ans. D] x
z
Let the differential equation be y xy ln xy xy
y
y t
y t x t z z
t ox y
Apply Laplace transform on both sides x y
y t
2 y t 3 {x t } 17. [Ans. B]
t
x x
sy s y y s x s x
t t
s y s x s y
Pre auxiliary equation is
x s y
y s m m
s s
Pre roots of AE are m .
Taking inverse Laplace on both sides
Repeated roots are present.
x s
{y s } 2 3 y { } So, most general solution in
s s
n t bt
y t x t y
So if we want y t as a solution both 18. [Ans. *] Range 0.53 to 0.55
x(t) and y(0) has to be multiplied by . E m m m
Hence change x(t) by x t and y(0) by olut ons s y bx …
y y bx
b …
14. [Ans. A] s ng y
y y y n gv s
y
x x n b
The auxiliary equation is
y x
m m
tx y
± then either
m or m EE
i.e., roots of the equation are equal to 1. [Ans. A]
or v n x’ t x (t)
i.e. x
15. [Ans. A]
t
xy is a first order linear
x
equation non omog n ous ∫ ∫ t
x
xy 0 is a first order linear lnx = t
equation (homogeneous) x
r non l n r qu t ons Putting
x
16. [Ans. C] Now putting initial condition x(0) = x
z xy ln xy x
z x
y ln xy xy y y ln xy y
x xy Solution is x = x
i.e. x(t) = x
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 129
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
2. [Ans. B] 6. [Ans. C]
x x x y xy y
x
t t y y
y
Auxiliary equation m m x x
m m m w subst tut y
(m+4)(m+2)=0 x
m= 2, 4 t nx x x( )
x(t) = x x
n y s ts s
x
x(0) = 1 1= … (1)
IN
|
1. [Ans. C]
… y
On solving (1) & (2), we get and m m
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 130
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
6. [Ans. A] Hyperbolic if
Given = 1 + y2 El ps
Compare the given differential equation
Integrating ∫ =∫ x
with standard from A = 1, B = 0, C = 0
Or t n y = x + c
Or y = t n x Parabolic
y= ẏ s nx os x
ẏ
y
y
So, y os x s n x
y or m x m
y s nx os x
s nx os x
8. [Ans. C]
x
y os x s n x
y or x m xm
The solution for the differential equation
y m x os sn
is
y x √
√ √ √
Now, y and y , placing these
values
11. [Ans. D]
We get, and
By back tracking, from option (D)
y
y
|x| x or x
x
= x or x
9. [Ans. A] Integrating
Given partial differential equation is y
∫ ∫ x x or x
x
x t
∫ x x or x
x t x
We know that y or
(x y ) x
or x
is said to be
Parabolic if
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 131
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Complex Variables
ME – 2007 ME – 2014
1. If x y and (x, y) are functions with 6. The argument of the complex number
continuous second derivatives, then
where i = √ , is
x y + i (x, y) π
π
can be expressed as an analytic function π 2
of x + i (i = √ ), when 2 π
(A)
7. The integral ∮ y x x y is evaluate
(B)
along the circle x + y traversed in
(C) + + counter clock wise direction. The integral
is equal to
(D) + π
(A) 0 –
π 2
– π
ME – 2008 4 4
2. The integral ∮ z z evaluated around
the unit circle on the complex plane for 8. An analytic function of a complex variable
z is z x + i y is expressed as
(A) 2πi (C) 2πi z u x y +iv x y
(B) 4πi (D) 0 where i √ f u(x,y)= 2xy, then
v(x,y) must be
ME – 2009 (A) x + y + onst nt
3. An analytic function of a complex variable (B) x y + onst nt
z = x + iy is expressed as (C) x + y + onst nt
f(z) = u(x, y) +iv(x, y) where i = 1 . (D) x y + onst nt
If u = xy, the expression of v should be
(A)
x y 2 k (C)
y 2
x2 k 9. An analytic function of a complex variable
z = x + i y is expressed as
2 2 f(z) = u(x, y) + i v(x, y),
(B)
x2
y 2
k (D)
x y 2 k where i = √ . If u (x, y) = x – y , then
2 2 expression for v(x, y) in terms of x, y and
a general constant c would be
ME – 2010 (A) xy + (C) 2xy +
4. The modulus of the complex number
(B) + (D) +
( ) is
(A) 5 (C) 1/√
10. If z is a complex variable, the value of
(B) √ (D) 1/5
∫ is
ME – 2011 (A) i
5. The product of two complex numbers (B) 0.511+1.57i
1 + i and 2 – 5i is (C) i
(A) 7 – 3i (C) 3 – 4i (D) 0.511+1.57i
(B) 3 – 4i (D) 7 + 3i
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 132
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
CE – 2005 CE – 2011
1. Which one of the following is NOT true for 6. For an analytic function,
complex number and ? f(x + iy) = u(x, y)+iv(x, y), u is given by
̅̅̅̅
(A) =| u = 3x 3y . The expression for v
|
considering K to be a constant is
(B) | + |≤| |+| |
(A) 3y 3x + k (C) 6x 6y+k
(C) | |≤| | | |
(B) 6y – 6x + k (D) 6xy +k
(D) | + | +| |
2| | + 2| |
CE – 2014
2. Consider likely applicable of u hy’s 7. z can be expressed as
integral theorem to evaluate the following (A) i (C) i
integral counter clockwise around the (B) + i (D) + i
unit circle c.
ECE – 2006
∮s z z 1. The value of the contour integral
∮| |
z in positive sense is
z being a complex variable. The value of I
(A) (C)
will be
(A) I = 0: singularities set = ϕ (B) (D)
(B) I = 0: singularities set
2. For the function of a complex variable
=, πn 2 -
W = In Z (where, W = u + jv and
(C) I π/2: singul riti s s t Z = x + jy), the u = constant lines get
{ nπ n 2 } mapped in Z-plane as
(D) None of the above (A) set of radial straight line
(B) set of concentric circles
CE – 2006 (C) set of confocal hyperbolas
3. Using Cauchy’s is integral theorem, the (D) set of confocal ellipses
value of the integral (integration being
taken in counter clockwise direction) ECE – 2007
∮ dz is 3. If the semi-circular contour D of radius 2
(A) 4πi (C) πi is as shown in the figure, then the value of
ECE – 2011
8. The value of the integral ∮ z
where is the circle |z| is given by lm nit ir l lm nit ir l
ECE\EE\IN – 2012 y
9. If x = √ then the value of x is y
⁄ (C) x
(A)
(B) ⁄ (D) 1 lmlm nit ir l lm nit ir l
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 134
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE – 2013 IN – 2005
3. ∮ z evaluated anticlockwise around 1. Consider the circle | | 2 in the
complex plane (x, y) with z = x + iy. The
the circle |z i| 2 where i √ , is
minimum distant form the origin to the
(A) 4π (C) 2 + π
circle is
(B) (D) 2 +2i
(A) √2 2 (C) √ 4
(B) √ 4 (D) √2
4. Square roots of – i, where i = √ , are
(A) i, i
2. Let ̅, where z is a complex number
(B) os ( ) + i sin ( ) not equal to zero. The z is a solution of
os ( ) + i sin ( ) (A) z (C) z
(B) z (D) z
(C) os ( ) + i sin ( )
os ( ) + i sin ( ) IN – 2006
3. The value of the integral of the complex
(D) os ( ) + i sin ( )
function
os ( ) + i sin ( ) 3s 4
f(s)
(s 1)(s 2)
EE – 2014 Along the path s 3is
5. Let S be the set of points in the complex (A) 2j (C) 6j
plane corresponding to the unit circle. (B) 4j (D) 8j
(That is, {z: |z| } . Consider the
function f(z)=zz* where z* denotes the IN – 2007
complex conjugate of z. The f(z) maps S to
4. For the function of a complex variable
which one of the following in the complex
plane z, the point z=0 is
(A) unit circle (A) a pole of order 3
(B) horizontal axis line segment from (B) a pole of order 2
origin to (1, 0) (C) a pole of order 1
(C) the point (1, 0) (D) not a singularity
(D) the entire horizontal axis
5. Let j = √ .Then one value of is
6. All the values of the multi-valued complex (A) √j (C)
function , where i √ are (B) 1
(D)
(A) purely imaginary.
(B) real and non-negative. IN – 2008
(C) on the unit circle. 6. A complex variable x+j has its
(D) equal in real and imaginary parts. real part x varying in the range
to + . Which one of the following is
7. Integration of the complex function the locus (shown in thick lines) of 1/Z in
z , in the counter clockwise the complex plane?
direction, around |z 1| = 1, is
(A) πi (C) πi
(B) (D) 2πi
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 135
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
IN – 2010
m gin ry
m gin ry
10. The contour C in the adjoining figure is
xis
xis
described by x + y . The value of
∮ z is.
l xis l xis
j (Note: √ )
j y
pl n
m gin ry
m gin ry
xis
xis
x
l xis l xis
j (A) 2πj (C) 4πj
j
(B) 2πj (D) 4πj
IN – 2009 IN – 2011
7. The value of ∮ where the contour 11. The contour integral ∮ / with C as
of integration is a simple closed curve the counter-clockwise unit circle in the z-
around the origin, is plane is equal to
(A) 0 (C) (A) 0 (C) 2π√
(D) (B) 2π (D)
(B) 2πj
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 136
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ME 4. [Ans. B]
1. [Ans. B] + 4i + 2i
By definition C-R equation holds 2i + 2i
+ i + 4i
+ 2i
2. [Ans. A] +4
f(z)= has simple pole at z = 0 Modulus = √
Residue of f(z) at z = 0
5. [Ans. A]
lim z z lim os z
+i 2 i
∫ z z 2πi (residue at z = 0)
2 i + 2i i i
2πi 2πi
6. [Ans. C]
3. [Ans. C]
+i +i + 2i + i
Given u=xy
For analytic function i i +i i
2i
u v i + i
2
x y
+i
u v rg ( ) t n ( )
and i
y x π⁄
2
By Milne Thomson method
Let w = u + iv 7. [Ans. C]
dw u v
i ∫y x x y
dz x x
u u y = r sin x r os
i
x y y r os x r sin
dw ∮ r sin r os
or y ix
dz
Replacing x by z and y by 0, we get π
∮ r r 2π
dw 2
0 iz
dz
Where, z = x + iy 8. [Ans. C]
u v
dw = izdz
x y
z2
Integrating, w i C v
2 2y
y
Where C is a constant,
2y
z + x v
v m0 i + 1 2
2 y + x v
(x2 y2 2ixy) u v
mi
2 y x
2x x
y 2 x2
or v 2x
2 + x
2
x x
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 137
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
v y x 2. [Ans. B]
y x + onst nt
∫s z z z ∫
os z
9. [Ans. C] The poles are at z = n + /2 π
iv n u x y = π/2 π/2 + π/2
v v None of these poles lie inside the unit
v x+ y
x y circle |z| =1
v u v u Hence, sum of residues at poles = 0
y x x y Singularities set = ϕ and
u u 2πi [sum o r si u s o t z t th
v x+ y
y x poles]
2y x + 2x y 2 πi
rm ont ing y t rms only llow
v 2 xy + 3. [Ans. A]
u hy’s int gr l th or m is
10. [Ans. B] f(a) = ∮ z
z
∫ ln z| ln i ln i.e. ∮ z 2πi
z
ln + ln i ln Now, ∮ z= ∮
( )
ln ln + ln i
z os + i sin pplying u hy’s int gr l th or m, using
z i i sin π/2 z z
z / i
+ i / .2πi ( )/
ln i ln z ln
π
( i i ) i
2 .2πi 0( ) 1/
CE i
.2πi 0( ) 1/
1. [Ans. C]
(A) is true since 2π
̅̅̅̅ ̅̅̅̅
i 4πi
= =|
̅̅̅̅ | 2π
(B) is true by triangle inequality of 4πi
complex number
(C) is not true since | |≥| | | | 4. [Ans. D]
(D) is true since z z z
z
| + |2 = ( + ) ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
+ z + z z i z+i
= ( + ) (z̅ + z̅ ) The singularities are at z = i and –i
= z̅ + z̅ + z̅ + z̅ i
And | |2 = ( + ) ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅ 5. [Ans. C]
= ( + ) (z̅ z̅ ) os 2πz
r ∫
= z̅ + z̅ z̅ + z̅ ii 2z z
Adding (i) and (ii) we get * +
| + |2 + | |2 = 2 z̅ + 2 z̅ ∫
2 *z +
= 2| | + 2| |
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 138
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
u = 3x2 – 3y2
For f to be analysis, we have Cauchy- Pole (0, 2) lies inside the circle |z j|=2
Riemann conditions, y u hy’s nt gr l ormul
u v ∮ z
i z +4
x y
|z j| 2
u v
ii 2j
y x I
From (i) we have 2j 2j 2
u v
x
x y
2. [Ans. B]
∫ v ∫ x y iv n log
1 y
v
x
+ x 2
u iv loge x iy log x2 y2 i tan1
x
2
Since, u is constant, therefore
i.e. v = 3x2 + f(x) iii
1
Now applying equation (iii) we get
2
log x2 y2 c
u v
y x x +y Which is represented set
of concentric circles.
y [ x+
x
3. [Ans. A]
x + y
x ∮ s 2πj sum o r si u
y x Singular points are s =
x
By integrating, Only s= +1 lies inside the given contour
f(x) = 6yx – 3x2 + K lims 1 f s
Residues at s= +1 = S1
Substitute in equation (iii)
1 1
lims 1
v= 3x2 + 6yx – 3x2 + K S1 S 1 2
2
v yx + K
n ∮ s 2πj ( ) πj
s 2
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 139
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
4. [Ans. A] + z+
(z )
Residue of z=2 is z z
d
lim
z2 dz
z 2 f z
2
+
+
d 1 2 1 F(z 2πj + )
lim lim
z 2 z 2 32
z2 dz 2
z 2 3
7. [Ans. C]
5. [Ans. D] X(z) =
sin z Poles are Z= 0, Z =1, Z=2
Residue at Z=0 is lim
2i
Residue at Z =1 is lim
2 i
Residue z =2 is lim
2 i
( ) 2 i 8. [Ans. A]
ut m z+4
m 2 im ∮ z
z + 4z +
2 i √ 2 i 4
m z + 4z + z+2 +
2
z 2 j will be outside the unit circle
2 i √ 2 i + i√
o th t int gr tion v lu is ‘z ro’
2 2
i √ i 9. [Ans. A]
m i √ i i i√ i √ x
iz log i √ i ty x log y x log x
iz log i + log( √ )
π ⟹ log y i log i i log
iz log + i ( 2nπ) π π
2 log y i i
2 2
+log √
π ⟹y
iz i ( 2nπ) + log √
2
π 10. [Ans. C]
z ( 2nπ) ilog( √ )
2 ∫ z z *∫ z ∫ z+
( 2
infinite number of complex solutions
∫ z
sin z has infinite no. of complex 2πj z+
solutions where f (z) =1
6. [Ans. D]
f(z) = + z 11. [Ans. C]
+ z + + z s z 2j
z ∮ z
z z
lim z + 2j 4+ j
+ z+
∮( ) 2πj[ 4 + j 4π + 2j
z
F z 2 π j r si u o
Residue at z = 0 ( 2- order )
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 140
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
12. [Ans. B]
Suppose that z u x y + iv x y is √ +
analytic then, u and v satisfy the Cauchy o / is outside the unit circle is IV
Riemann equation quadrant
u v u v
n
x y y x 3. [Ans. A]
r u xy os x z 4
u v ∮
z +4
sin x
x y |z i| 2
u v z +4
os x
y x z 4
v sin x z 2i
For z 2i
EE Residue at z +2i
1. [Ans. B] 4 4
+2i
Pole (z=i) lies inside the circle. |z-i/2|=1. z + 2i +4i
Hence t z 2i li insi
tz 2i li outsi
∮ z ∮ z
z + z+i z i z 4
o∮ 2πi sum o r si u
∮ z 2 πi i , wh r z - z +4
2πi 2i
2 πi π 4π
2i
2. [Ans. D] 4. [Ans. B]
Let + i Let + i √ i
Since Z is shown inside the unit circle in I Squaring both sides we get
quadrant, a and B are both +ve and +2 i i
Equating real and imaginary parts
√ +
ow 2
+ i
i wh n 2
i 2
+ + +
Since i
√2
√ + i i
wh n
√2 √2
+ i i i
+i +i ( ) +
o in qu r nt √2 √2 √2 √2
i i
wh n
√2 √2
| | √( ) +( ) i i i
+ + +i + i( ) +
√2 √2 √2 √2
i
√ +( )
+ √ + √2 √2
π π
in √ + os ( ) + i sin ( )
4 4
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 141
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
or x y
π π r uis o th ir l
os ( ) + i sin ( )
4 4 x + y 4
x 2
5. [Ans. C]
x √2
z zz |z|
n s {z: |z| }
z √2 x √2 2
All point of s will be mapped on the
2. [Ans. C]
point (1, 0)
z z̅
6. [Ans. B] Multiply both the side by z, we get
z z̅ z
z
z |z|
log z i log
z r l n Non-negative |z| |z| wh r is ngl o z
since |z| is a real quantity so in order to
7. [Ans. C] satisfy above equation has to be real
∫ x x 2πi r s (f(a)) where a is a quantity = 1 and
singularity in contour c , (where n = +2 )
r |z | n o |z |
pol s o z z king π/2
⁄
nly z li s insi |z | z |z|
z z |z|
s( ) lim z
z z+ z
z
lim
z+ 2 3. [Ans. C]
quir int gr tion 2πi πi
2
IN X X
-3
1. [Ans. A] -2 -1 3
| + i | 2 Cx y y
(Cx ( Cx
Radius of the circle is 2 and centre is at
y(n) n n
+ i )y(n))
y(n)
3s 4 1 2
C3 =
F(s) C3 .
CC3
(sC 1)(s 2) s 1 s 2
2
y(n) 3 3
y(n) dz y(n)
+ i By Formula,
y y z a 2j
xy ( (
Since, both the poles are enclosed by
n n
contour,
) )
therefore
Value of integral=2πj + 2 2πj πj
For distance to be min. The point P will be
on the line passes through origin and 4. [Ans. B]
centre of the circle. Expand by Laurent series
Slope of line OP = Slope of line OC
𝑥
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 142
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
j
| lim { }
x + x +
j
ption s tis y th ov on itions
7. [Ans. A]
u hy’s int gr l ormul is
∫
Here a = 0, then f(0) = sin 0 = 0
8. [Ans. D]
z x + iy
p | |= | |
= | |= | |=
9. [Ans. B]
Given x3 = j = e+jπ/2
⁄
x
π π √
x os + j sin +j
2 2
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 143
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Laplace Transform
ME – 2007
1. If F (s) is the Laplace transform of
function f (t), then Laplace transform of
t
f (t) dt is
0
CE – 2009
ME – 2009
1. Laplace transfrm of the function
1
2. The inverse Laplace transform of f(x) = cosh(ax) is
s s
2
(A) (C)
is (B) (D)
(A) (C) 1 –
(B) (D) ECE - 2005
1. In what range should Re(s) remain so
ME – 2010 that the Laplace transform of the function
3. The Laplace transform of a function is exists.
. The function is (A) (C)
(A) (C) (B) (D)
(B) (D)
ECE – 2006
2. A solution for the differential equation
ME – 2012
4. The inverse Laplace transform of the x’(t)+2x(t)= (t) with initial condition
x( )=0 is
function F(s) is given by
(A) (C)
(A) (C) (B) (D)
(B) (D)
ECE – 2008
ME – 2013 3. Consider the matrix P = * + . The
5. The function satisfies the differential
value of eP is
equation and the auxiliary
(A) * +
conditions, . The
Laplace transform of is given by (B) [ ]
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 144
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE – 2013
9. A system is described by the differential
equation =x(t). Let x(t)
be a rectangular pulse given by
,
5. Given
[ ] 10. The maximum value of the solution y(t) of
the differential equation y(t) + ̈
then the value of K is with initial condition ̇ and
(A) 1 (C) 3 ≥
(B) 2 (D) 4 (A) 1 (C)
(B) 2 (D) √
ECE– 2011
6. If [ ] then the initial ECE – 2014
11. The unilateral Laplace transform of
and final values of f(t) are respectively
(A) 0, 2 (C) 0, 2/7 . Which one of the following
(B) 2, 0 (D) 2/7, 0 is the unilateral Laplace transform of
?
ECE/EE/IN – 2012
7. The unilateral Laplace transform of f(t) is
. The unilateral Laplace transform
of t f(t) is
(A) – (C) EE – 2005
12. For the equation
(B) (D)
(t) + 3 (t) + 2x(t) = 5, the solution
x(t) approaches which of the following
8. Consider the differential equation values as t ?
(A) 0 (C) 5
(B) (D) 10
| |
EE – 2014
The numerical value of | is 13. Let be the Laplace
(A) (C) transform of signal x(t). Then, is
(B) (D) (A) 0 (C) 5
(B) 3 (D) 21
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 145
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
[ ]
3. [Ans. A]
[ ] 6. [Ans. D]
[ ]
4. [Ans. D] [ ]
{ }
2. [Ans. A]
{ } ̇ (t) + 2x (t) = (t)
Taking Laplace transform of both sides ,
we get
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 146
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
eP
2 1 1 1
s 1 s 2
s 1 s 2
=
2 2 2
1
s 1 s 2 s 2 s 1
=[ ] ⁄
=2
4. [Ans. C]
Since f(t) is an even function, its
trigonometric Fourier series contains
only cosine terms
∫ ∫ 7. [Ans. D]
*∫ ∫ +
t
[ ( )]
8. [Ans. D]
[ ]
Therefore, the trigonometric Fourier
series for the waveform f(t) contains only Taking Laplace transform on both the
sides. We have,
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 147
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
11. [Ans. D]
[ ]
[ ] ( )
[ ]
| [ ]
12. [Ans. B]
=5
9. [Ans. B] By taking Laplace transform
Writing in terms of Laplace transform (
⁄
X(s) =
( )
13. [Ans. B]
( ) [ ]
( ) ( )
( )
10. [Ans. D]
14. [Ans. 0.5]
∫ ∫ |
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 148
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
1Ω
1Ω
ECE - 2007
1Ω 1Ω
2. For the circuit shown in the figure, the
Thevenin voltage and resistance looking 10V
into X –Y are 1
1Ω
2
1Ω 1Ω
i
2i 1Ω 2 2Ω
(A) 0 W (C) 10 W
(B) 5 W (D) 100 W
4Ω 4Ω
V
V 100V R 5V 2V 1
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 149
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
~ 14 0 V
6Ω
R
5V V 2 V
6Ω 6Ω (A) 5 V (C) 3 V
(B) 2 V (D) 6 V
ECE/EE/IN - 2013
(A) 1.4 0 A (C) 2.8 0 A 12. Consider a delta connection of resistors
(B) 2.0 0 A (D) 3.2 0 A and its equivalent star connection as
shown. If all elements of the delta
8. In the circuit shown below, the Norton connection are scaled by a factor k, k>0,
equivalent current in amperes with the elements of the corresponding star
respect to the terminals P and Q is equivalent will be scaled by a factor of
j30Ω P
Ra
16 0 25Ω j50Ω Rb Rc
15Ω Q
RC RB
(A) 6.4 – j4.8 (C) 10 + j0
RA
(B) 6.56 – j7.87 (D) 16 + j0
15. Consider the configuration shown in the 19. In the circuit shown in the figure, the
figure which is a portion of a larger value of node voltage V is
electrical network 10 0
i
i V V
4Ω
4 0 j3Ω 6Ω j6Ω
R R
i
R
i
i i
(A) 22 + j 2 V (C) 22 – j 2 V
For R 1Ω and currents i =2 i 1 (B) 2 + j 22 V (D) 2 – j 22 V
i 4 which one of the following is
TRUE? 20. The circuit shown in the figure, the
(A) i 5 angular frequency (in rad/s) at which
(B) i 4 the Norton equivalent impedance as seen
(C) Data is sufficient to conclude that the from terminals b-b′ is purely resistive
supposed currents are impossible is_____________.
(D) Data is insufficient to identify the 1Ω 1F
b
currents i i and i
10 cos t
16. A Y-network has resistances of 10Ω each (volts) ~ 0.5
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 151
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
22. The magnitude of current (in mA) (A) Very low (C) 3L
through the resistor R in the figure (B) L/3 (D) Very high
shown is__________
R EE - 2007
2. A 3V dc supply with an internal resistance
1kΩ
of 2Ω supplies a passive non-linear
R
10 m
R
2m resistance characterized by the relation
2kΩ 4kΩ
VNL = . The power dissipated in the
non-linear resistance is
R 3kΩ
(A) 1.0 W (C) 2.5 W
(B) 1.5 W (D) 3.0 W
23. The equivalent resistance in the infinite
EE - 2008
ladder network shown in the figure, is R .
2R R R R 3. In the circuit shown in the figure, the
value of the current i will be given by
R 1Ω 3Ω
R R R R a b
1Ω + V 1Ω
EE - 2006 b
1. The three limbed non ideal core shown in
(A) – 3 V (C) 3 V
the figure has three winding with nominal
(B) 0 V (D) 5 V
inductances L each when measured
individually with a signal phase AC
EE - 2009
source. The inductance of the winding as
Statements for Linked Answer Questions 5
connected will be
& 6:
R 3VAB
2kΩ
+ A
+
5V 2kΩ 1kΩ
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 152
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE - 2011
V 4V Is = 5A 2Ω
12. In the circuit given below, the value of R
required for the transfer of maximum
power to the load having a resistance of
(A) (5A; Put Vs=20V) 3Ω is
(B) (2A; Put Vs =8V) R
(C) (5A; Put Is = 10A)
(D) (7A; Put Is= 12A)
6Ω
9. The current through the 2 kΩ resistance 10 V 3Ω oad
in the circuit shown is
C
1kΩ 1kΩ (A) Zero (C) 3Ω
2kΩ (B) 6Ω (D) Inifnity
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 153
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Circuit Circuit
300V R
(A) 0.8 Ω (C) 2 Ω
(B) 1.4 Ω (D) 2.8 Ω
1:1.25
The voltmeter, across the load, reads 200
Y V. The value of is__________
2.5Ω
100V 80V 5Ω
5Ω 5Ω
15V 2
5V
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 154
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
21. The power delivered by the current 3. Which one of the following equations is
source, in the figure, is_____________ valid for the circuit shown below?
1V I1 1Ω 1Ω I3
I2 1Ω 1Ω I6
1Ω 1Ω
1V 2 1Ω +
5V 1Ω
I5 1Ω
1Ω I4
22. An incandescent lamp is marked 40 W, I7
240V. If resistance at room temperature
(A) 0
(26°C) is 120 Ω, and temperature
(B) 0
coefficient of resistance is 4.5 10 /°C,
(C) 0
then its ‘ON’ state filament temperature in
(D) 0
°C is approximately___________
4. The current I supplied by the dc voltage
IN - 2006
source in the circuit shown below is
1. The root – mean – square value of a I
voltage waveform consisting of a
superimposition of 2V dc and a 4V peak –
to – peak square wave is 1V
1Ω 1A
(A) 2 V (C) √8 V
(B) √6 V (D) √12 V
10Ω
(A) 0W (C) 2.5W
(B) 1.0W (D) 3.0W
10 m
i(t)
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 155
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
IN - 2009 IN - 2014
6. The source network S is connected to the 9. The circuit shown in the figure contains a
load network L as shown by dashed lines. dependent current source between A and
2Ω RL terminals. The Thevenin’s equivalent
resistance in kΩ between the terminals C
and D is ___________.
+ +
10 V
5kΩ 5kΩ C
3V
10 V
Source Network S Load Network L 10 V
The power transferred from S to L would V
be maximum when RL is
(A) 0Ω (C) 0.8 Ω
(B) 0.6 Ω (D) 2Ω
IN - 2010
7. A 100 Ω , 1W resistor and a 800 Ω , 2W
resistor are connected in series. The
maximum dc voltage that can be applied
continuously to the series circuit without
exceeding the power limit of any of the
resistors is
(A) 90V (C) 45 V
(B) 50 V (D) 40V
IN - 2011
8. The current I shown in the circuit given
below is equal to
10Ω
10 V 10Ω 10 10Ω
(A) 3 A (C) 6 A
(B) 3.67 A (D) 9 A
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 156
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE 4. [Ans. A]
1. [Ans. A] I 20 V
12 A
(s) = (S) R
(12 – I)A
(s) (R R ( (s)) +
60V
m( (s)) R 0 12 A
For V
5. [Ans. A]
Apply nodal analysis, 3
V V 2i
2 V 0 V i 1Ω
2 1
V V 1Ω 1Ω
2 2V 2i 0 2
2 2 ( 3)
V V 4V 3
10V
Similarly, 2 ( 2) 1
V
V 4V R 2Ω 1Ω 2
( 2) 1Ω
3. [Ans. C]
Fig .1
For maximum power transfer, R R
V 4Ω The current through all the branches are
marked as shown in Fig. 1.
4Ω 4Ω Apply KVL to outer loop
2( 3) 2( 2) 10
V 4 10 10
100V
0
Power supplied by 10 V 10 0 0
V 100V
100 (100 V ) 6. [Ans. C]
8 4
10 10
Also V 50V
10
12.5 12.5 25 R 15
V
R ⁄ 4Ω R 4Ω
Fig. 2
For Maximum power transfer to RL
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 157
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
R R 8. [Ans. A]
R Thevenin’s resistance seen across The Norton equivalent current is
the terminals of R into the rest of the 25
16 0
network. The relevant circuit is shown in (40 30)
Fig.2, where the independent current 3
8 tan ( ) 8 36.86
source is open circuited and the voltage 4
sources are short circuited. (6.4 j4.8)
R 10 (10 10)
R R 15Ω 9. [Ans. B]
The load consists of a resistance and a
7. [Ans. B] capacitance of this, only R is passive and
To find the current I in the given circuit in consumes power
Fig. (1), the delta network with 6Ω each is So P = R
converted to a star as shown in Fig. (2) =( ) 4 50
√
14 0 V ~ 6Ω 10. [Ans. A]
6Ω i
Fig. 2
Then the given circuit reduces to Fig. (3),
V 10kΩ V 100Ω V
(4) and (5) 99i
Where (2 j4)||(2 j4) 5Ω and
14 0
2 0
7
After connecting a voltage source of V
j4Ω j4Ω V V
(10k)( i ) 100( 99i i )
14 0 10000i 100( 100 i )
2Ω 2Ω
2Ω
100 10000i
20000i 100
Fig. 3 100
i ( ) [ ]
20000 200
V 100 99i i
5Ω 100 [ 100 ( )]
14 0 7Ω 200
14 0
50
2Ω V 50
R 50Ω
Fig. 4
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 158
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 159
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
17. [Ans. D]
Norton’s theorem: Here for a complex
network, after isolating the element, we 10 0 V
V1 V2
short circuit the two ends and find the
current . is the current of the 4Ω
independent current source with the 4 0 3jΩ 6Ω 6jΩ
equivalent resistance in parallel
R
Applying KCL to the super node we have
V V V
4 0 0 .
3j 6 6j
18. [Ans. *] Range 0.49 to 0.51 From super node we get
Apply superposition theorem V V 10 0 .
For voltage Solving and for V we get
5Ω 5Ω V 2 22j V
Voltage 0.5
5 source
0.25 mp
20 shorted
For current
5Ω 5Ω In doiman
1
(1||0.5j )
j
1 10Ω 0.5j j
1 0.5j
0.5j (1 0.5j ) j
1 5 1 0.25
0.25 mp 0.5j (1 0.5j ) j(1 0.25 )
20
(1 0.25 )
(0.25 0.25) Equating the imaginary part to zero, we
0.50 mp get
0.5 1 0.25 0
19. [Ans. D] 0.25 1
Using super node concept, we can treat 2rad/sec
nodes 1 and 2 to gather as a super node
as shown in the figure by the dotted lines
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 160
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
24. [Ans. C ]
5Ω 3Ω
i i R
7.5Ω
EE
22. [Ans. *] Range 2.79 to 2.81
1. [Ans. A]
By source transformation theorem
The inductance of all three coils are ‘ ’
2k 1k 4k
and they are connected to same line
carrying the same current and set up the
flux in the same direction
20V 8V
2 2
3k
by KV 20 10k 8 0
28
2.8 m
10k
23. [Ans. *] Range 2.60 to 2.64 All these fluxes linked with each other
We know that in a infinite ladder network and they will balance each other. So net
if all resistance are comprises of same flux will reduce drastically. Thus net L
value R then the equivalent resistance is will be very low
( √ )
. Then the above given network
2. [Ans. A]
can be redrawn as R series with R
equivalent as follows 2Ω
R 3V
+
V
I
R (1 √5)R
R
2
3 2 1
Power delivered by source = 3×1=3W.
R R 1.618R 2.618R
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 161
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
3. [Ans. B] 1kΩ
5 1
V 2.5V
2
Also, 4 V 4i 4(V V) 4i . (1) To calculate thevenin’s voltage terminals
A-B are kept open.
Also, V 4V V V
Applying source transformation into
V
V 1.25 V correct source
2 C C
4(2.5 1.25) 4i (From (1))
i 1.25
2kΩ 2kΩ 1kΩ
4. [Ans. A]
V 2i 5 2 5 3V
Applying source transformation current
source is transformed into voltage source.
5. [Ans. B]
1kΩ C 3V
Thevenin’s resistance is calculated using
the circuit shown in fig. (1) and (2),
where independent voltage source is 5 V
V 1kΩ
short circuited 2
3V I
2kΩ
A
Applying KVL, {I is assumed to be in mA}
2kΩ 1kΩ V
5
1k 3V 1k 0
2
B
5
Fig. 1 2k 3V 0 (1)
2
Fig. 1 V
(2)
3 V 1k
I
Put the value of in quation (1)
A
10 )
V 10 5
2V 3V 0
1kΩ 1kΩ 2
V
V 0.5V
V
B
Fig. 2 7. [Ans. D]
(
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 162
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
8. [Ans. B] R R
The relevant circuit is shown in fig. 6R
3
As the voltage across 2Ω 4V 6 R
4 R 6Ω
2
2
In order to double the current through 2Ω 13. [Ans. A]
resistance, V is to be doubled (Put 2Ω R
V 8V) ]
Note that the 5 A source has no effect on j1Ω
the answer. However it gives 3A current ~ 10V
~ 3V
Fig. 2Ω
9. [Ans. A]
10V
~ 2Ω 5V
11. [Ans. B]
V i 100 and V i .1(by ohm’s law)
2i 100 i 50 pply KV in loop
5 2.5R 3 0
12. [Ans. B] 2
[R 0.8Ω]
To calculated voltage source is short 2.5
circuited
R 14. [Ans. B]
W
1:1.25
6 100 V 125 V Y
R V
X Z
V 100 V
turns ratio V
6R 125
R 6||R
6 R V 0.8 V 100V
According to maximum power transfer when V 100V
theorem
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 163
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
200 (10)√ R
V
100V Power dissipated (2) (1) R 10
0.8
4 10R 1000
2′ 996
R
Thevenin’s circuit seen by 2 2′ will be 10
400 R
as follow
400 99.6
V 100V
17.33Ω
nd R 0.2||0.8 negligible
V 100V
19. [Ans. C]
V V turns ratio
100V 1 C
1.25
80V 120
120
15. [Ans. 330]
Power absorbed by battery 100V = 100 120
10 1000
Power supplied by battery
80V 80 8 640 V lags voltage A by 90
Current through 15V battery V √3 10 90
10 8 Angle 90 with respect to A
2 Hence
Power supplied by battery V √3 10 ( 90 15)
15V 15 2 30 10√3 75
Total power absorbed
1000 640 30 20. [Ans. 2]
330 att 2.5V
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 164
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
2.5 1 2. [Ans. D]
0.5
(2.5 2.5) 2 The given circuit in Fig. 1 is simplified as
Total i 0.5 0.5 1 (NOTE: Option shown in Fig. 2 and Fig.3
not matching with IIT website) 3 2
I
6
21. [Ans. 3] V1=3 1 V1 1 V1 1
1V V
1Ω I4
22. [Ans. *] Range 2470 to 2471 P I7 S
40 At node, P
R . (1)
(240)
R At nodeQ ,
40
. . (2)
R R (1 T)
At nodeR ,
R is resistance of room temperature
. (3)
(240)
120(1 4.5 10 T) At nodeS ,
40
11 4.5 10 T . (4)
11 1000 From (3) and (4)
T T 0
4.5
11 1000
T 26 2470.44 4. [Ans. A]
4.5
I P
IN
I1
1. [Ans. C]
+ 1V
For d.c voltage of 2 V, M.S.V = 4 1Ω 1A
For square wave voltage with peak – to –
peak value of 4 V or amplitude = 2V,
M.S.V = 4 + 4 = 8
R. . S. V √8 V The circuit is shown in Fig.
Voltage across 1 =1V
1 = 1A
Apply KCL at node, P
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 165
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
I+1= I1, 2Ω RL
or I+1=1 ,
I
0
+ +
10 V 3V +
5. [Ans. B]
The circuit is shown in Fig. 1
7. [Ans. C]
Fig. 2 Resistor 1 : 100 Ω 1
10 j 10 Resistor 2 : 800 Ω, 2 W
⃗⃗⃗⃗ Maximum current that resistor can
V 10√2
withstand
10√2(10 j 10)
200 e 1 1
√
For maximum power transfer to load, 100 10
10 j 10 R 10Ω Similarly,
⃗⃗⃗⃗
V
⃗⃗⃗ 10 e 2 1
20 √
i (t) 10 sin( 45 ) 800 20
10 If these two resistors are connected in
10 (rms)
√2 series.
Power transferred to load,
100Ω 800Ω
100
P (rms) R 10 500
2 I
6. [Ans. C]
V
The circuit is shown in Fig.
Then maximum value of
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 166
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
8. [Ans. A]
The given circuit is Fig. 1 10 V V
10 V
Convert the (10 V, 10 Ω) voltage source
across A, B to the left into a current
source, (1 A, 10 Ω). The resultant circuit is
shown in Fig. 2
10Ω For R calculation Independent
voltage source should be short circuited
So
10 V 10Ω 10 10Ω 5k
C
Fig. 1 5K 10 V
1V( ssume)
so V 1
Fig. 2 So *R +
The circuit is further simplified as shown Apply KCL at Node A
in Fig. 3 and 4 10 V
1 V V
10
5k 5K
1 5Ω 10 10Ω 1 V .5 V
2V 1.5 V 0.75V
Fig. 3
1 V 1 0.75
So
5k 5k
0.25
9 5Ω 10Ω 5k
5 10
0.05m
Fig. 4 1
5 [R 20kΩ]
0.05m
9 3
15
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 167
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE - 2006 Q P Q2 P2
+
1. In the figure shown, assume that all the S S2
capacitors are initially uncharged. 0
If Vi(t) =10u(t) Volts, then V0(t) is given (t)
by F
1K
+ +
Vi(t)
4 F
4K 1µF Vo(t) Assume that the capacitor has zero initial
charge. Given that u(t) is a unit step
function, the voltage (t) across the
capacitor is given by
(A) 8e Volts
(A) ∑ ( ) tu(t nT)
(B) 8( e ) Volts
(B) u(t) + 2 ∑ ( ) u(t nT)
(C) 8 u(t) Volts
(C) tu(t) + 2 ∑ ( ) (t nT)
(D) 8 Volts
u(t nT)
ECE - 2007 (D) ∑ 0 e ( )
+0 e ( )
]
2. In the circuit shown, Vc is 0 volts at t = 0 Common Data for Questions 4 and 5:
sec. For t>0, the capacitor current iC (t), The following series RLC circuit with zero
where t is in seconds, is given by initial condition is excited by a unit
20k i impulse function δ(t)
1H Ω
+
20k VC +
± 4 F
10V - δ(t) 1F
VC(t)
(A) 0.50 exp ( 25t)mA 4. For t > 0, the output voltage (t) is
√
(B) 0.25 exp ( 25t)mA (A) (e e )
√
(C) 0.50 exp ( 12.5 t)mA
(D) 0.25 exp ( 6.25 t)mA (B) te
√
√
(C) e cos ( t)
ECE - 2008 √
⁄ √
3. The circuit shown in the figure is used to (D) e sin ( t)
√
charge the capacitor C alternately from
two current sources as indicated. The 5. For t > 0, the voltage across the resistor
switches S1 and S2 are mechanically is
coupled and connected as follows √
(A) (e e )
For 2nT ≤ t< (2n+ )T, √
(n = 0, , 2…) S to P and S2 to P2 √ √
(B) e *cos ( ) sin ( )+
√
For (2n+ )T ≤ t< (2n+2)T, √
(n = 0, , 2…) S to Q and S2 to Q2 (C) e sin ( )
√
√
(D) e cos ( )
√
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 168
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
( ) ECE - 2011
(A) 0 (C) 10. In the circuit shown below, the initial
(B) (D) charge on the capacitor is 2.5 mC, with
the voltage polarity as indicated. The
ECE - 2009
switch is closed at time t = 0. The current
7. The time domain behavior of an RL circuit
i(t) at a time t after the switch is closed is
is represented by
⁄ i(t)
L + Ri = ( + e sint) u(t)
For an initial current of i(0) = , the
0
steady state value of the current is given
00
by
0 F
(A) i(t) → +
(B) i(t) →
(C) i(t) → (1+B) (A) i(t) = exp( 2 0 t)
(B) i(t) = exp( 2 0 t)
(D) i(t) → (1+B)
(C) i(t) = 0 exp( 2 0 t)
8. The switch in the circuit shown was on (D) i(t) = exp( 2 0 t)
position ‘a’ for a long time and is moved
to position ‘b’ at time t = 0. The current ECE/EE/IN - 2012
i(t) for t > 0 is given by 11. In the following figure, C1 and C2 are ideal
capacitors. has been charged to 12 V
0 kΩ a b
before the ideal switch S is closed at t = 0.
i(t)
The current i(t) for all t is.
0.2 F S t=0
100 V + kΩ
0.5 F 0.3 F
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 169
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE - 2013 R
Common Data for Questions 12 and 13:
Consider the following figure k R
+
2k F
5 Is
1
10V 2
Vs
⁄
2
( ) (t) = ( e ), = msec
2A
⁄
2
12. The current Is in Amps in the voltage ( ) (t) = ( e ), = msec
2
source, and voltage Vs is Volts across the
( ) (t) = ( ⁄
current source respectively , are e ), = msec
(A) , 20 (C) , 20 ⁄
( ) (t) = ( e ), = msec
(B) , 0 (D) , 20 2
13. The current in the 1 resistor in Amps is 17. A series RC circuit is connected to a DC
(A) 2 (C) 10 voltage source at time t = 0. The relation
(B) 3.33 (D) 12 between the source voltage , the
resistance R, the capacitance C, and the
ECE - 2014 current i(t) is given below:
14. In the figure shown, the ideal switch has
= R i(t) + ∫ i(u)du
been open for a long time. If it is closed at
t = 0, then the magnitude of the current Which one of the following represents the
(in m ) through the 4 k resistor at current i(t)?
t = 0 is _______. ( )
k 4k k
()
0 +
0 F mH
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 170
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
( )
R R
i(t) L1
+
V
I R
EE - 2006 R2 0Ω
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 171
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(A) ⁄ s (C) 4 s
(B) ⁄4 s (D) 9s
(A) = 1.4 Vx – 3.75I1 + V
EE - 2009
(B) = +1.4 Vx – 3.75I1 V
8. In the figure shown, all elements used are
(C) = 1.4 Vx + 3.75I1 + V ideal. For time t<0, S remained closed
(D) = 1.4 Vx + 3.75I1 V and S open. At t = 0, S is opened and S
is closed. If the voltage Vc2 across the
capacitor at t = 0 is zero, the
EE - 2008
voltage across the capacitor
Statement for Linked Answer Questions 5
combination at t=0+ will be
and 6
S1 S2
The current i(t) sketched in the figure
flows through an initially uncharged
0.3 nF capacitor. 3V C1 1F C2 2F
6
i(t) mA5
4 (A) 1V (C) 1.5 V
3 (B) 2 V (D) 3 V
2
1
EE - 2010
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
t ( s) Linked Answer Questions 9 and 10
9
The L-C circuit shown in the figure has an
5. The charge stored in the capacitor at
inductance L = 1mH and a capacitance
t = 5 µs, will be
C = 10µF.
(A) 8nC (C) 13nC
L
(B) 10nC (D) 16nC
i
6. The capacitor charged upto 5 ms, as per C 100 V
t=0
the current profile given in the figure, is 100+V
connected across an inductor of 0.6 mH.
Then the value of voltage across the
9. The initial current through the inductor is
capacitor after 1s will approximately be
zero, while the initial capacitor voltage is
(A) 18.8 V (C) 23.5 V
100 V. The switch is closed at t = 0. The
(B) 23.5 V (D) 30.6 V
current i through the circuit is:
(A) 5 cos( 0 t) A
7. The time constant for the given circuit
(B) 5 sin( 0 t) A
will be
(C) 10cos( 0 t) A
(D) 10 sin( 0 t) A
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 172
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
I
L
~ oad
t=0 C 100V
R = 0 (A) (t) = ( e ⁄
)
~ = √2 4
(B) (t) = ( e ⁄
)+
= √2 4
⁄
(C) (t) = ( + )( e )
12. The power dissipated in the resistor R is (D) (t) = ( )( e ⁄
)+
(A) 0.5 W (C) √2
(B) 1 W (D) 2
17. The voltage across the capacitor, as
shown in the figure, is expressed as
13. The current in the figure above is (t) = )
sin( t
(A) 2 (C) +
√ + sin ( t )
(B) (D) +j2A The values of and respectively, are
√
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 173
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
F + 0
2
1 3. At time t=0 , current I is
t
0 (A) ( ⁄ ) (C) ⁄
1µF (B) 0A (D)
+ + 4. At time t =0 , is is
Vi(t) M Vo(t) (A) 5A / s (C) 0A / s
(B) ( 0⁄ ) S (D) 5A / s
IN - 2007
2. In the circuit shown in the figure, the +
k
20 F
input signal is ( ) = + cos
+ +
(A) 0V (C) 2V
(t) R (t) (B) 1V (D) 3V
IN - 2011
Fig.
6. In the circuit shown below, the switch,
initially at position 1 for a long time, is
The steady – state output is expressed as
changed to position 2 at t = 0.
(t) = P + Q cos( t ). If R = 2,
the values of P and Q are
(A) P = 0 and Q = 6/√
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 174
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Sense harge
Sense
IN - 2014 control
ischarge
8. The circuit shown in figure was at steady
If T = kT then
state for t < 0 with the switch at position
(A) R = kR ( ) (C) R = kR
‘ ’ The switch is thrown to position ‘ ’ at
time = 0, . The voltage V (volts) across (B) R = kR ln ( ) (D) R = R lnk
the 0 resistor at time
t = 0 is _________________
2 12. capacitor ‘ ’ is to be connected across
the terminals ‘ ’ and ‘ ’ as shown in the
figure so that the power factor of the
+
parallel combination becomes unity. The
0 t=0
H
value of the capacitance required in F
is___________.
6
4
9. The average real power in watts delivered
to a load impedance = (4 j2) by an 60
0 Hz
ideal current source ~ 0 Hz
i (t) = 4 sin ( t + 20 ) is ______________ 0 Hz
j
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 175
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE Vc(t)
1. [Ans. D]
The transform circuit is shown below 1
(s)
2
t
+ + T T
-1
(s) (s) (s)
In mathematical form,
(t) = tu(t) 2(t T)u(t 2T) +
( ) ( ) 2(t 2T)u(t 2T)……………
For the given circuit = ( )
( ) ( )
= 4 F 20 k 20 = 40 ms
Using direct formula 6. [Ans. B]
(t) = ( ) ( ) (0)]e In the circuit shown,
R
(t) = 0 (0 0 )e =0 = R = (R + R )
(R + R )
(t) = 0 e m
T = ⁄R = ⁄(R + R )
3. [Ans. C] R
di ⁄(R + R ) R
The waveform of voltage Vc(t) is shown | = = =
below. dt T ⁄(R + R )
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 176
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
7. [Ans. A] 0Ω
Take L.T of given differential equation
with i(0)= and use the L.T pairs: S i (0 )
1.5 A 0Ω i(0 )
sin(t) u(t) →
s + 0Ω 4
e sin(t) u(t) → ,
(s + ) + (0 ) =
()
L + Ri = ( + e sin t) u(t) t t = , the status of the circuit is shown
Take Laplace on both side in Fig. 3
0.5 A 0Ω
[s (s) ] + R (s) = +
R s
(s + ) + 0.5 A 0.5 A i ( ) 0
S
r ( s + R) (s) = + + + 1.5 A 0Ω
L
( ) i( )
0Ω
(s) = [ + + ]
( ) ( )
i( ) = 0
According to final value theorem,
The given circuit is a first order circuit
Steady state value of
with time constant, =
i(t) = i(t) = t s (s)] = R= 0+( 0 0) = 0 + =
→ → R
= mH = 0 H
8. [Ans. B] = = = 0 sec, = 0 sec
hen S is in position ‘a’, (0 ) = 00
General formula:
fter S is moved to b, (for t 0)
= 00 =0 R= i(t) = + (F )( e ),t 0
0 02
= =0 6 F i(t) = +( )( e )
2
(t) = 00 e ⁄ = 00e =0 0 2 e ,t 0
(t)
i(t) = = 20e u(t)m
10. [Ans. A]
Q(0 ) = 2 m
9. [Ans. A] (0 ) =
( )
= = 0
S is open for < ≤0
For t 0, = 0 = 00
At t = 0 the status of the circuit is shown
= R = 0 m sec
in Fig. 1
0.75 A (t) = ( 00 0e )u(t)
0.75 A
d
i (t) =
0.75 A S 0Ω
i (0 )
dt
= 0 0 0 2000 e u(t)
1.5 A 0Ω
15mH = e u(t)
0Ω
i(0 )
11. [Ans. D]
i (0 ) = 0 , i(0 ) = 0
When the switch in closed at t = 0
S is closed for 0 ≤ t <
Capacitor C1 will discharge and C2 will get
At t = 0 , i (0 ) = i (0 ) = 0
charge since both C1 and C2 are ideal and
The status of the circuit is shown in Fig. 2
there is no-resistance in the circuit
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 177
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
charging and discharging time constant 15. [Ans. *] Range 0.45 to 0.47
will be zero. A series LCR circuit operating frequency
Thus current will exist like an impulse is such that current leads the supply
function. voltage so
The current at resonance = = amp
12. [Ans. D]
R= = H = F
2 v The magnitude of current is the value at
resonance
0 Ω
+ 10V
=
+ 2Ω Ω 2
v 2A 0 0
_ = 0 = =
20 2 = √R + (x x ) √ +( )
i i
k i(t)
0 +
urrent after long time = = m F
0k 2k
At t = 0 the voltage across the capacitor
is 10
Where, = = 0 = = 2000i(t)
Now at t= 0 dv di
i =c = 0 002
dt dt
+ 4k di
i = [0 002 + i(t)] amp
dt
di
= 2 + 000i(t)
dt
+ =
The current is m = 2 m di
4
2 + 000i(t) + 2000i(t) =
dt s
di
2 + 000i(t) + 2000i(t) =
dt s
000
2 [s (s) + (s)] =
2 s
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 178
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
17. [Ans. A]
= Ri(t) + ∫ i(u)du Current through R = 5/1 =5A
Current delivered by 5V source = 5 1
=R + aplace transform ]
S = 4A
= =
2. [Ans. B]
is a D.C voltage source,
The relevant circuit is shown in fig.
so = where depends on
+ +
S k
= = L (t)
s(RS + ) R (s + ) C
k
i(t) = e
R Fig.
() =
It is a standard LC circuit.
With v (t) = cos( t)
or sin( t + 0 )
3. [Ans. D]
Equivalent circuit at t = 0 is,
18. [Ans. *] Range 31.24 to 31.26
i V I
2H 0Ω +
+ + 0Ω L 10A 10V
2i
0u(t) (t)
By nodal analysis,
( )
0+ =0 2 0 = 00
( )
Since we have to evaluate (t) in steady = = = 4
state the inductor will behave as a short
circuit and hence = i
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 179
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
4. [Ans. A] 8. [Ans. A]
V-3( + ) 0 = 0 …… (1) The status of the circuit at t = 0 is
shown in fig. 1.
0 = 0.2
A
0 +02 = 0……… (2)
Eliminating I2 for eq(1) and (2) we get +
3V 3V
= 4 + 1F 2F
5. [Ans. C] Fig. 1 B
i(t) The status of the circuit at t = 0 is
mA shown in Fig. 2.
4 S A S
2 +
3V + V
A1 A2
3V
2 s s s
B Fig. 2
Charged stored in the capacitor = area
under i – t curve = = =
Q= +
= (2 0 ) (4 0 ) + (4 + 2) 9. [Ans. D]
2 2
Initial current through the inductor is
0 ( 2)
zero and capacitor voltage is charged
0
upto to voltage
6
= [4 + ] 0 = n (0 ) = 00
2
As current through inductor and voltage
6. [Ans. D] across cannot change abrupty.
apacitor charged upto s, so total So, after closing the switch
charge stored in capacitor = Q = 13nC i (0 ) = i (0 ) = 0
Voltage across the capacitor before And (0 ) = (0 ) = 00
connecting to indictor The circuit is s – domain
Q 0
= = =4 sL
0 0 (0 ) 00
=
Voltage across the capacitor at time t I(s s s
(t)at t = s ) 1/s
(t) = cos t] C
t= 0
√ (s) =
= 2.357 rad = (s + )
(t) =4 cos
00
06 = ( )
s +
7. [Ans. C]
⁄√
= F;R = 6Ω T=R = 4sec = 00√ ( )
s + ( ⁄√ )
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 180
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
11. [Ans. B]
(0 ) = 4 (0 ) = 4 16. [Ans. D]
( ) At t = 0
i (0 ) = = A Voltage across capacitor =
tt 0
12. [Ans. B] +i R+i R+ =0
Power supplied by the source = cos d
+ 2c R+ =0
Where = angle between dt
= 4 inductor and capacitor do not Taking Laplace
consume power.
+ (2Rc) s (0)] + =0
Therefore, power dissipated in R = Power s
supplied by the source + 2Rcs 2R + =0
P = cos s
= √2 cos ( + 2Rcs) = 2R
4 s
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 181
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
2R 1µF
(s) =
+ 2Rcs S( + 2Rcs)
+ +
2R 2Rc
(s) = + Vi(t) M
+ 2Rcs + 2Rcs s Vo(t)
(t) (e) = e + e
+ Input is 2V for t 1s.
* (t) = ( + )( e )+ + Time constant ( ) = = 0 0
=
17. [Ans. A] So (0 ) = 2
Applying superposition theorem Laplace Equivalent circuit after the change
Resolving 0 sin t source 1/sc 2/s
+
(t) = sin ( 0t + tan ( ) 0)
√ ( )
F s 2 s s
(s) = =
R+
(s) =
Rsc +
= = c
+ + j (s) = = ce
+s
( ) Now voltage across Resister at t = 2s
= 0 sin( t) (t) = (t) R
+
( ) = ce R
= 0 sin( t) = Rc e
+ j
( ) = e ]
0
= sin t tan ( )]
√ +2 2. [Ans. A]
20
(t) = sin( 0t The circuit is shown in Fig.
√ 00 +
( 0 tan ( ))
0 + +
0
+ sin( t (t)
√ +2 R (t)
tan )
IN Fig.
1. [Ans. A] (t) = + cos( t)
Vi(t) Due to 5V d.c alone , C is open and no
current flows through R,
= 0 and =0
2
ue to cos ( t) alone, with
1
0 t
THE GATE ACADEMY tPVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
th th th
( ) = (0 ) = A
3. [Ans. A]
For t < 0, the circuit is shown in Fig. 1
4. [Ans. B]
1
I=0 I2 From Fig. 3: Write the Outer loop
I1 equation:
1H d (t)
2 (t) ]+ + 0=
dt
At t = 0
1F 10 V d
(0 ) = (0 ) = +
dt
Fig. 1(for t <0)
= /sec
After a long time, at t = 0 L behaves as
short circuit and C behaves as open
5. [Ans. B]
circuit. The relevant circuit is shown in
The given circuit is shown in Fig. 1
Fig.2.
1
t steady state i e , as t → , capacitor
I=0 I2(0 )
behaves as open circuit. The circuit at
I1(0 ) IL(0 ) steady state is shown in Fig.2
2 L 2k 0 F
V1 V2
R1
(0 ) C 10 V
1k R2
9V 20 F
Fig. 2(at t = 0 )
At t = 0 , I1(0 )=0, iL(0 )= I2(0 )=0 and
v (0 ) = 0 Fig. 1
For t > 0, the switch, K is closed and the 2k C1
V1 V2
relevant circuit is shown in Fig. 3
R1
K 1 I2
I
1k
I1 9V C2
1H
2
5V Fig. 2
1 10 V
Apply voltage division across R1 = 2k
F and R2 = 1k
Fig. 3(t >0)
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 183
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
= = ( )
j
V1 is divided between C1 = 0 F and 0
C2 = 20 F 0 0
Apply, again voltage division across C1
+ +
and C2 0
0
= = = j
+ 0
6. [Ans. D]
From the given circuit, =0
For t < 0, the status of the circuit is
=
shown in Fig. 1 inductor behaves as short
j = ( )
circuit after a long time.
=
i(0 ) = =
10
8. [Ans. ]
i
tt=0
10 V ± 1H
Fig. 1 + (inductor
0 in steady
for t 0, the status of the circuit is shown state)
in Fig. 2 6
Current through the inductor cannot
change instantaneously. 6
i(0 ) = i(0 ) = initial value (I.V) T = = = (0 )
2
After a long time inductor behaves as At t= 0
short circuit.
i( ) = 2 = final value (F. V) 2
Time constant = = , = 20 + +
0
10
i 6
10
4A 10 1H
= 0 = 0 ]
Fig. 2
9. [Ans. 32]
( )
i(t) = + (F )( e ) Load impedance = = (4 j2)
for t 0 Ideal current source
= + (2 )( e ) i(t) = 4 sin ( t + 20 )
=2 e Average real power = i
=( ) 4
√
6
Power = 4= 2
2
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 184
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
=
2 0
= F
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 185
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
1 1
1
(A) a low-pass filter 1
2 ∠ (7 4j)Ω
5 5
5∠3
j3 j3
(A) 8VAR (C) 28 VAR
(B) 16 VAR (D) 32 VAR
ECE - 2010
B
6. The current I in the circuit shown is
(A) 0 (C) 12.5∠3 2 m
(B) 5∠3 (D) 17∠3
~ 2 ∠
1 rad s
1 5
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 186
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE/EE/IN - 2013
9. In the circuit shown below, if the source 13. The circuit shown in the figure, the value
of capacitor C (in mF) needed to have
voltage Vs= 10053.130 V then the
critically damped response i(t) is ________.
Thevenin’s equivalent voltage in volts as
4 4
seen by the load resistance RL is
3 j4 j6 5
i(t)
RL= 10
j4 1
(A) 100900 (C) 800900 14. In the magnetically coupled circuit shown
(B) 80000 (D) 100600 in the figure, 56 % of the total flux
emanating from one coil links the other
10. Two magnetically uncoupled inductive coil. The value of the mutual inductance
coils have Q factors q1 and q2 at the (in H) is ______ .
chosen operating frequency. Their 1
respective resistances are R1 and R2.
When connected in series, their effective 6 cos (1⁄16)
is
(A) q q
(B) (1⁄q ) (1 q ) 15. The steady state output of the circuit
(C) (q q ) ⁄( ) shown in the figure is given by
(D) (q q ) ⁄( )
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 187
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
y(t)
sin t
~
1 1 The phasor diagram which is applicable
( ) ( )
√3 to this circuit is
2 2
( ) ( ) (A)
√3 I
EE - 2006
1. In the figure the current source is 1 ∠0 A,
R = 1Ω, the impedances are Zc = j Ω, (B)
I
and ZL = 2jΩ. The Thevenin equivalent
looking into the circuit across X-Y is
x
(C)
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 188
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
SW T1 R
B C
+
25V C (A)
Vp +
(A) 25 V, 0.0A Im
(B) Very large voltage, very large
current Re
(C) 5.0 V, 0.5 A
(D) 5.0 V, 0.5 A
(B)
XY C
∠ ~ Im
O
2V 2V
(A) 0 (C) 0 VYX
VYX Re
VYX VYX
0 2V 0 2V
Re
6. The R-L-C series circuit shown is supplied
from a variable frequency voltage source. EE - 2008
The admittance locus of the 7. The Thevenin's equivalent of a circuit
network at terminals AB for increasing operating at = 5rad/s, has
frequency is = 3.71∠ 15.90 V and
ZO =2.38 – j 0.667Ω. At this frequency,
the minimal realization of the Thevenin's
impedance will have a
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 189
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(A) (C) 1
(D) √2
(B)
1 1 √
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 190
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
2 R
( )
R C
2
~
( ) (A) √1 (C)
(D)
(B)
IN - 2007
t
2. In the circuit shown in the following
2 figure, the current through the 1Ω
resistor is
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 191
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(B) j
L=1H j
C = 0.25F
V = 1V
1Ω
I = (5cos2t)A
j
(C) j ( )
j ( )
(A) (1 + 5 cos 2t) A (C) (1 5 cos 2t) A j
(B) (5 + cos 2t) A (D) 6A
(D) j ( )
j ( )
3. Consider the AC bridge shown in the
j ( )
figure below, with R, L and C having
positive finite values
IN - 2008
Then
5. In the circuit below the average power
consumed by the 1 resistor is
sin t 1 √2 sin (1 t) 1Ω
1 √2 cos (3 t) 1 mH
(A) if
(B) if (A) 50 W (C) 5000 W
(B) 1050 W (D) 10100 W
(C) if
√
(D) cannot be made zero 6. For the circuit shown below the voltage
across the capacitor is
4. Consider the coupled circuit shown
below. 1 Ω
j1 Ω
~ (10+j0)V
j1 Ω
ig a
At angular frequency , this circuit can be
represented by the equivalent (A) (10 + j 0)V (C) (0 + j100)V
T – network shown below. (B) (100+j0)V (D) (0 – j100)V
7. For the circuit shown below the steady-
state current I is
I
cos(1000t)V
1Ω
ig b
Indicate the correct set of expressions for
V(t)= 5√2
1mH 1000 F
the impedances of the T – network
(A) j ( )
j ( )
j
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 192
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(A) 0A
(B) 5√2 cos (1000t)A
(C) 5√2 cos (1 t )
(D) 5√2A
IN - 2010
Statement for Linked Answer Questions: 8
&9
A coil having an inductance (L) of 10mH
and resistance R is connected in series
with an ideal 100 F capacitor (C). When
excited by a voltage source of value
10√2 cos (1000t)V, the series RLC circuit
draws 20W of power.
IN - 2011
Common Data for Question 10 & 11
Consider the circuit shown below:
2
2 sin(5t)
.1 cos(5t)
i(t)
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 193
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE 6. [Ans. A]
1. [Ans. C] j
( ) ( || 1⁄ )
( ) ( 1⁄ ( || 1⁄ )) 2 ∠
( )
1 ~ 1
j
1
( ) ( 3 1)
( )
ut J , ( ) ( ) (L = 20 mH, C = 50 )
(J ) Nodal analysis at node A
s , (J ) 2
s , (J ) j 1 1 j
1⁄ J 1⁄ * 1 j1 5 1 +
t , (J )3
3J 2
Filter is band-pass filter.
j1 2 1
j j
2. [Ans. D] [ 1 ] j1
2 2
For maximum power transfer, j1
J
1
3. [Ans. D] j1
current impedance
53 ((5 3J)||(5 3J)) 7. [Ans. D]
34 This is standard concept of parallel
5 3 173
1 resonant circuit
4. [Ans. A] 8. [Ans. C]
Replace 10V by short circuit and 1A by | | √4 3 5Ω
open circuit
( 1). (1 1⁄ ) 9. [Ans. C]
1
2 1⁄ 1
j4
5. [Ans. B] 3 j4
1
∠53 13
The RMS current in the load is given by j4
5∠53 13
⃗ ∠ tan ( ) j4 2 ∠
2∠ tan ( ) 4∠ 2 ∠
8 9
2 , reactive power
8 9
4 4
16
10. [Ans. C]
Also note that the active power consumed
by the load 4 7 28
fter series connection
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 194
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
( ) 1
2
1 1
√
2
11. [Ans. B] 1 4 1
√
Total ower (s) 4 2
1 1 4
∠ cos .8 ∠ cos .8 4
.8 .8 c
18 1.5j 4 1
c 1 m
4 1
12. [Ans. *] Range 0.39 to 0.42
x 14. [Ans. *] Range 2.49 to 2.52
(T⁄2 , 1)
1 oupling coefficient given is .56
e know, √
√
t
iven 4 5
T 2 T 2
.56 √4 5
1 2.5 4
√ ∫ x dt
T
15. [Ans. B]
Equation of line
x
1
(t )
T ⁄2
y(t)
2t
T sin t
1 2t
√ *∫ ( ) dt +
T T
1 4t y(t) ( ) sin[ t ( )]
√ * +
T 3T | ( )| .25
By nodal analysis
4 1 x 1∠ x x
√
3 8 1 cj ⁄
2 cj
1 1 cj 1∠
x[ cj ]
√6 2
.4 8 2 3 cj 1∠ 2
x[ ] x
2 2 3 cj
13. [Ans. *] Range 9.99 to 10.01 x 1
y
4 4 2 2 3 cj
1 1
| ( )|
i(t)
4 √4 9
9 12
2
For critically damped √3 c
1 1 2
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 195
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE V
1. [Ans. D]
To calculate Thevenin’s impedance, 200
current – source is open – circuited V
x
R=1 2 T/2
ZL=2j Zth 1 1
T
f 15
ZC= j
y Vrms value of the input voltage
z z z
1
1 2j j * ∫ dt+
T
= 1 j
Open – circuit voltage at terminals X – Y
z 1
1 (1 j) ∫2 dt ∫( 2 ) dt
T
√245 volts [ { }]
2
2. [Ans. B] 2
1 k
Assuming resistance of the heater = R 23
(i) When heater connected to 230 V. 1.739 k
50 Hz source, energy consumed by
the heater = 2.3 units or 2.3 kWh in 3. [Ans. A]
1 hour
Power consumed by the heater
2.3k h
1 hour
2.3 k
rms value of the input voltage
23 j( )
At resonance,
23 so
2.3 1 23 Therefore, input impedance is purely
(ii) When heater connected to 400 V resistive, is minimum and the input
(peak to peak ) square wave source voltage and output current are in phase
of 150 Hz [ j( )]
( )
but
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 196
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
1 5. [Ans. A]
j
l
∠ 9 ∠
R
∠ C
4. [Ans. D]
R IR using ,.
T1
s1
Vs
s2 ( )
P1
( )
25V VP C
P2 ( )
T1
( )
VT
T2 Method -1
* +
All the three windings has same number
of turns, so magnitude of induced emf’s in when
all the three windings will be same i.e. * +
| | | | | |
Polarity of the windings is decided on the * +
basis of dot – convention.
when
As capacitor is charged to 5 V with left
plate as positive.
Method-2
So, T1 is positive wrt T2
5 * +
As T2 has negative polarity. So, P1 has √ ∠ ( )
negative polarity ∠18 ( )
√ ∠ ( )
Therefore, VP = 5
Similarly, S1 has negative polarity ∠ (18 2 tan ( ))
So, 5
Magnitude of
5
.5 So, option (c) and (d) can not be correct,
1 as magnitude is 2V in these two options.
Angle of 1 8 2 tan ( )
When
∠ 18 2tan ( )
18 2 9 36
when
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 197
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
∠ 18 2 tan ( ) 18
On the basic of above analysis, the locus
of is drawn below:
2V
O Ref
when ∠ when
R=0
√
6. [Ans. B] 7. [Ans. B]
Admittance of the series connected RLC Thevenin’s mpedance
2.38 j .667
( ) as real part is not zero , so has resistor
( ) m[ ] j .667
( ) Case –I
*By rationlization} Z0 has capacitor (as Im[Z0]is negative )
Separating, real and imaginary part of Case – II
admittance. Z0 has both capacitor and inductor, but
inductive reactance capacitive
e[ ]
( ) reactances
For any value of , the real part is always at = 5 rad / sec
positive. For minimal realization case – (i) is
When or considered
Therefore, Z0 will have a resistor and a
At (resonance) capacitor.
√
e[ ] (maximum value)
( )
8. [Ans. C]
( ) Input impedance
( )
1
( ) z j ‖
j
( )
z j
At (resonance) 1 j
√
0.1H
Imaginary part of zero
m( )
For
z 1F 1
Therefore, [ ] j .1
On the basis of above analysis, the 1
admittance locus is j ( .1 )
1 1
At resonance, imaginary part must be
zero.
.1
1
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 198
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
1 11. [Ans. B]
.1
1 rms value of input voltage
1 1 1 √2
9 1
√2
3 rad/sec rms value of current
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 199
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
15. [Ans. C] ( )
tt ( )
( ) 1
d
dt 1
1
∫d ∫ dt
t ( )
k ( ) 1 1
At t = 0, 2
[ ]
k 2 1 1
t 1 1
2 1 1 1 1
t 1 1
2 2 2
2 1 1 1 1 1
t 2 1 2 1 2 2
1
2 1 t 1 1
1
2 2
1 1
16. [Ans. C]
2 2 ( )
Magnitude of
| | (using maximum power 1 1
transfer theorem) 2 2
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 200
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
2 2 i i (1 5 cos 2t)
2 (2 ) 3. [Ans. D]
. 1, The A.C bridge is shown in Fig
2. [Ans. A]
The circuit is shown in the figure 1 Let , ,
1
j ,
of the vridge is balanced if product
(5 cos 2t)
4. [Ans. A]
The coupled circuit is shown in Fig. 1
1 1
i
Fig. 2
From figure 2, i 1
Due to AC source (5 cos 2t) alone, the
circuit is shown in figure 3, where the ig 1
Fig. 3
For 2, 2 .25 .5,
2 1 2
As , the parallel RLC circuit is ig 2
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 201
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
.1 i( )
cos(5t)
)
i(t)
cos(1
1 Fig. 1
Given: 5 rad sec
1m 1
5√2e
R=2 , .1 , 2
Taking cos (5t) = Re[1e e ]
v(t)
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 202
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
⃗⃗⃗
9
j2
j2
⃗⃗⃗⃗ 2∠
Fig. 2
The circuit is further simplified to the
circuit in Fig. 3 and Fig. 4
j1 2 j2 1
⃗
Fig. 3
(1 j) 2 j2
⃗
Fig. 4
From Fig 4
(1 j)2 (1 j) √2∠45
⃗
2 j2 1 j √2∠ 45
1∠9 1∠ 9 j
i(t) ⃗
e[ e ] e[1e e ]
e[e ( )
] cos(5t 9 )
sin(5t)
11. [Ans. C]
Phasor current through 2 1 j
1 j j
1
i (t) 1 cos(5 t)
Power is dissipated in the resistance, 2 .
Assuming that the source values are given
in RMS value
Power delivered by the 2 sources
= Power dissipated in the equivalent 2
of Fig. 4
(1) 2 2
Note: Assuming Peak value for the
sources,
Power delivered by the 2 sources
=( ) 2 1
√
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 203
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Laplace Transform
0.002
C
R
1mV
+
+ +
Vi R Vo (A) (C)
(B) (D)
Filter 2
(A) 4 (C) ⁄
(B) 1 (D) ⁄
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 204
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE – 2014
1. The driving point impedance Z(s) for the
circuit shown below is
F F
(A) (C)
(B) (D)
2. [Ans. A]
I(S)
+
~ ( ‖ )
LS
V(S)
( )
Li (0 )
+
……………
⁄
0 0 0 So here,
Now,
3. [Ans. D]
⁄ ⁄ ⁄
Put ,
4. [Ans. C]
( ⁄ ) So, * +
( ⁄ )
………………………
( ⁄ )
⁄
( ⁄ ) I(s) =
⁄
( ( ⁄ ))
⁄
( ⁄ ) Now , ( ‖ )
( ⁄ )
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 205
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
In time domain,
( )
6. [Ans. D]
100 μF
0
100 μF
⁄
⁄
Substituting the values we get
EE
1. Ans. A]
F F
peda e f du a e ‘ ’d a
peda e f apa f F
( )
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 206
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Two-Port Networks
(B) * + (D) * +
(B) (D)
(A) L H R Ω F
ECE - 2008 (B) L H R Ω F
Statement for linked Answer Questions 3 (C) L = 0.1H, R = 2Ω 0.1F
and 4 (D) L H R 2Ω F
A two port network shown below is
excited by external dc sources. The ECE - 2010
voltages and currents are measured with 6. For the two-port network shown below,
voltmeters and ammeters the short circuit admittance parameter
(All assumed to be ideal) as indicated. matrix is
Ω
Under following switch conditions, the 1 2
readings obtained are: Ω Ω Ω
(i) –open , - closed 2
2
(ii) –closed , – open (A) * +S (C) * +S
2
2
(B) * +S (D) * +S
2
2
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 207
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 208
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
2 k 49i1
Input loop
F
F
2
(A) 2 F (C) 2 F
2
(A) * + (C) * + (B) F (D) Fs
2 2
2
(B) * + (D) * + EE - 2010
2
4. The two-port network P shown in the
EE - 2006 figure has ports 1 and 2, denoted by
1. The parameters of the circuit shown in terminals (a, b) and (c, d), respectively. It
the figure are R MΩ R = 10 Ω, has an impedance matrix Z with
A = V/V.If = 1 V, then output parameters denoted by . A 1Ω resistor
voltage, input impedance and output is connected in series with the network at
impedance respectively are port 1 as shown in the figure. The
R R impedance matrix of the modified two-
+ port network (shown as a dashed box) is
+
_ e a c
_
P
(A) 1V, , 10 Ω (C) 1 V, 0,
(B) 1 V,0, 10Ω (D) 10 V, ,10Ω f b d
(D) [ ]
IN - 2007
(A) z parameters,* + 1. The DC voltage gain in the following
(B) h parameters,* + circuit is given by.
R R
(C) h parameters,* +
(D) z parameters,* + R
EE - 2009
3. The equivalent capacitance of the input (A) AV (C) AV +R
loop of the circuit shown is (B) AV (D) AV
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 209
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
IN - 2008 IN - 2013
2. For the circuit shown below the input 3. Considering the transformer to be ideal,
resistance R11 = | is th tr nsmission p r m t r ‘ ’ of th
2 port network shown in the figure
3I2
+ below is
1 2 2 2
Ω 2V3 2Ω 1:2
+ I1 I2
+I I2 + V1 5 5 V2
1
V1 2Ω V3 V2 2
(A) 1.3 (C) 0.5
(B) 1.4 (D) 2.0
(A) Ω (C) Ω
(B) 2 Ω (D) Ω
ECE 3. [Ans. C]
1. [Ans. B] =
=
| current source will be
s (1) =0 |
open)
|
| = r
s (2) =0 |
| = 1.5
2. [Ans .D]
The ABCD parameter equations are given =* +
by,
4. [Ans. A]
wh n th n twork is t rmin l R fig =h h
R =h h
From giv n p r m t rs
2
R R
R R = 1.5 = 3
H=* +
RL
Fig. 1
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 210
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
5. [Ans. D]
R L
R L ⁄ Note: is Independent of
(R L R ⁄ L⁄ )
R L⁄ 8. [Ans. C]
As per the given conditions, we can draw
R L R L⁄
the following two figures.
RL
R L L R
3A
⁄ N
B
(
⁄R ⁄L ) A ± 10
2 V
2
s 2
Comparing (1) and (2)
⁄ 2 F
⁄R R 2
2A
⁄L 2 L H B
A ± 10V N 2.5
6. [Ans. A]
|
|
Let Vth and Rth be the Thevenin voltage &
| 2 resistance as seen from part B.
[ ] 2
* + R
2
7. [Ans. D]
iv n * +
2
2 R
From the circuit shown in Fig. 1 2
2
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 211
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
2 N
i= N
10. [Ans. B]
ort p r m t rs ort 2 Lo
2
For network B
s
s s 2
Port 2 is short circuited
h n ws 2 2
From
s s
[ s ] s
s s
From 2
s s
s 2
[ s ]
s s
s s
[ s
s s s s s
s
s
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 212
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE
h 1. [Ans. A]
= 1V
2 =
2
= R = 10
12. [Ans. B]
s s 2. [Ans. C]
h h
h h
R R I1 I2
s s
s s
V1 V2
om ining n
h |
[(R ) (2R ) R] s s
s R s
*(2R ) (R ) R + s R s h |
R s h h
s s R o h – p r m t rs [ ] * +
(2R ) (R ) R h h
s R s
3. [Ans. A]
s 2Rs Rs R s
Assume a 1A current source at input
R s
terminals,
sr s R = 1A
R k
s }R i k k
F
s s i
k
s s s
~ F
F
13. [Ans. C] i
[ ] Applying KVL
i i j
* +
i [2 j ]
* + Input impedance 2 j
2
As imaginary part is negative, input
impedance has equivalent capacitive
reactance .
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 213
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
2 2 2
h r 2 put it in qu tion
2
2 F
o[ | ]
4. [Ans. C]
The impedance matrix of the modified 3. [Ans. A]
network is calculated from fig. given 2 2 2
1 I1 2
below:
[ ] [ ][ ] V1 5 5 V2
2 n 2
[ ] [ ][ ] |
[ ] [ ] * + t
2
1 2
From qu tion
2
2
From qu tion
Fig.
2 2
IN From qu tion n
1. [Ans. A]
V=
2. [Ans. D]
2 3I2
+
Ω 2V3 2Ω I2
d c
+ I1 b + + +
2
V3
V1 2Ω
f e
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 214
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Network Topology
[ ]
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 215
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
2 5
I II III
Fig.
4 6
3
Fig.
IV
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 216
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 217
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE - 2007 EE - 2014
2. If u(t), r(t) denote unit the unit step and 5. The function shown in the figure can be
unit ramp functions respectively and represented as
u(t) * r(t) their convolution, then the
function u (t+1) * r(t 2) is given by
(A) (1/2) (t 1) (t+2)
(B) (1/2) (t 1) (t 2)
(C) (1/2) (t 1)2 u(t 1)
(D) none of the above
t
EE - 2008
3. Given a sequence x[n], to generate the
(A) u t u t u t
sequence y[n] = x[3 4n], which one of
the following procedures would be u t
correct?. (B) u t u t u t
(A) First delay x[n] by 3 samples to
generate z [n], then pick every 4th (C) u t u t u t
sample of z1[n] to generate z2[n], and u t
then finally time reverse z2[n] to
obtain y[n] (D) u t u t u t
(B) First advance x[n] by 3 samples to
generate Z1[n], and then pick every
4th samples of z1[n] to generate z2 [n] 6. An input signal x t s πt is
and then finally time reverse Z2[n] to sampled with a sampling frequency of
obtain y[n] 400 Hz and applied to the system whose
(C) First pick every fourth sample of x[n] transfer function is represented by
to generate v time-reverse z z
( )
v to obtain v & finally z
advance v by 3 sample to obtain Where, N represents the number of
y[n] samples per cycle. The output y(n) of the
(D) First pick every fourth sample of x[n] system under steady state is
to generate V1[n], time-reverse V1[n] (A) 0 (C) 2
to obtain V2[n], and finally delay (B) 1 (D) 5
V2[n] by 3 samples to obtain Y[n]
7. For the signal
EE - 2011 f t s πt s πt s πt
4. A zero mean random signal is uniformly the minimum sampling frequency (in Hz)
distributed between limits satisfying the Nyquist criterion is ________
and its mean square value is equal to its
variance. Then the r. m. s. value of the IN - 2007
signal is 1. Consider the periodic signal
(A) (C) √ x t c s πt c s πt
√
(D) √ where t is in seconds. Its fundamental
(B)
√ frequency, in Hz, is
(A) 20 (C) 100
(B) 40 (D) 200
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 218
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 219
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
IN - 2014 (A) t s t y
12. Time domain expressions for the (B) t s t y
voltage t t r v s (C) t s t y
t s t (D) t s t y
t = c s t Which one of
the following statement is TRUE?
ECE s π s π
1. [Ans. D] Every trigonometric function repeats
after π t rv
t s π π s π π
π π ) (
π
t S c ‘ ’ s y teger, there is no
p ss v u f‘ ’f rw c ‘ ’c
2. [Ans. A] an integer, thus non-periodic
f u t 7. [Ans. A]
s
ẏ t y t u t , P = 5, Q = u t ,
m tu t fr qu cy
√ I.F. =
s y t ∫
√ √ w
w r
y
f
π y t
t y t s ∑ y
t
5. [Ans. C ] EE
Cascade means convolution 1. [Ans. D]
If the amplitude of a signal have some
6. [Ans. D] finite boundaries for all values of time
Assume x to be periodic, (with period then it is called as bounded signal.
N)
x x
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 220
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
|f t | i.e, z z x
}f r t
r |f t | f tt v v u Now reverse (time reverse) z will
So a bounded signal may possess finite give y[n] = z x
energy or infinite energy.
For example u (t) is bounded signal but it 4. [Ans. A]
possess infinite energy because it is a
Variance
power signal.
It can be zero or nonzero outside a finite
interval ( t t
But it is always true that it will be always
finite for any value of time t.
Mean square value
2. [Ans. C]
RMS value
u t r t √
∫r u t 5. [Ans. A]
Result graph r p r p
r p
z t ∫ r r p
u u t
z t ∫
r p
For (t ≥
t
u t
z t ( )
r p
f r t≥
t t
z t t t t t
u t
For t≥
z t t
For t≥
6. [Ans. C]
z t t u t
x t s πt
t πft πt f
3. [Ans. B]
m p r fx t
Y[n] = x[3 – 4n] = x[ 4n+ 3]
So to obtain y[n] we first advance x[n] by ms
3 unit. s mp p r
i.e, z x
Now we will take every fourth sample of ms
z um r f s mp s c cyc
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 221
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
IN y t ∑ x t
1. [Ans. A]
X(t) = (1+0.5 cos πt c s πt This is the representation of a signal x(t)
c s πt c s πt c s πt in weighted and sum form and it obeys
c s πt c s πt the principle of superposition and
c s πt homogeneity. So, this is linear but it is
x t x t x t time varying as for x(t t ),
w r y t ∑x t t
x c s πt And y t t ∑x t t
x c s πt Therefore
x c s πt y t t y t s t m v ry
Now, tm p r fx t 6. [Ans. C]
π
s
π x t y t ∫ x
s
Value of y t ‘t’ depends on values of x for
s times from t t
As output is depending on future values
of input, the system is Non casual
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 222
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
x t t t t
∫x t t t t {
s w r u t u t
π π
∫ (t ) s t t s
At t = 2 value is 1
Hence, correct option is (B) 12. [Ans. A]
8. [Ans. C] t t
Given the system, y(t) = { x t }
y t x t x t
t
[
x t x t ]
t
As y(t) is obtained from linear operation v t s t
on x(t), the system is linear . t c s t
As the input x(t) is multiplied by a time t c s t
varying function , the system is t c s t
Time – varying.
For a bounded input x(t) , x(t) is
bounded, y(t) is also bounded. Therefore t s t y
the system is stable.
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 223
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 224
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 225
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 226
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
h(t) = . The response of this If the input to the system is cos(3t) and
system for a unit step input u(t) is the steady state output is A sin(3t + ),
(A) u(t) + then the value of A is
(B) u t (A) 1/30 (C) 3/4
(C) u t (B) 1/15 (D) 4/3
(D) t u t
13. Given two continuous time signals 17. Consider an LTI system with impulse
x(t) = and y(t) = which exist for response h(t) = u t . If the output of
t > 0 the convolution z(t) = x(t) * y(t) is the system is y t u t u t
(A) u t then the input, x(t), is given by
(B) u t (A) u t
(C) (B) u t
(D) (C) u t
(D) u t
EE - 2013
14. Which one of the following statement is 18. A 10 kHz even-symmetric square wave is
NOT TRUE for a continuous time causal passed through a bandpass filter with
and stable LTI system? centre frequency at 30 kHz and 3 dB
(A) All the poles of the system must lie on passband of 6 kHz. The filter output is
the left side of the j axis. (A) a highly attenuated square wave at 10
(B) Zeros of the system can lie anywhere kHz.
in the s-plane (B) nearly zero.
(C) All the poles must lie within |s| (C) a nearly perfect cosine wave at 30
(D) All the root of the characteristic kHz.
equation must be located on the left (D) a nearly perfect sine wave at 30 kHz.
side of the j axis.
19. A continuous-time LTI system with
EE - 2014 system function H( ) has the following
15. x(t) is nonzero only for t , and pole-zero plot. For this system, which of
similarly, y(t) is nonzero only for the alternatives is TRUE?
t . Let z(t) be convolution of x(t)
and y(t). Which one of the following
statements is TRUE?
(A) z(t) can be nonzero over an
unbounded interval.
(B) z(t) is nonzero for t
(C) z(t) is zero outside of
t
(D) z(t) is nonzero for t .
(A) | | | | | |
16. Consider an LTI system with transfer (B) | | s mu t p m x m t
function (C) | | | | | |
(D) | | c st t
s
s s
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 228
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(B) c s (t )
(B) √
y(t)
(C) s t
1 √
4
t (D) s (t )
2 6 √
1
IN - 2011
(C)
y(t) 5. Consider the signal
t≥
x(t) = {
1
t
Let X( ) denote the Fourier transform of
t
1 1 3 5 this signal. The integral
∫ is
(A) 0 (C) 1
(D) y t)
(B) ⁄ (D)
1
IN - 2013
3 5
1 2
t 6. The impulse response of a system is
h(t) = t u(t). for an input u(t 1), the
output is
(A) u t
IN - 2008 (B) u t
2. Which one of the following discrete-time
systems is time invariant? (C) u t
(A) y [n] = nx [n] (C) y[n] = x[ n] (D) u t
(B) y [n] = x [3n] (D) y [n] = x[n 3]
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 229
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
IN - 2014
7. The impulse response of an LTI system is
given as :
π
{s
π
It represents an ideal
(A) non-causal, low-pass filter
(B) causal, low-pass filter
(C) non-causal, high-pass filter
(D) causal, high-pass filter
ECE 1 1
1. [Ans. C] x[k]
x → y [s ( π )] x
The system is linear as y(n) is
proportional to the input x(n) 0 2
Times varying as x(n) is multiplied not by 1 1
a constant but by a function of n. h[k]
Stable as bounded input, x(n) gives
bounded output , y(n) :
|s ( π )| ≤ and |y | ≤ |x | +1
0 2
Not invertible as several inputs: k (n) ,
where k is any arbitrary integer, give the
same output equal to zero. 1
The system is Linear, stable and
non – invertible
(It is also Time – varying).
2. [Ans. D]
y ∑ x
3. [Ans. D]
y
h(t) = u t u t
y
For the system to be stable ,
y
y
∫ t t
y
y For the above condition, h(t) should be as
y shown below.
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 230
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
t
∑ s v syst m s t st
u t u t
9. [Ans. D]
t
s s
s s
Therefore y(s) = X(s).H(s)
Graph for s
s s s
s s s
taking inverse
w t
y t u t u t
h(t) ∫ x c s
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 231
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
x
y t ∫c s {x x x } { c um v ct r }
x
{x x x } { c um v ct r }
∫ ∫ c s Designing the matrix using same
sequence
su u st
x x x
syst m s t stable.
x x
11. [Ans. A] x x x
[ x x x ]
( ) u
Now circular convolutions given by
x x x
c
c
g(1) [ ]
c
g(0)
c
Now circular convolution of c with
it self
c
y ∑ c
c c [ ]0 1
c c
1[- k] c
Taking transpose both side
1 c
1/2
c
0 1 0 1 c [ ]
c c c
1/4
c
k Let
0 1 0 1 P S
c c
y ∑
Take DFT both side
y
P S 0 1 0 1
c c
c c
y ∑
P S
y
h[1 – k] will be zero for k > 1 and g[k] will
13. [Ans. *] Range 0.19 to 0.21
be zero for k<0 as it is causal sequence. f
s c t r ct ( )
| |
g [1] = 0 ∫ s c t t
12. [Ans. A] f
∫ |r ct ( )| f P rs v st r m
Matrix method | |
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 232
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
f
tr ( ) z
z
r
f
r (∫ tr ( ) f)
∑ ∑s
f
∫ tr ( ) f
| |
17. [Ans. A]
t s t u t
s
14. [Ans. *] Range 44 to 46 S : Syst m s st
f r ≤t≤ c us t s ut y t r
t , t
t rw s
S : s p t ftm
t u t u t t t
s * + s p t ftm
s s s
y s s s S : A non-causal system with same
transfer function is stable
s u t (a non-causal system)
r st y st t utput m sy s
but this is not absolutely integrable thus
m unstable
s Only S and S are TRUE
c s t f rm f % s pp y ‘ ’
Hospital Rule? 18. [Ans. D]
m
x t t y t
y t x t t c v ut
15. [Ans. *] Range 9.9 to 10.1 f x f f
f r ≤ ≤ f f
x ,
t rw s y t x t
x z z z z z
Convolution in time domain is 19. [Ans. B]
multiplication z domain
z x z x z s
s s s s
f rf y ,we have to find For a stable causal LTI systems, all system
coefficient of z fy z poles should lie on LHP of s-plane.
S t s So to make H(s) causal, we need to cancel
out the pole at s = 2
16. [Ans. A] So, s s
y y x
y z y z z x z
y z
x z z
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 233
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
For x t t
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 234
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
s t ∫ t t
s t t
∫ t t
|
Thus z t is zero outside
t by property of
f r t convolution
s t u t
16. [Ans. B]
13. [Ans. A]
s
X(s) = s s s
s s s | |
√
t | |
√
Z(s) = taking partial fraction
z t u t 17. [Ans. B]
t u t
14. [Ans. C] s
Since it is a stable system all poles should s
lie in the left half of s-plane y s
|S| s ± This implies one pole lie s s
in RHS y s s s
x s
s s s
s
s
s
s
s
t u t
18. [Ans. C]
10 kHz even symmetric square wave have
frequency component present
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 236
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Fig. 4
x(t) = 1 t t
y t t * t t * t
using the properties of convolution:
s t * t t
( )( )( ) t * t t
( )( )( )( ) y t t t
( )( ) The resultant of the triangles in Fig. 3 is
( )( )
shown in Fig. 4
su st tut s
w t| | c st t
2. [Ans. D]
y(n) =x(n 3) represents a time delay
IN
system with delay = 3 secs.
1. [Ans. D]
It is a Time invariant system as can be
y(t) = x(t) * h(t)
confirmed from the following Test.
x(t) and h(t) are shown in Fig. 1 and Fig.2
Test for time – invariance:
x(t)
If y1(n) = y(n-n0), then the system is time
1
invariant
1
1 rt v syst m x y x -3)
1
x y
Fig. 1 x x
From (1) y x
h(t)
1
y
0 4 t
2
3. [Ans. A]
z z z z
Fig. 2
z z z z
y
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 237
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
4. [Ans. D]
x t T/F y t
Given,
Transfer function t
√
And input x(t) = sint
t
√ √
y t s t
√
5. [Ans. C]
Given x (t) = t≥
t
x t f
r pr p rty:
∫ f f ∫ x t |
π
6. [Ans. C]
t tu t ⁄p u t
s ⁄s s
s
y s s s
y t * + ut
7. [Ans. A]
For a system to be non-causal its impulse
response h(n) should depends upon
future value of n and if h(n) is
independent of the past value it never
means that system is non-causal
And it is the equation of LPF with cutoff
frequency
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 238
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
of ∫ ( ) s (B) ⁄ (D)
(A) 5 (C) 16π
(B) 10π (D) 5+j10π ECE- 2014
8. For a function g(t), it is given that
ECE - 2008
∫ t t for any real
3. The signal x(t) is described by
f r ≤t≤ value if
x(t) =, .
t rw s y(t) = ∫ t ∫ y t t s
Two of the angular frequencies at which (A) 0 (C) ⁄
its Fourier transform becomes zero are (B) – (D) ⁄
(A) π π (C) 0, π
(B) π π (D) π π 9. Consider a discrete time periodic signal
ECE - 2009 x[n] = s ( ) Let be the complex
4. The Fourier series of a real periodic Fourier series coefficients of x[n]. The
function has only coefficients { } are non-zero when
P. cosine terms if it is even k = Bm ± 1, where m is any integer. The
Q. sine terms if it is even value of B is ______.
R. cosine terms if it odd
S. sine terms if it is odd 10. A Fourier transform pair is given by
Which of the above statement are
( ) u ⇔
correct? ( )
(A) P and S (C) Q and S
Where u[n] denotes the unit step
(B) P and R (D) Q and R
sequence. The values of A is _______.
ECE - 2011
5. The trigonometric Fourier series of an EE- 2006
even function does not have the 1. x(t) is a real valued function of a real
(A) dc term variable with period T. Its trigonometric
(B) cosine terms Fourier Series expansion contains no
(C) sine terms terms of frequency = 2π (2k) / T;
(D) odd harmonic terms
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 239
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE- 2010
(C)
7. x t is a positive rectangular pulse from
t t t with unit height as
shown in the figure. The value of
∫ | | { where is the Fourier
(D)
transform of x t } is
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 240
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 241
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
14. A function f(t) is shown in the figure. 2. If the waveform, shown in the following
f t figure, corresponds to the second
derivative of a given function f(t), then
/
the Fourier transform of f(t) is
/ f t
/ t t
1
/
t
1 +1
The Fourier transform f f t is
2
(A) real and even function of .
(B) real and odd function of . (A) 1 + sin (C)
(C) imaginary and odd function of . (B) 1 + cos
(D)
(D) imaginary and even function of .
IN- 2011
∑ y qu s 9. Consider a periodic signal x(t) as shown
below
(A) ⁄ (C) ⁄
x(t)
(B) ⁄ (D) 3
1
IN- 2010
8. f(x), shown in the adjoining figure is
represented by
f x ∑{ c s x s x }
The value of is
f x
π π π π π x
(A) 0 (C) π
(B) π⁄ (D) π
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 243
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE 6. [Ans. C]
1. [Ans. A] c s s
x t
s
x [ (t )] ( ) c s
s c * +
2. [Ans. B]
( ) s c s c
∫ f Now r ct ( ) ⃡ s c( )
t
s c( )⃡ r ct ( )
∫ ( )
t
ys c ⃡ r ct ( )
| | [ ]
π π π y t { t }
t { t t }
3. [Ans. A] t t
{r c ( ) r ct ( )}
∫x t t
1
∫ t | ½
-3 -1 +1 3
s
( )
7. [Ans. D]
The concept of matched filter assumes
that the input signal is of the same form
g(t) as the transmitted signal(except
difference in amplitude ). This requires
that the shape of the transmitted signal
± not change on reflection.
π π h(t) = g( t ⇔ f (f)
G f f f sr
4. [Ans. A ] g(t) = (fourier transform)
P & S are correct
y t
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 244
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
( ) u ↔ -1
Fig . 1
( ) u ↔ Fundamental frequency = π/
= π/
( ) u ( ) x t x (t ) shown in Fig. 2
possesses Even symmetry and also half
↔ ( ) wave symmetry.
Fundamental Fourier term of
s ( ) x t c st ( t)
Where M = peak to peak value of
EE x t
1. [Ans. C]
Since trigonometric fourier series has no
sine terms and has only cosine terms
therefore this will be an even signal i.e. it
will satisfy
x(t) =x( t)
or we can write
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 245
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
x1(t) 4. [Ans. C]
1 x t r ct t ⁄
x t ≤t≤
t = 0 otherwise
0
1 x t ∫x t t
Fig. 2
As x(t)= x (t ⁄ ) ∫ t ( )
Fundamental component of
⁄ ⁄
π * +x ⁄
x t c s [ (t )]
π
π π w r x t ≤t≤
c s* t +
π 0, otherwise
3. [Ans. B] x t ∫x t t
Highest frequency of the input signal,
fh = 1kHz as shown in its spectrum of
( )
Fig. 1
| | r| f | ( )
M ⁄ ⁄ ⁄
[ ]
⁄ ⁄
⁄
0 1 * +
f(in kHz)
Fig. 1 s ⁄ ⁄
x t
⁄
Sampling interval , ms f z
x t x t
f f . Therefore Aliasing or overlap of
s ⁄ ⁄ ⁄
the adjacent spectra in the sampled [ ]
⁄
spectrum because f f .
s ⁄
The sampled spectrum , c s ⁄
⁄
U* f f ∑ f f
as shown in Fig. 2. s c( )c s( )
π
The resultant spectrum, U* is
c st t f r ‘f’ s s w w c 5. [Ans. B]
is the same figure given in option(b) y t x t t x t t
| |
Since y(t) is periodic with period T.
fs Therefore x t t x t t will also
M
be periodic with period T.
f
0
Fig. 3 is fourier series coefficient of signal
| | | f |
x(t) therefore
f
[ ]
f(in kHz) c s t
-2 -1 0 1 2 3 s c f r
Fig. 2
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 246
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
i.e. t
∫[ ∫ ]x t t
w r ± ± ±
t π/
π
t π ∫[ ∫ { } ]x t t
π π
6. [Ans. C] π ∫x t x t t
I. A periodic signal x(t) has always
infinite energy
π ∫ |x t | t
∫ |x t | t
7. [Ans. D]
t
0
∫| | ∫
Fig. 1
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 247
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Fig. 2 y s ( ) s
s ( )s
11. [Ans. C]
Fourier series exists for periodic waves.
Since it is a square wave, convergence 16. [Ans. B]
occurs at most points x t v fu ct sr
y t (x t ) t f ur r tr sf rm
12. [Ans. B] t
y
Since F( ) is FT of f(t) hence
y m ry
∫ u u f t t
IN
f t ff t s v
1. [Ans. A]
t is proportional to f(t) if f(t) is even.
t
13. [Ans. A] Given ,
Poles of the system are the roots of the
equation |S |
r * + Use the F.T. pairs:
t
* + putt
u t
s
S * + * +
s If t replaced by ( t), is replaced by
s (
* +
s
|S | s s u t
P s ±
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 248
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
u t u t
So, y t t/
|| ||
5. [Ans. C]
||
In general, K Given x(n) = ( ) u
||
t t y x
2. [Ans. C] ∑ y ∑ ( ) u
From the given plot,
t t t
∑ ( )
Take F.T on both sides
Use the following pairs and properties: rst t rm
Let f(t) t mm r t
f t
t 6. [Ans. A]
t t {x t t }
{ x t t }
c s t
c s | | | || |
c s 7. [Ans. C]
The fourier transform of
3. [Ans. A] u t s s >0
f z; f z f z
f u t will exist
u m t fr qu cy f x t f0=0.2
If
Hz (HCF of are the frequency)
a<0
f f rm c f f
harmonic
8. [Ans. A]
The given function f(x) is periodic
4. [Ans. D]
function with period, T = π
| | F(x) is shown over one period from 0 to
| | π in Fig.
The d.c value of f(x) = ∫ f x x
r u rf x
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 249
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
f(x)
1.5
1.0
x
0
-1.0
-1.5
Fig.
9. [Ans. B]
Clearly, period of the signal x(t) is 3.
So, T = 3
And ∫ x t t
∫x t t
10. [Ans. A]
Given 6 point DFT of x[n] with
y symm try pr p rt s
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 250
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Z-Transform
ECE - 2010
ECE - 2007
6. Consider the z-transform
2. The z-transform x[z] of a sequence x[n] is
z z z ; |z| . The
given by x[z] = . It is given that the
inverse z-transform x[n] is
region of convergence of x[z] includes the (A) 5
unit circle. The value of x[0] is (B) 5
(A) 0.5 (C) 0.25 (C) 5 u u u
(B) 0 (D) 0.5 (D) 5 u u u
3. The samples x [n] (n = 0, 1, 2, ...) are given Which one of the following statements is
by valid?
(A) 5 (1 – ) (C) 5 (1 – ) (A) Both S1 and S2 are true
(B) 5 (D) 5 (B) Both S2 and S3 are true
(C) Both S1 and S3 are true
4. The expression and the region of (D) S1, S2 and S3 are all true
convergence of the z-transform of the
sampled signal are ECE - 2011
8. Two systems z and z are connected
(A) , |z| < e-5
in cascade as shown below. The overall
(B) , | z | < e-0.05 output y(n) is the same as the input x(n)
(C) , | z | > e-0.05 with a one unit delay. The transfer function
- -
of the second system z is
(D) , |z| > e-5
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 251
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
=∑ z
( ) z
z | |
x y (C) y [ n ] y (z)=∑ z
(D) y [ n ] y (z)= z + z +1
EE - 2007
IN - 2011
1. The discrete – time signal
2. Consider the difference equation
x[n] X (Z) = ∑ z ,
y[n] y x and suppose that
Where denotes a transform – pair
relationship, is orthogonal to the signal x[n] = ( ) u . Assuming the condition of
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 252
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE r| z | r |z|
1. [Ans. D] z
z
ROC {x x } {x x }(if there z
are no pole-zero cancellation)
5. [Ans. A]
2. [Ans. B] Recall the z – transform pairs:
ROC is |z| For the Right sided sequence:
x 0.5 u x u |z| | |
For Left sided sequence:
3. [Ans. B] u |z| | |
z
s . / ( ) u |z|
s z
z
( ) |z|
s z
For x(n) containing both the above
s s
terms the ROC is the overlapping region:
t
Therefore samples |z|
⁄
6. [Ans. A]
For the given X(z) , note that the ROC is
4. [Ans. C] the entire z – plane except
z z
z ∑ z
Recall the z – transform pair:
Recall the time shifting property:
∑ z If g(n) G(z)
z z
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 253
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
z 8. [Ans. B]
For given X(z) , y x
x(n)=5 Taking z – transform of both sides
z z z
7. [Ans. C] z
z
z
Given : H(z)=
For cascaded system
Express H(z) in +ve powers of z and find z z z
the zeros and poles. z
z z
z( z) z (z ) z
z z z
(z z ) (z ) (z ) z
z
Poles are at z = ¼ and z = ½ lying inside
the unit circle in the z – plane. 9. [Ans. C]
| |
Consi r t t r p ss ’s: x ( ) ( ) u
(i)|z|
x x s y
For a casual system h(n) =0, n< 0 and
h(n) is a Right sided sequence and ROC is x ∑ x z
the region outside the circle passing
| |
through the right most pole z = ½
∑ x ( ) z
syst m s us
For stability of LTI system unit circle
should be inside the ROC ∑ x ( ) z
syst m s st S sv st t m t
(ii)|z|
∑ x ( ) z
H(n) is a Left sided sequence and the
system is not causal.
t s t c us : ∑ x ( z) ∑ ( z )
f r ≥
As unit circle is not inside the ROC , the , z ( z) -
system is unstable.
S s t – valid statement.
,( z ) ( z ) -
(iii) |z|
The ROC is the annular region between s
two circles bounded by the poles: | z| | z |
At z z
|z| |z| | |
H(n) is a two sided signal existing for
sw sf r ≥ Syst m s
x ( ) u
not causal. As unit circle is not inside the
ROC , the system is unstable. x
S s v st t m t
t S S r tru S s t tru
s| z |
r|z|
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 254
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 255
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
z | z | |z|
u | |
( ) 2. [Ans. B]
z
|z| | | y y x
z
z z
u |z| | | z
z z z
3. [Ans. A] r put x ( ) u
(1 z z has ROC as entire Z-plane
z
which implies that it is polynomial. z |z|
(z )
z s p
z
z z z
4. [Ans. B] ( z ) (z )
z
z
z ( ) (z )
z z
z z
z 1
z ( ) (z )
z
z
z z ( ) (z )
z z z
z z z
z z
x z z z y * ( ) ( ) +u
x { }
x x
3. [Ans. C]
For a system to be stable, it should
IN
contain Z=1 circle in its ROC
1. [Ans. A]
Given, r ( )
x[n] = u
x z ∑ x z
4. [Ans. C]
∑ u z ∑ z Only this option gives poles inside unit
circle.
∑( )
z z
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 256
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Laplace Transform
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 257
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE - 2010 EE - 2012
Common Data for Questions 2 and 3 5. Consider the differential equation
Given f t and t as shown below: y t y t
y t t
f(t) t t
y
wt y t | |
t
1
um r c v u f |
t (A) 2 (C) 0
0 1 (B) 1 (D) 1
g(t)
IN - 2006
1 1. Given, x t x t t xp t u t
the function x(t) is
t (A) xp t u t
0 3 5
(B) xp t u t
2. t can be expressed as (C) t xp t u t
(A) t f t (D) xp t u t
(B) t f( )
IN - 2010
(C) t f( t )
2. u(t) represents the unit step function. The
(D) t f( ) Laplace transform of u(t- is
(A) (C)
3. The Laplace transform of t is
(B) (D)
(A)
(B) IN - 2013
(C) 3. The discrete-time transfer function
(D) is
(A) Non minimum phase and unstable.
EE - 2011 (B) Minimum phase and unstable.
4. Let the Laplace transform of a function (C) Minimum phase and stable.
f(t) which exists for t > 0 be s and the (D) Non-minimum phase and stable.
Laplace transform of its delayed version
f t be s . Let (s) be the complex IN - 2014
conjugate of s with the Laplace 4. The transfer function of a system is given
v r s t s s . If by
/
G(s) = , then the inverse Laplace s
| | s
transform of G(s) is The input to the system is ( )=sin100 t .
(A) mpu s t In periodic steady state the output of the
(B) y mpu s t– system s f u t y t s πt
(C) an ideal step function u(t) ). The phase angle ( ) in degree is
(D) an ideal delayed step function u(t– ___________.
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 258
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE s s s
r
1. [Ans. C] s s s s s
s s} v t tx t u t
s
sF(s) has poles ± , which lie on the s
s
imaginary axis. s
s
v u t r mc t pp s s s
For the given F(s) , f(t) = s t u t
≤f ≤ s s
Hence the final value can be taken as :
≤f ≤ s s
Taking inverse Laplace transform on both
2. [Ans. D] side
poles of S.Y(s) lie on right half of S- y t u t
plane)
s = 1 is right s – plane pole 6. [Ans. B]
Unbounded. s
s f t
s s
Initial value
3. [Ans. A]
s
For the given LTI system mf t ms s s
s s
H(s) =
s ( )
The frequency response is given by mf t
s ( )
t
4. [Ans. B]
7. [Ans. B]
s x t u t u t
0∫ f 1
s
x s
With zero initial condition. s s
Now taking Laplace transform
5. [Ans. B] s y s sy s y s
s
y t y t x t
y t x t
t t t y s
Taking Laplace transform on both side s s s
(assuming zero initial conditions). y s
s s s s s s s s s s
s
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 259
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
t t
t f( ) f( )
s s s
Time shifting (delay by 2)
1
EE
1. [Ans. B]
t
0 1 2 3 4 5
y t ∫x t t
Fig. 3
if we take x(t) as casual input
ut
3. [Ans. C]
x t u t
Form Fig. 3 in the above question,
g(t) = u(t 3) u(t 5)
y t ∫ u t t
Use L.T pair and property:
u t
∫ t s
u t t
s
* + f t s
s s
s
* + f r t s u
4. [Ans. B]
f t t → s
2. [Ans. D]
f t t → s s
Time scaling (Expansion by 2) and Time
s s s
shifting by 3 get g(t) from f(t) s
| s | | s |
f(t) , f(t/2) and g(t) = f ( ) are shown s s | s | ,
fig. 1,2 and 3 G(s)
f(t) t t )
The inverse LT of G(s) is a unit ideal
1
impulse delayed by .
t
0 1 5. [Ans. D]
Fig.1 + y t t
Time scaling (expansion by 2) Converting to s – domain,
s2y(s) – sy(0) – y (0) + 2[sy(s) – y(0)] +
f(t/2) y(s) = 1
[s2 + 2s + 1] y (s) + 2s + 4 = 1
1
y(s) =
t find inverse lapalce transform
0 1 2
y(t) [– 2 e–t te–t] u(t)
Fig. 2 = 2e–t + te–t – e–t
| =2–1=1
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 260
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
IN
1. [Ans. A]
Given,
x t x t t xp t u t
taking Laplace transform on both sides
we get,
s s
s
s
Taking inverse Laplace transform of X(s)
is
x t xp t u t
2. [Ans. C]
Laplace transform of u(t) =1/s
Use Time shifting property:
If the L.T of f(t) is F(s),
Then L.T of x(t) = f(t s s s
f u t- s
3. [Ans. D]
Transfer function is
Clearly all the zeros are on the RHS of
imaginary axis so the system is non-
minimum phase.
Also, the poles z = 0.5 is inside the unity
circle thus the system is stable.
4. [Ans. *]Range 67 to 69
P s
s
t ( ) t
c s
t π
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 261
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE - 2009
10. The 4 –point discrete Fourier transform
1 0 1 x (DFT) of a discrete time sequence
{ 1, 0 ,2, 3} is
The corresponding cumulative (A) [ 0 , 2 +2j , 2 , 2 2j]
distribution function (CDF) has the form (B) [2, 2 +2j , 6,2, 2j]
(A) CDF (C) [ 6 , 1 3j , 2 , 1 + 3j]
1
(D) [ 6 , 1 +3j , 0 , 1 3j]
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 263
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
∑x ≤ ≤
The ratio of the power in the 7th √
harmonic to the power in the 5th Denote this relation as DFT(x). For
harmonic for this waveform is closest in , which one of the following
value to _______. sequences satisfies DFT (DFT (x)) = x ?
(A) x = [1 2 3 4]
23. Let z pz (B) x = [1 2 3 2]
z qz (C) x = [1 3 2 2]
z z r z . The quantities p, (D) x = [1 2 2 3]
q, r are real numbers.
|r| EE - 2006
Consider P q . If the
1. A discrete real all pass system has a pole
zero of H(z) lies on the unit circle then
at z = 2 300 it, therefore
r = _____
(A) also has a pole at 300
24. For an all-pass system (B) has a constant phase response over
the z-plane: arg| z | = constant
z w r | ( )| for
(C) is stable only, if it is anticausal
all . (D) Has a constant phase response over
If m , then b equals the unit circle: arg| | =
(A) (C) /
constant
(B) (D) /
EE - 2007
25. A modulated signal is
Statement for Linked Answer Questions 2
y t m t c s πt where the
& 3:
baseband signal m(t) has frequency
2. A signal is processed by a causal filter
components less than 5 kHz only. The
with transfer function G(s). For a
minimum required rate (in kHz) at which
distortion free output signal waveform,
y(t) should be sampled to recover m(t) is
G(s) must
_____
(A) Provide zero phase shift for all
frequency
26. A causal LTI system has zero initial
(B) Provide constant phase shift for all
conditions and impulse response h(t). Its
frequency
input x(t) and output y(t) are related
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 265
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(C) Provide linear phase shift that is filter with a cut-off frequency of 20 Hz.
proportional to frequency The resultant system of filters will
(D) Provide a phase shift that is function as
inversely proportional to frequency (A) An all-pass filter
(B) An all-stop filter
3. G(z) = z + z is a low-pass digital (C) A band stop (band-reject) filter
filter with a phase characteristics same as (D) A band-pass filter
that of the above question if
(A) (C) (1/3) EE - 2014
(B) / 7. A sinusoid x(t) of unknown frequency is
(D)
sampled by an impulse train of period 20
4. Consider the discrete-time system shown ms. The resulting sample train is next
in the figure where the impulse response applied to an ideal lowpass filter with a
of G(z) is g[0] = 0, g[1] = g[2] = 1, cutoff at 25 Hz. The filter output is seen to
be a sinusoid of frequency 20 Hz. This
+ means that x(t) has a frequency of
Σ G(z)
+ (A) 10 Hz (C) 30 Hz
(B) 60 Hz (D) 90 Hz
K
IN - 2006
The system is stable for range of values of 1. A digital filter has the transfer function
K
(A) [ 1, ½] (C) [ 1/2, 1] H(z) = If this filter has to reject a
(B) [ 1, 1] (D) [ 1/2, 2] 50 Hz interference from the input, then
the sampling frequency for the input
EE - 2008 signal should be
5. A signal x (t) = sinc( t) where is a real (A) 50 Hz (C) 150 Hz
constant (s c x ) is the input (B) 100 Hz (D) 200 Hz
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 266
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 267
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE
1. [Ans. B]
m(f)
f
500 500
= m(t) in time domain.
500 500
3. [Ans. C]
m f f
Autocorrelation function is an even
function
4. [Ans. B]
500
PSD is always a positive quantity
20kH 500 20kHz
z pass filtering with f
After low z
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 268
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
5. [Ans. C] 9. [Ans. A]
h(t) = u t H(s) = P P x xp |x| xp |x|
∫P x x
6. [Ans. D]
| | | |
Input x(t) = 2cos(2t) r ∫{ } x
Frequency response
π
r∫ x
Output r
π r
π π
10. [Ans. D]
x t t x t 4-point DFT of sequence {1,0,2,3} is given
π as
π [ ][ ]
{ }
{
}
π [ ] [ ]
11. [Ans. A]
c s t s t h[2] =1 and h[3]= 1
h [n] = { }
√
[ c s t s t] h[n] is high pass filter & FIR filter.
√ √
c s t π 12. [Ans. B]
√
c s t π PSD of white noise
/ z
7. [Ans. A] PSD of output
f | f | f
8. [Ans. A] | f |
P f x t u t tu t utput s p w r
t u t
∫ f f
x ∫f x x
17. [Ans. B]
For 8-points DFT;
x x x x x x and
13. [Ans. B] it is conjugate symmetric about x[4]
PS x x
18. [Ans. C]
= FT t tu t ⁄p u t
s ⁄s s
s c fu ct s
y s s s
14. [Ans. C] y t * + ut
s s c s c s
19. [Ans. A]
s t [c⏟ s πt c s
⏟ πt ] t s t c s t
s [ π⁄ ]
Maximum frequency in s t is 600Hz
( s t )
SO, are rational
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 270
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
When all the zeros are outside the unit 24. [Ans. B]
circle Maximum phase z
z
When some zeros are inside unit circle z
some outside unit circle mixed r f z sz z
phase
Poles of H(z) is z z
22. [Ans. *] Range 0.50 to 0.52 r p ss syst m w w
Consider one period from t t r
p
t s c
x
t t t 25. [Ans. *] Range 9.5 to 10.5
t
u t s
y t m t c s πt
c s π to recover m(t) minimum required rate
c s π should be twice the minimum frequency of
π m(t)
P w r f m rm c | | f f z
c s π
| |
π 26. [Ans. *] Range 0.99 to 1.01
| | y y
S y t x t
| | t t
y y
* y t + x t
23. [Ans. *] Range t t
z s
z (P ) s
Pz z s s s
z t
z (q ) t ∫ t t
qz t
z
z z r z s
z rz s s s s
s
z z s s
s * +
z rz z z* r z + s
s s
(z ) (z ) (z ) (z )
s s s s
One zero is at origin. The other zero lies at So number of poles G(s) = 1
z
r 27. [Ans. B]
Since, this zero lies on unit circle |z|
x [ ]
z r √
r
z r
r [ ] x
S c v |r| r √
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 271
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
z z
z
[ ] x [ ] x z z
z
r z
z z
Now check for each Options
S t syst m w st f t’s ut r
EE most pole will lie inside the unit circle.
1. [Ans. C] Location of poles
For causal system, if all poles are inside ±√
z
the unit circle then system is stable, and
converse is true for anti-causal system. √
2
2
r √
√
2. [Ans. C]
sc t s s t sf y pt
For distortion free output phase shift must
(A)
be linear function of frequency i.e.
proportional to frequency this is because 5. [Ans. A]
delay to all frequency component will be x(t) = sinc( t s π t
equal. h(t) =s t s π t
x(t) = s π t
3. [Ans. A]
1/
For distortion free output phase shift must
be linear function of as will as all the
frequency component must be amplified
𝜔
by same amount so z π π
corresponds to frequency . While
z corresponds to frequency 3 . h(t)= s π t
In order to have same amplification of 1/
frequency component at ,
4. [Ans. A] 𝜔 π
π
Given
g(1) =g(2) =1. Otherwise 0 y(t) = h(t) * x(t)
i.e. g[n] =
therefore 1/
G(z) = z z if
Therefore overall transfer function of
y
closed loop system
π π
z
z
z
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 272
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
1/ 7. [Ans. C]
if Sinusoid x(t) frequency say f .Hz
s mp fr qu cy
Or Y(j𝜔
π π
z utput z
f
So y(t) = s π t f z u t frqu cy tr s t
y(t) = s c t f
IN
or y(t) = s c t f
1. [Ans. A]
So output is of the form k sinc( t In order to reject the 50 Hz interference,
Where m sampling frequency must be as low as the
noise frequency (so that they are
6. [Ans. D] separated in time domain and has less
The frequency response, f of LPF with interference)
cutoff frequency, 30 Hz is shown in Fig. 1. So, f z
The frequency response f of HPF with
cutoff frequency, 20 Hz is shown in Fig. 2 2. [Ans. B]
If these two filters are cascaded, the Let X(f) be the spectrum of the
overall frequency response of the bandlimited signal, x(t). let Xs(f) be the
resultant system H(f) = H1(f) H2(f), shown spectrum of the sampled signal xs(t)
in Fig. 3, represents a BPF with
Bandwidth, B = 10 Hz f f ∑ f f
H1(f)
Where fs is the sampling frequency i.e.,
X(f) is repeated at
±f ± f ± f tc
From the given spectrum of Xs(f) in the
0 10 20 30 40 f
question, fs = 250 s/sec
Fig. 1 S mp t rv
H2(f) Ts= ms=4ms
3. [Ans. B]
Since output y depends on input, such as
f no delay, delay by 1 unit, delay by 2 unit,
30 20 0 20 30
delay by 4 unit, so it will sum all the
sample after 4Ts (maximum delay), to get
Fig. 2 one sample of y[n].
H(f)
t ms c
4. [Ans. C]
x(t) band limited to FHz
f i.e., fm = FHz
30 20 0 20 30
y(t) = x(0.5t) + x(t) –x(2t) is
x(t) – maximum frequency = z
Fig. 3
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 273
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
5. [Ans. A] for ≤ ≤
Given y(n) = x(n) – y where M is the number of points filter
y here,
Now,
y y x
Take z – transform:
z [ z ] z
H(z) =
∑
6. [Ans. B]
z z
( )
c s s
| ( )| √ c s s 9. [Ans. B]
√ c s Given H(z) =
√ s This T.F corresponds to a 3rd order digital
| ( )| s ≤ ≤ π filter
so, | ( )| , if π D F – I realization requires 2N delays
w r D F – II realization or canonic realization
π with minimum number of delay elements
π f r
requires N delays.
f z Where N is the order of the order of the
filter
7. [Ans. A] – I requires 6 delays
z z z z D F – II requires 3 delays
Let, z z z
then,
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 274
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
10. [Ans. B]
z [z z z z z
The discrete time system with rational
transfer function , H(z) is stable if the ]
poles of H(z) lie inside the unit circle in
z ⌊z z z ⌋
the z – plane.
z z
r z ts v rs / z t
z
stable , both the poles and zeros of H(z)
must lie inside the unit circle in the z –
plane.
As the impulse response, h(n) = Inverse
Z.T of H(z) has only finite duration =7
11. [Ans. B]
samples, the given digital filter is an FIR
Highest frequency component in x(t) is
filter.
150 Hz. So, the Nyquist sampling rate is
300 Hz.
13. [Ans. B]
But, x(t) is sampled at 100 Hz. While
Given that
cos(100 πt) with frequency 50 Hz will be
recovered satisfactorily after passing ( ) [ ]
through the low – pass and sin(300πt) will c s s
get aliased resulting in filter output sin
(100 πt). | ( )| √ c s s
Cos (100 πt s ’t c tribute to aliasing.
√ c s c s s
12. [Ans. D]
√ c s c s( )
From the given pole – zero plot of the
digital filter, the system function cut ff | |
( )( ) √ √
z π π
c s r
[ z (z ) z ] z √
z πr ⁄s mp z
[(z z ) z ] π π
r ⁄s mp z
π
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 275
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
s
1/s
1 1 1/s
u
(A) 0 (C)
(B)
(D)
The set of equations that correspond to
this signal flow graph is ECE - 2014
x x 3. For the following system,
(s)
(A) (x ) = [ ] (x ) +
x x
s (s)
u s
[ ] .u / (s)
x x
(B) (x ) = [ ] (x ) + w n (s)
x x ( )
t tr ns r un t on ( )
s
u
[ ] .u / s s
( ) ( )
s s(s )
x x s
x x ( ) ( )
(C) ( ) = [ ]( ) + s s(s )
x x
u 4. Consider the following block diagram in
[ ] .u /
the figure.
x x (s) (s)
(D) [x ] = [ ] (x ) +
x x
u
[ ] .u /
(s)
tr ns r un t on s
(s)
(A) (C)
(B) (D)
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 276
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE - 2007 EE - 2010
1. The system shown in figure below. 3. As shown in the figure, a negative
feedback system has an amplifier of gain
b0 c0 b1 C1 100 with 10% tolerance in the forward
Σ Σ path, and an attenuator of value 9/100 in
the feedback path. The overall system
Σ Σ 1/s Σ Σ1/s p
gain is approximately:
a a
1
0
With EE - 2014
(A) X = s , 4. The closed-loop transfer function of a
Y= ⁄(s system is (s) The steady
s ) s ( )
(D) X s , s s
(s) (s)
⁄(s s ) s
EE - 2008
2. A function y(t) satisfies the following Assuming n ,
() the input-output transfer function
differential equation, + y(t) = (t),
( )
where (t) is the delta function. (s) of the system is given by
( )
Assuming zero initial condition and s
( ) (s)
denoting the unit step function by u(t), s s
y(t) can be of the form s
( ) (s)
(A) (C) u(t) s s
(B) (D) u(t) s
( ) (s)
s s
s
( ) (s)
s s
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 277
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
s R 1 1 1 C
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 278
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE 2. [Ans. B]
1. [Ans. D] (s)
(s) (s)
s
x
u x
(s)
x
u
x
(s) (s) [ ]
s s
o (s) (s) (s)
x x x u (s) (s)
x x x u (s)
s s
x x x (s)
x x r or
u (s) s
x
[ ] [ x
][ ] [ ] 0u 1
x x
3. [Ans. D]
One can denote any state by any name When x (s)
So, that answer is (s)
(s)
x x
u s
[x ] = [ ] (x ) + [ ] .u /
x x s
s
y(s) s
x (s) s(s )
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 279
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
s s s
s s s
(s) (s) s s
All the loops touch forward paths
( )
(s) (s)
s s s s
s ng M son’s g n ormul
(s)
(s) s
(s) (s)
(s)
(s) s ( )s ( )
(s)
(s) ( s) (s s )
(s) ()
(s) ( s) (s s )
(s)
EE Σ
1. [Ans. D]
(s) xy
Σ s Σ s (s) yz
(s) s
Comparing eg. (I) and (ii), we get
s
xy
s s
s
Signal flow graph of the block – diagram yz
s s
Hence option (D) is correct
s s 2. [Ans. D]
( )
Take LT on both sides,
( )
s.Y(s)+Y(s) =1 Y(s) = ( )
y(t) = u(t)
There are forward paths
3. [Ans. A]
T.F = =10
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 280
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Also, 6. [Ans. B]
(s) M M . /
( )
s s (s) s
. /
s
(s) ( ) 2. [Ans. C]
(s) In this case, open loop gain sensitivity is
( )
. / measured with respect to KG. Because
here open loop gain = KG
s
s s
s ( ) ( )( )
( )
s s
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 281
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
6. [Ans. D]
( )( ) ( s ount)
s n (s)
t n (s)
os (s)
( )( )
( )
( or l rg )
For analytical region there should be no
s poles
( ) ≠
s ( ) os sn os sn ≠
( )
os ≠
( n )
≠
So close loop transfer function is sensitive
to perturbation in H(s) but not to
7. [Ans. A]
perturbation in G(s) for large k values.
u(s) s s y(s)
3. [Ans. A]
forward path =
. /;
( ) |
( ) ( )
= ( ) ( )
( ) Loop =
4. [Ans. C]
(s)
=1 ( )
( )
8. [Ans. A]
( ) Writing the given open loop transfer in
( ) form of
5. [Ans. A] g t
The transfer function of a Zero-order- . /. /. /
Hold system having a sampling interval T So, at low frequencies, the approximate
is ( ) model equivalent to original transfer
function will
( )
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 282
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE - 2007
4. The frequency response of a linear, time-
invariant system is given by H(f)= (D)
. The step response of the system is j
(A) 5 (1 )u(t) (C) (1 )u(t)
(B) 5 (1 )u(t) (D) (1 )u(t)
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 283
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
y(t) p r m t r ‘p’ s
(A) √ (C) 1
√
(B) (D)
1 √
t
ECE - 2011
12. The differential equation
y x(t) describes a
system with an input x(t) and an output
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 284
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
t
15. The natural frequency of an undamped
(B) second-order system is 40 rad/s. If the
system is damped with a damping ratio
y(t) 0.3, the damped natural frequency in
rad/s is ________.
s
ECE - 2012
13. A system with transfer function 18. For the second order closed-loop system
(s )(s ) shown in the figure, the natural frequency
(s)
(s )(s )(s ) (in rad/s) is
is excited y s n( t). The steady-state (s)
(s)
output of the system is zero at s(s )
(A) r s (C) r s
(B) r s (D) r s
ECE - 2014
(A) 16 (C) 2
14. For the following feedback system
(B) 4 (D) 1
(s) . The 2%-settling time of
( )( )
the step response is required to be less EE - 2007
than 2 seconds. 1. Consider the feedback control system
shown below which is subjected to a unit
step input. The system is stable and has
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 285
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
0.5
0.25
0
0 1 2 3 4
Time
+ +
y
+ 1
r(t) 1
S(S+1) + y(t)
0.8
7. If the disturbance is measurable, its effect on
the output can be minimized significantly
using a feedforward controller (s) To
t eliminate the component of the output due to
(A) 0.25 (C) 1 (t) s n t ( ) Should be
(B) 0.8 (D) 4 (A) (C) √
√
(D) √
(B)
√
Statement for Linked Answer Questions 4
&5
8. Let (s) ontroll r I (t) s n t
A unity feedback system has open loop
the amplitude of the frequency component of
transfer function G(s) = .The time
( ) y(t) due to d(t) is
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 287
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
IN - 2011
(A) √ (C) √
11. The unit-step response of a negative unity
feedback system with the open-loop
(B) √ (D) √
transfer function G(s) = is
IN - 2010 (A) (C)
9. A unity feedback system has an open loop (B)
(D)
transfer function (s) .The value
( )
of k that yields a damping ratio of 0.5 for ECE/EE/IN - 2013
the closed loop system is 12. Assuming zero initial condition, the
(A) 1 (C) 5 response y(t) of the system given below
(B) 3 (D) 9 to a unit step input u(t) is
(A) 0 (C) 1
(B) 0.5 (D) 2
ECE (s )
1. [Ans. A] s
y(t) x(t) (t) s
(s) (s) (s)
utput
s s
( ) ( )u(t)
s √
When t = at steady state
√ output = 1
x(t) s n(t)u(t)
3. [Ans. B]
y(t) s n .t /
√ ,st p r spons -
* +
s
2. [Ans. C]
(t)
s
(s)
s
4. [Ans. B]
(s)
s ()
output (s) (s)
(s )s
( )
s .s / s
s(s ) s s
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 288
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
t p r spons
s .s / s s
(t) ( )u(t)
(s ) s Which is also the required impulse
s .s / s s response of the system.
w ns
When s = 8. [Ans. D]
Comparing the given transfer functions
⁄
with
(s) y(t) , -u(t)
s s
s ξ s
5. [Ans. D] ln ξ
s
In dominant pole concept the factor that Therefore P is undamped
has to be eliminated should be in time
constant form s s
ξ
(s )(s s )
s ov r mp
. / (s s )
s s
s s ξ
s rt lly mp
6. [Ans. C]
ov rs oot p n s on ξ s s s
√
M ξ
r ξ os
s un r mp
Where is the angle made by pole from
negative real axis.
9. [Ans. A]
To make M same, should be the same.
10. [Ans. B]
7. [Ans. C] Steady state value = -2
Transfer functions Denominator
(s )
(s) ξ
(s )(s )
Input (s) ξ
s
Output, (s) (s) (s)
underdamped
v n l m s (s)
s (s ) 11. [Ans. B]
or l m
(s )(s ) (s)
t
√
or 1= P=
√ √
(s )
(s)
(s )(s )
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 289
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
12. [Ans. A] ( s)
y y (s )(s )
y x(t)
t t (s+1)(s+2)+0.15+5s=0
Taking Laplace Transform of both sides s s s
s (s) s (s) (s) (s) s
(s) pt on (s) (s )
(s) s s ( s ) o (s) (s)
(s )
ol s r ts
(s )(s )
As poles are on the right hand side of s- (s )(s ) (s )
plane so given system is unstable system. s s
Only option (A) represents unstable s
system. Hence Option C is correct
pt on ( )
s
s
o (s) (s)
(s )(s )(s ) (s)
(s) (s)
s s s (s) (s)
s (s) (s) (s) (s)
(s) (s)
pt on (s) ( ) (s) * +
s (s) (s)
o (s) (s)
(s)
(s) (s)
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 290
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(s)
s s
(s)
s s 2. [Ans. C]
r (s) m
s
s s
l m s (s) l ms
s s s
+ i
18. [Ans. C]
r ns r un t on
s s ∫ t
t
or or r un t syst m
Taking Laplace transform
s ξ (s) ( s ) I(s)
s
(s)
I(s)
s
EE
1. [Ans. A] ∫ t
Step input (s) s
s (s) (s)
(s) I(s) * +
s s s
(s)
(s)
(s)
(s)
s ξ s t (s)
s s
(s)
(s) .s s /
(s) ( )( ) Characteristic eq.
s s ξ s
n (s) s s
(s) (s) (s)
Comparing with
(s) (s) (s) (s)
s s
(s) (s) (s)
(s)
(s) [ ] √
(s)
(s) (s)
(s) * +
(s) (s)
√
(s) √
(s) (s)
s (s)
Steady state value of Z
√
t s (s)
√
s Overshoot
t
⁄
. /. / √
= 0.163 or 16.3%
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 291
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
3. [Ans. C] 5. [Ans. C]
M(s)
√ s s
Comparing with standard form
√ M(s)
r s s ξ s
Setting time (t ) ξ
ms ξ
6. [Ans. D]
t y st t v lu o r spons
T Input is unit step
So steady state error
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 292
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
8. [Ans. A] Given
R(s) C(s) ,
+ G(s) +
4. [Ans. B]
(s)
( )
n t
√
s (s)
| ⁄
(s)
x(t) ,u(t) u(t )- 5. [Ans. B]
x(s) [ ] , -
s s s
( )
s |
s (s) 6. [Ans. A]
( ) ( )
( ) . /. / ( ) ( )
( )
IN
m ( )
1. [Ans. D] s
m ( )
(s) s
s ( ) ( )
( ) t n ( ) 7. [Ans. D]
Phase lag t n ( ) Output due to
It satisfy , r s - d(t)= (t) (t) (s)
( )
(t) [ ]
2. [Ans. B] s(s )
or n (s) ( )
s nt * +
(s) ( )
s ( ) ( )
or r(t) u(t)
os t on l rror onst nt
√ ⁄
t (s)
8. [Ans. B]
y(s) (s) , (s) (s) y(s)-
OR ( )
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 293
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
9. [Ans. D]
T(s) =
( )
= √ and = or
√
or K = 9.
10. [Ans. B]
(s)
s(s )
For unit Ramp input, r(t) t u(t)
lo ty rror onst nt
t (s)
11. [Ans. D]
(s)
(s) s
The unit step response is given by
(s)
s(s ) s s
(t) ( ) u(t)
12. [Ans. B]
H(s)
u(s) Y(s)
⁄
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 294
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE - 2007
Which of the following statements is true? 1. The system shown in the figure is
(A) The closed loop system in never U1 + s
st l or ny v lu o Σ s
(B) or som pos t v v lu s o t
closed loop system is stable, but not
U2
for all positive values s
Σ +
(C) For all positive v lu s o t los
(A) stable
loop system is stable
(B) unstable
(D) The closed loop system is stable for
(C) conditionally stable
ll v lu s o ot pos t v n
(D) stable for input u1, but unstable for
negative
input u2
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 295
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
2. If the loop gain K of a negative feedback (C) unstable and of the minimum phase
system having a loop transfer function type
( ) (D) unstable and of the non-minimum
to be adjusted to induce a sustained
( )
phase type
oscillation then
(A) The frequency of this oscillation
6. The frequency response of the linear
must be ⁄ rad/s. system ( ) is provided in the tabular
√
(B) The frequency of this oscillation form below.
must be 4rad/s ( ) ( )
(C) The frequency of this oscillation 1.3
must be 4 or ⁄ rad/s 1.2
√ 1.0
(D) Such a K does not exist
0.8
0.5
EE - 2008
0.3
3. Figure shows a feedback system where
The gain margin and phase margin of the
K > 0. The range of K for which the
system are
system is stable will be given by
+ (A) n
Σ s(s )(s ) (B) n
(C) n
(A) 0 < K < 30 (C) 0 < K < 390 (D) n
(B) 0 < K <39 (D) K > 390
EE - 2014
EE - 2009 7. In the formation of Routh-Hurwitz array
4. The first two rows of Routh's tabulation for a polynomial, all the elements of a row
of a third order equation are as follows. have zero values. This premature
s3 2 2 termination of the array indicates the
s2 4 4. presence of
This means there are (A) only one root at the origin
(A) two roots at s= ± j and one root in (B) imaginary roots
right half s-plane (C) only positive real roots
(B) two roots at s = ± j2 and one root in (D) only negative real roots
left half s-plane
(C) two roots at s= ± j2 and one root in 8. For the given system, it is desired that the
right half s-plane system be stable. The minimum value of
(D) two roots at s = ± j and one root in for this condition is __________
(s) (s)
left half s-plane (s )
s ( )s ( )s ( )
EE - 2011
5. An open loop system represented by the
( )
transfer function G(s) = ( )(
is 9. A system wth the open loop transfer
)
(A) stable and of the minimum phase function
type (s)
(B) stable and of the non-minimum s(s )(s s )
phase type
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 296
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
not the system is stable from the values of k for which the closed loop
information given system will remain stable is:
(A) 1 <k <3 (C) 5 < k <
IN - 2006 (B) 0 < k < 10 (D) 0 < k <
1. The range of the controller gains (Kp, Ki)
that makes the closed loop control system IN - 2011
(shown in the following figure) stable is 4. rst two rows o out ’s t l o
given as third-order characteristic equation are
(s) (s) s 3 3
s (s )(s ) s 4 4
It can be inferred that the system has
Ki (A) one real pole in the right-half of s-
(A) Ki < 0 and Kp < 20
12 plane
K (B) a pair of complex conjugate poles in
(B) Ki < 0 and Kp i 20
12 the right-half of s-plane
(C) Ki 0 and Kp 0 (C) a pair of real poles symmetrically
Ki placed around s = 0
(D) Ki 0 and Kp 20 (D) a pair of complex conjugate poles on
12
the imaginary axis of the s-plane
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 297
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
3. [Ans. C]
losed loop gain is
( )
(s) s s s
Characteristic equation X X
(s) s ( )s
Calculation of break point
los loop system is stable only for
r or or ll pos t v o
(s )(s )
the closed loop system is stable.
(s )(s )
4. [Ans. C] s
s
Perform Routh analysis to the polynomial
in denominator of G(S). (s)
s 1 3 5 , -
s 2 6 3
s (∈) 7. [Ans. *] Range 1.9 to 2.1
For (s) to remain stable, the poles of
s ( ) 3 (s) should lie in LHP of s-plane
s 1 2–P
( )
s 3+P
. / s 2–P
( )
o m x mum v lu o s
3
Number of sign changes =2
EE
5. [Ans. A] 1. [Ans. D]
Characteristic equation is 1+G(S)H(S)= 0 u ( ) s y ( )
( ) s
1+
s s + s (k + 2) + (k + 1) = 0
1 k+2
a k+2 s
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 298
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
( ) 5. [Ans. B]
(s )
( ⁄ ) ( ) For G(s), poles are at 2 and 3 Stable
(s )
( ) ( ) Also, zeroes are to the right of S-plane
Pole is in LHS of s-plane, Hence stable. non-minimum phase type
u ( ) y ( )
6. [Ans. A]
s
At gain across over frequency ( ),
magnitude of ( ) is 1.
| ( )|
s
Phase of ( ) ( )
s
Phase of margin = ( )
( ⁄ ) ( )
( ) ( )
At phase cross frequency ( )p s o
s ( )s ( )
(s )(s ) M m gn tu o ( ) t
Hence unstable as it has pole at right | ( )|
hand side of S-plane Gain margin= log
2. [Ans. B] log
( )
T(s) =
( )
7. [Ans. B]
s 1 64+3k It is a special case under R-H stability
criteria. Imaginary roots are calculated
s using auxiliary polynomial
√
& k < 390 (for stability)
4. [Ans. D]
s s s
(s )(s ) S=
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 299
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
s 12
√ √
s ( )
√
M n mum v lu
9. [Ans. 5]
Characteristic equation
n
s(s )(s s )
(s s)(s s )
s s s s s s
s s s s 2. [Ans. C]
s(s )
s 1 6 k s s
s 4 4 0 √
√
s 5 K
s √ or √
s 1
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 300
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE - 2007 ( )
(A) (s) (s)
( )( )
1. A unity feedback control system has an ( )
open-loop transfer function (B) (s) (s)
( )( )
(s) . The gain K for which (C) (s) (s)
( ) ( )( )( )
s= 1+j1 will lie on the root locus of this (D) (s) (s)
( )
( ) )
system is
(A) 4 (C) 6.5
ECE - 2014
(B) 5.5 (D) 10
4. Consider the feedback system shown in
the figure. The Nyquist plot of G(s) is also
ECE - 2009
shown. Which one of the following
2. The feedback configuration and the pole-
conclusions is correct?
zero locations of G(s) = are shown
(s)
below. The root locus for negative values
of k, i.e. for s
Im ( )
breakaway/break-in points and angle of
departure at pole P (with respect to the
positive real axis) equal to
+
+ k G(s)
( )
Im(s)
(A) G (s) is an all-pass filter
(B) G (s) is a strictly proper transfer
function
(C) G (s) is a stable and minimum-phase
Re(s) transfer function
P
(D) The closed-loop system is unstable
for sufficiently large and positive k
(A) ± √ and 00 (C) ± √ and 00
(B) ± √ and 450 (D) ± √ and 450 5. In the root locus plot shown in the figure,
the pole/zero marks and the arrows have
ECE - 2011 been removed. Which one of the following
3. The root locus plot for a system is given transfer functions has this root locus?
below. The open loop transfer function
corresponding to this plot is given by
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 301
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(C) j
(A)
( )( )( )
(B)
( )( )( )
(C)
( )( )( ) +1
2 1 +2
( )( )
(D)
( )( )
EE - 2010
( ) 2. The characteristic equation of a closed-
loop system is
s(s )(s ) (s ) .
Which of the following statements is true?
(A) Its roots are always real
The constant damping ratio line, for (B) It cannot have a breakaway point in
ξ nt rs ts t root lo us t po nt the range ,s- 0
The distance from the origin to point A is (C) Two of its roots tend to infinity along
given as 0.5. The value of K at point A the asymptotes Re, -
is__________ (D) It may have complex roots in the
right half plane.
EE - 2006
1. A Closed – loop system has the EE - 2011
characteristic function 3. The open loop transfer function G(s) of a
(s )(s ) + K (s ) = 0. Its root unity feedback control system is given as,
locus plot against K is . /
G(s) =
j𝛚 ( )
(A)
From the root locus, it can be inferred
that when k tends to positive infinity.
(A) three roots with nearly equal real
2 1 +1 +2
parts exist on the left half of the s-
plane
(B) j (B) one real root is found on the right
half of the s-plane
(C) the root loci cross the j axis for a
fin t v lu o ≠
2 +1 +2 (D) three real roots are found on the
right half of the s-plane
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 302
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(B) (D) ( )( )(
X ( )( )( ) )
X
IN - 2009
1.5+j1.5 5. A unity feedback system has the transfer
( )
X X X function ( )
. The value of b for which
8 4 0
the loci of all the three roots of the closed
loop characteristic equation meet at a
single point is
(A) 10/9 (C) 30/9
(A) 11.3 (C) 41.25 (B) 20/9 (D) 40/9
(B) 21.2 (D) 61.2
IN - 2011
IN - 2007 6. Consider the second-order system with
Statement for Linked Answer Questions 2
the characteristic equation
and 3 ) (s )
s(s . Based on the
A transfer function with unity DC gain has
properties of the root loci, it can be shown
three poles at and and no
that the complex portion of the root loci
finite zeros. A plant with this transfer
of the given system for is
function is connected with a proportional
described by a circle, and the two
breakaway points on the real axis are
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 303
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(A)
√ (C) √ IN - 2014
(D) √ 8. A loop transfer function is given by :
(B) √ (s )
(s) (s)
( )
IN - 2012 The point of intersection of the
7. The open loop transfer function of a unity asymptotes of G(s)H(s) on the real axis in
gain negative feedback control system is the s-plane is at ___________.
given by G(s) = ( )(
ngl t
)
which the root locus approaches the zeros
of the system, satisfies
(A) t n . /
(B) = t n . /
(C) = t n . /
(D) = t n . /
ECE
1. [Ans. D]
ro u t o p sor r wn rom op n loop pol s to t t po nt
pro u t o p sor r wn rom op n loop z ro to t t po nt
√ √ √
√
2. [Ans. B] 5. [Ans. B]
( )
√
( )
Angle of departure is
Where Σ z Σ z
3. [Ans. B]
From plot we can observe that one pole
terminates at one zero at position and
three poles terminates to . It means
there are four poles and 1 zero. Pole at There are 4 poles/zeros at
goes on both sides. It means there are two s = 1,
poles at There has to be one pole – zero pair at
both cannot be poles or zeros
4. [Ans. D] at the same time.
For larger values of K, it will encircle the So option A and D are crossed out
critical point ( ) which makes There are 2 asymptotes. So number of
closed-loop system unstable. poles is two more than number of zeros.
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 304
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ntro po nt w r t symptot s m t
Angles of asymptotes
( )
( )
( ) or
( )
EE
2. [Ans. C]
1. [Ans. B]
Characteristic equation
Characteristic function )(s ) (s )
s(s
(s )(s ) (s ) (s )
(s )
(s) (s) s(s )(s )
(s )(s )
Comparing with 1 + G(s) H(s) = 0
Open loop transfer function
G(s)H(s) = open-loop transfer function
(s) (s)
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 305
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(s )
( )
s(s )(s )
Number of zeros = Z = 1, zero at
Number of poles = P = 3
Poles at 0, &
Number of branches terminating at 2 ⁄ 0
infinity =
Angle of asymptotes
( )
So all these roots have nearly equal real
( ) parts on left half plane when
( ) 4. [Ans. C]
n
Σ pol s Σ z ros
ntr o
( )
X
Im g n ry
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 306
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
o
2. [Ans. B] s
With unity DC gain, poles at or
s n and no finite zeros s
(s )( s s) (s s )
l nt s s s s s s
(s )(s )(s )
s ( )s s
3. [Ans. C] ow s is not the breakaway point
( ) o s ( )s
T(s)= ( )( )( )
( ) For all the three root loci to meet at a
s s s ( ) single point, we need that this equation
s has equal roots.
s ( ) o( )
s ( )
( ) ( ) ( )
row has zero elements if 6k = 60 or ( )( )
k = 10 then 2 roots lie on the imaginary axis
given by s s √ . If k > 10, so or
the root at √ s t to o s pl n But b = 20 is not the required value of b
because it will cancel out an open-loop
4. [Ans. C] pole
( ) ( )
(s) o st r qu r v lu
( ) ( )
( ) ( ) ( )
=0
( )
6. [Ans. C]
s s ( )
S= K=
√ ( )
RL exists at 3.41 .( )( ) ( ) /
( )
( )
√
S= √
7. [Ans. D]
s
( ) (s)
s(s )(s )
(s ( ))(s ( ))
(s)
s(s )(s )
5. [Ans. B]
(s )
(s)
s (s )
For unity feedback, characteristic
equation is 1+ G(s) = 0
s s s
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 307
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
t nt ( )
[ t n ( )]
* [ t nt ( )]+
t n ( )
8. [Ans. ]
Int r s t on o symptot s
sum o pol s sum o z ros
num r o pol s num r o z ro
( ) ( )
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 308
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE - 2006
1. The open-loop transfer function of a G(s)
unity-gain feedback control system is
given by, G(s) = ( )(
. The gain
)
margin of the system in dB is given by
(A) 0 (C) 20
(B) 1 (D) 4. Which of the following statement is true?
(A) G(s) is an all-pass filter
2. Consider two transfer functions, (B) G(s) has a zero in the right-half plane
(s) and (s) . The (C) G(s) is the impedance of a passive
3-dB bandwidths of their frequency network
responses are, respectively (D) G(s) is marginally stable
(A) √ √
5. The gain and phase margins of G(s) for
(B) √ √
closed loop stability are
(C) √ √ (A) 6 dB and (C) 6 dB and
(D) √ √ (B) 3 dB and (D) 3 dB and
Re
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 309
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(C) (D)
(D)
EE - 2006
1/s 1/s 1/s 100
u y 1. Consider the following Nyquist plots of
loop transfer functions over = 0 to
= . Which of these plots represents a
7. The gain margin of the system under
stable closed loop system?
closed loop unity negative feedback is
(1) Im
(A) 0 dB (C) 26 dB
(B) 20 dB (D) 46 dB R
=
8. For the transfer function Re
( ) the corresponding Nyquist 1
plot for the positive frequency has the form
(A)
(2) Im
5 =
Re
(B)
(3) Im
j5
=
Re
(C) (4) Im
=
⁄ Re
1
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 310
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE - 2007 (A) Im
2. If x = Re G(j ), and y = Im G(j ) then for
, the Nyquist plot for 3/4
G(s) = 1 / s(s+1) (s+2) becomes
asymptotic to the line Re
(A) x = 0 (C) x = y
(B) x = (D) d = y / √
EE - 2009
3. The polar plot of an open loop stable 𝛚=0
system is shown below. The closed loop 𝛚=0 Im
system is (B)
Imaginary
Real
Re
3/4
EE - 2010
Re
5. The frequency response of
(s) ,s(s )(s )- plotted in the
complex ( ) plane (for ) is
𝛚=0
1/6
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 311
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE - 2011 IN - 2009
6. A two-loop position control system is 4. A unity feedback control loop with an
shown below. open transfer function of the form
( )
Motor
(s) (s) has a gain crossover frequency of 1 rad/s
s(s ) and a phase margin of . If an element
√
having a transfer function is inserted
s √
Tacho-generator into the loop, the phase margin will
The gain k of the Tacho-generator become
influences mainly the (A) (C)
(A) peak overshoot (B) (D)
(B) natural frequency of oscillation
(C) phase shift of the closed loop IN - 2011
transfer function at very low Common Data for Questions 5 and 6
frequencies ( ) The open-loop transfer function of a unity
(D) phase shift of the closed loop negative feedback control system is given
transfer function at very high by G(s) = ( )
frequencies ( ) 5. The value of K for the phase margin of the
system to be 45° is
IN - 2008 (A) 250√ (C) 125√
1. For the closed loop system shown below
(B) 250√ (D) 125√
to be stable, the value of time delay TD (in
seconds) should be less than
6. v lu o or t mp ng r t o to
be 0.5, corresponding to the dominant
(s) (s)
closed-loop complex conjugate pole pair
is
(A) 250 (C) 75
(A) ⁄ (C) ⁄
(B) 125 (D) 50
(B) ⁄ (D)
IN - 2012
Statement for Linked Answer Questions 2
7. The open loop transfer function of a unity
&3
negative feedback control system is given
Consider a unity feedback system with
by
open loop transfer function
G(s) = . The gain margin of the
G(s) = ( )(
( )( )
)
system is
2. The phase crossover frequency of the
(A) 10.8 dB (C) 34.1dB
system in radians per second is
(B) 22.3dB (D) 45.6dB
(A) 0.125 (C) 0.5
(B) 0.25 (D) 1
IN - 2014
8. The loop transfer function of a feedback
3. The gain margin of the system is
control system is given by
(A) 0.125 (C) 0.5
(B) 0.25 (D) 1 (s) (s)
s(s )( s )
Its phase crossover frequency (in rad/s),
approximated to two decimal places, is __.
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 312
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE 6. [Ans. D]
1. [Ans. D] 𝐹or option (D).
( )
(s) ( )
(s )(s )
or g n m rg n s not tr ns r un t on o (s)
t n ( ) t n . /
7. [Ans. C]
t n ( ⁄ ) (s) (s)
s(s )
=0 t n ( )
For phase cross-over frequency,
o (s) [ ]
( ) ( )
M ( ) ( )
root locus will cut the = 0 axis only
M n log
when k
So gain margin = 0 1 8. [Ans. A]
( )
2. [Ans. C] =5
BW depends only on denominator and is So ( ) is a straight line parallel to
equal to √( ) axis.
3. [Ans. D] EE
At ( ) ( ) 1. [Ans. A]
Assuming no.of open loop poles in the
GM = 20 log | |
( ) ( ) RHS of s – plane = P = 0
Complete nyquist plots
4. [Ans. B] Im
5. [Ans. C]
At ( ) ( ) GM = 20
log | |
At ( ) ( )
PM =
No.of encirclements = N = 0
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 313
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
symptot to x = s
3. [Ans. D]
2 clockwise encirclement of 1 + j0
= 0; N = 2 =2
5. [Ans. A]
( )
( ) (
(( ) ) ) (( ) ( ))
As G( )
s ( ) -0 +
Option (A) satisfies above
Two clockwise encirclement of – 1
Hence N = 2
Z=2
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 314
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
6. [Ans. A] 2. [Ans. C]
( )
( ) t n ( )
T(s) =
( )
( )
( ) t n ( ) t n ( )
( )
r s ξ
r s
M is dependent on K (A) is correct
is independent of K (B) is not
correct 3. [Ans. A]
( )
T(J ) = ( ) ( )
( )
( ) t n . /
t low r qu n s ( )≈
t g r qu n s ( )≈ 4. [Ans. A]
( ) n ( ) r p rt lly orr t M o (s)
( t n . /) √
IN
( √ )
1. [Ans. C] (s) =
( √ ) ( )
s
(s) y(s) PM of (s) = ( )
5. [Ans. B]
PM = 45°= 180° t n . /
t n . / rad/sec
(s) y(s) ( ) |( |
)
√
G(s) =
6. [Ans. A]
For system to be stable G(s) should lie in
the left of ( 1, 0) r t r st qu t on
(s )
For finding the critical/ marginal value s s s ( )
apply phase condition The dominant poles are given by
w w s s ( )
or (s) s s ( )
s
(s) | |
s
w w
So w or
√ √
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 315
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
G.M in dB = log 0 1
t n ( )
As t n
So =1
r s
r s
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 316
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
function is
( )
1. The value of 'a' so that the system has a
phase-margin equal to is approximately
equal to
(A) 2.40 (C) 0.84
(B) 1.40 (D) 0.74
(A) (C)
2. With the value of 'a' set for a phase-
(B) (D)
margin of the value of unit-impulse
response of the open-loop system at
ECE - 2014
second is equal to
5. The phase margin in degrees of
(A) 3.40 (C) 1.84
(B) 2.40 (D) 1.74 ( ) calculated using
( )( )( )
the asymptotic Bode plot is ________.
ECE - 2007
3. The asymptotic bode plot of a transfer 6. In a Bode magnitude plot, which one of
function is as shown in the figure. The the following slopes would be exhibited at
transfer function G(s) corresponds to this high frequencies by a 4th order all-pole
Bode plot is system
|G( )|(dB) (A) (C)
(B) (D)
60
20 dB/decade 7. The Bode asymptotic magnitude plot of a
minimum phase system is shown in the
40
figure.
40 dB/decade
20
2
0 0 ( )
0.1 1 10 100 ( )
60 dB/decade
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 317
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE - 2006 EE - 2008
1. The Bode magnitude plot of 2. The asymptotic Bode magnitude plot of a
H (j ) = (
( )
is minimum phase transfer function is
)( )
shown in the figure.
(A) ( )
( ) 40 dB/ decade
40 (dB)
20
20
20 dB/ decade
0.1 (r s)
0 +1 +3 Log ( ) (log scale)
+2 20
0 0 dB/ decade
20
0 +1 +2 +3 Log ( ) r s
0.1 2 5 25
( ) ( )
(A) ( )(
(C) ( )(
) )
( ) ( )
(B) ( )(
(D) ( )(
) )
( )
(D)
40 EE - 2014
4. The Bode magnitude plot of the transfer
20
( )( )
function (s) is shown
. /( ). /
0
+1 +2 +3 Log ( ) below:
Note that -6 dB/octave = -20 dB/decade.
The value of is_______
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 318
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
IN - 2008
2. The Bode asymptotic plot of a transfer
t v
function is given below. In the frequency
(r ⁄s ) range shown, the transfer function has
dB
5. For the transfer function
(s ) + 20dB / decade
( )
s(s )(s s ) 20dB / decade
IN - 2010
3. The asymptotic Bode magnitude plot of a
log
lead network with its pole and zero on the
left half of the s-plane is shown in the
The maximum phase angle and the adjoining figure. The frequency at which
corresponding gain respectively, are the phase angle of the network is
(A) 30° and 1.73dB maximum (in rad/s) is
(B) 30° and 4.77dB
(C) + 30° and 4.77dB
(D) + 30° and 1.73dB
IN - 2006
r s
1. A unity feedback system has the following
(log scale)
open loop frequency response:
(r s ) ( ) ( ) (A) (C)
√
2 7.5
(B) (D)
3 4.8 √
4 3.15
5 2.25 IN - 2013
6 1.7 4. The Bode plot of a transfer function G(s)
8 1 is shown in the figure below.
10 0.64
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 319
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
40 (A) (C)
32
(B) (D)
20
5. The discrete – time transfer function
0 is
1 10 (A) Non – minimum phase and unstable.
-8 100
(r s) (B) Minimum phase and unstable.
(C) Minimum phase and stable.
(D) Non – minimum phase and stable.
ECE 4. [Ans. A]
1. [Ans. C] . / ( )
G(s) =
| ( )| . / ( )
M ( )
w r ( ) t n ( ) 5. [Ans. *] Range 42 to 48
( )
M
t n ( )
√
√
= 0.84
2. [Ans. C]
( )
(s) g(t) u(t) t u(t)
( )
At t = 1, g(t) ( )( )( )
From the plot frequency at which gain is 0
3. [Ans. D] dB is r s
( )
(s)
s(s )( ) M
o plot s ( ) orm
6. [Ans. A]
r t’s typ syst m so
In a transfer function if all are poles if we
log | plot the BODE diagram, then an each and
every corner frequency we have to
| introduce a line of slope
K = 100 and hence on the 4th frequency the slope
of line will become – 80 dB/sec and will
continue upto infinity
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 320
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
5. [Ans. A]
(s )
(s)
s(s )(s s )
( s )
log
s( )( s) . /
log log
( )
log log
log log n m x mum r qu n y r s
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 321
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
6. [Ans. C] . /
(s)
( ) . /
has 2 poles and 1 zero
s
s 3. [Ans. B]
t n t n This condition is only for phase lead N/W
=√
√
( ) 4. [Ans. B]
( ) ( ) 32 dB
1 10
√
t n √ t n
√ to
Is 1 dec are change & change is (G) is
√ . /
√ √ 40dB
g n √
√ lop s
. /
√ r r pol s s or g n
g n log √ So, G(s)=
= 32 dB
IN
1. [Ans. D] (given) log . /|
M log
r =
log ( )
s M
= 3.88 dB
5. [Ans. D]
z
2. [Ans. C] (z)
Compare with Bode magnitude plot of z
For minimum phase system, all poles and
standard transfer function.
zeros must lie inside the unit circle. For
. / stable system, all poles must be inside the
( )
unit circle. For the system, zero is at 2
. /
pole is at 0.5. This system is stable but
non – minimum phase.
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 322
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE - 2006
Z
1. The transfer function of a phase-lead
compensator is given by (s) -
+
where . The maximum phase-shift
provided by such a compensator is
(A) ⁄ (C) ⁄ Group I
(B) ⁄ (D) ⁄
ECE - 2007
2. A control system with PD controller is
shown in the figure. If the velocity error
constant Kv =1000 and the damping ratio
ξ t n t v lu s o p and KD are
+ s y
Group II
r Σ s(s )
1. PID controller
2. Lead compensator
3. Lag compensator
(A) Kp=100, KD=0.09 (A) Q – 1, R – 2 (C) Q – 2, R – 3
(B) Kp=100, KD=0.9 (B) Q – 1, R – 3 (D) Q – 3, R – 2
(C) Kp=10, KD=0.09
(D) Kp=10, KD=0.9 ECE - 2009
5. The magnitude plot of a rational transfer
3. The open-loop transfer function of a plant function G(s) with real coefficients is
shown below. Which of the following
is given as 0 (s) 1. If the plant is
compensators has such a magnitude plot?
operated in a unity feedback ( )
configuration, Then the lead compensator 20dB
that can stabilize this control system is
( ) ( )
(A) (C)
log
( ) ( )
(B) (D)
(A) Lead compensator
ECE - 2008 (B) Lag compensator
4. Group 1 gives two possible choices for the (C) PID compensator
impedance Z in the diagram. The circuit (D) Lead – lag Compensator
elements in Z satisfy the condition
ECE - 2010
R2C2 >R1C1. The transfer function
6. A unity negative feedback closed loop
represents a kind of controller. Match the system has a plant with the transfer
impedances in Group I with the types of function G(s) = and a controller
controllers in Group II.
(s) in the feed forward path. For a unit
step input, the transfer function of the
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 323
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
controller that gives minimum steady (D) A lag-lead compensator that provides
state error is an attenuation of 20 dB and phase
(A) (s) lead of 450 at the frequency of 3
rad/s
(B) (s)
( )( )
(C) (s) EE - 2008
( )( )
2. The transfer function of two
(D) (s) s
compensators are given below
(s ) s
ECE - 2012 (s ) (s )
Statement Linked answer Questions 7 and Which one of the following statements is
8 correct?
The transfer function of a compensator is (A) C1 is a lead compensator and C2 is a
given as lag compensator
(s) . (B) C1 is a lag compensator and C2 is a
lead compensator
7. Gc(s)is a lead compensator if (C) Both C1 and C2 are lead
(A) compensators
(B) (D) Both C1 and C2 are lag compensators
(C)
(D) IN - 2006
1. The transfer function of a position servo
8. The phase of the above lead compensator 1
is maximum at system is given as G (s) = . A first
s(s 1)
(A) √ r s (C) √ r s
order compensator is designed in a unity
(B) √ r s (D) √ r s
feedback configuration so that the poles
of the compensated system are placed at
EE - 2007
– 1 j1 and 4. The transfer function of
1. The system 900/s(s+1)(s+9) is to be
the compensated system is
compensated such that its gain-crossover ( )
(A) (C)
frequency becomes same as its ( )
( )
uncompensated phase-crossover frequ- (B) (D)
ency and provides a 450 phase margin. To
achieve this, one may use Common Data Questions 2, 3, 4
(A) A lag compensator that provides an The following figure describes the block
attenuation of 20 dB and a phase lag diagram of a closed loop process control
of 450 at the frequency of √ rad/s system. The unit of time is given in
(B) A lead compensator that provides an minute
amplification of 20dB and a phase ontroll r l nt stur n (s)
lead of 450 at the frequency of 3 m(s)
r(s) (s)
rad/s ( )
s
(s)
(C) A lag-lead compensator that provides
an amplification of 20 dB and a phase
lag of 450 at the frequency of √
rad/s.
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 324
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 325
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE 4. [Ans. B]
1. [Ans. D]
M xp s s t (s)
t n t n s
From maximum phase shift s
s
t
( ) (t )
, ( ) - ( )
s
( ) (s) (s )(s )
(s) s
( )
The above equation is a PID controller
or
√ s
t n (√ ) t n
√ s
( ) ( )
2. [Ans. B] ( ) ( )
( ) The above equation is a lag compensator.
(s)
(s s ) ( )
m (s) (s)
( ) 5. [Ans. D]
m
(s ) ( ) plot shows presence of 2 poles &
2 zeroes in Bode equivalent plot
comparing Eq.(1) with standard 2nd
order equation 6. [Ans. D]
m
√
s
ξ m
S.E(s)= s for (D)
s ( ( ) ( ))
3. [Ans. A] 7. [Ans. A]
(s) t n t n
s (s )(s )
for phase lead should be positive
The lead compensator C(s) should first
stabilize the plant i.e. remove term t n t n
( )
(s )
(s) (s) Option (A) & (C) satisfies, it may be
(s )(s ) (s )
Only option (A) is satisfies. observed have be observed that option (C)
will have poles and zero in RHS of s – plane,
thus not possible (not a practical system)
it can be concluded that option (A) is right
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 326
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
⁄ t n t n is always negative
sl n s l g omp ns tor
IN
1. [Ans. C]
√ r s Let the T.F of the compensator be (s)
o t omp ns t syst m
( )
EE (s) (s) ( )
1. [Ans. D] ( )
(s) (s)
( )
|
s(s )(s ) (s)
s(s ) (s)
r s ol s o t omp ns t syst m r g v n s s
√ √ s
(s )
| ( ) ( )| | | t (s)
s(s )(s ) (s )
r t r st qu t on
s(s )(s ) (s )
,(s ) -(s )
s ( )s ( )s
. / (s s )(s )
s s s
. /
( )
M log
| ( ) ( )|
(s )
M log ( ) (s)
(s )
Negative GM implies that the system is
unstable. should become gain 2. [Ans. A]
cross over frequency, r s , v n
the magnitude should be 0dB. m(s) (s) { ( )}
o m t m gn tu ‘ ’ t s
r s a lag compensator which { (s) (s)}
s
gives an attenuation of 20dB(before
compensation the magnitude is 20dB)
m( ) * ( ) ∑ ( )+
and to obtain 45 phase margin at
r s a lead compensator with I(s)
a phase lead of 45 is used. s pl tr ns orm o (t) t
s
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 327
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
3. [Ans. B] s ( ) 0
The given diagram can be reduced as For stable system all elements of first
(s) (s) column should be greater than zero. By
(s)
substituting all the given options in
o nt o ’ w ll g v n g t v v lu
except option D.
s
( ) ( )
6. [Ans. C]
r ns r un t on (s) ( ) ( ) Open loop transfer function of a dc motor
as
( )
( )
( ) R(s) (s) (s)
( ) ( )
(s) (s)
( )
d(t)= sin 0.2t
or g tt ng mult ply ng tor
| | Topic: P controller with unity feed back
Formula: For first order system loop
| | ( )
√ ( ) transfer function is comparing
( )
( )
with . Now for
o mpl tu o output (t) ( )
n t l mpl tu closed loop overall transfer function is
given by
( ) . /
4. [Ans. B] ( ) . /
o
(s)
(s)
((s )( s ) )( s ) ( y omp r ng rom ormul )
In Question given that time constant of
closed loop system is times of
( )
( ) (( )( ) )( ) so
Characteristics equation is
s s ( )s . /
( )
For stability, according to R-H array
s 6 (6+3k2)
s 11 ( ) approximate value
s ( ) 0
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 328
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
7. [Ans. D]
y(s) (s) ( (s) y(s)) [ ]
s
y(s)
(s) (s) [ ]
s
(s) [ ]
s
(s) [ ]
Zero means at
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 329
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 330
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(A) (C)
ECE - 2013
(B) (D) Statement for Linked Answer Questions 10
and 11:
ECE - 2011 The state diagram of a system is shown
8. The block diagram of a system with one below. A system is described by the state
input and two outputs 𝑦 and 𝑦 is given – variable equations
below. ̇ u y u
1 1 1 1 1
u y
u y
s
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 331
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
u s s s EE - 2006
x x x 1. For a system with the transfer function
y
( )
H(s) = , the matrix A in the
state space form ẋ = Ax + Bu is equal to
The corresponding system is
(A) always controllable (A) [ ]
(B) always observable
(C) always stable
(B) [ ]
(D) always unstable
(B) ( )
(D) ( )
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 332
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(A) [ ] u
t
y
(B) 0 1
the matrices P, Q and R as follows:
(C) 0 1 0 1
(D) 0 1 0 1
, -
EE - 2010 The system has the following controllability
6. The system ̇ with and observability properties:
0 1 0 1 is (A) Controllable and observable
(B) Not controllable but observable
(A) stable and controllable
(C) Controllable but not observable
(B) stable but uncontrollable
(D) Not controllable and not observable
(C) unstable but controllable
(D) unstable and uncontrollable
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 333
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 334
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE 6. [Ans. B]
1. [Ans. A]
∅(t) = L *( I ) + ẋ
(s) ẋ s s (s)
( I ) 0 1
( I ) 0 1 x x
( )
ẋ
os t s nt
(t) = 0 1 ẋ x u… … ( )
s nt os t
ẋ x x … … ( )
2. [Ans. A] y (x ẋ )
s (s) (s) I (s) (x x x )
y x … … ( )
u From equation 1, 2, 3 the state variable
t
(s) (s) I (s) u(s) representation of the system is
(s )(s ) (s) (s) ẋ 0 1x 0 1u
u(s) 𝑦 , -
( )
( ) ( )
7. [Ans. C]
3. [Ans. A] ,sI -
∅ ∅ s
Let A = [ ] , -0 10 1
∅ ∅ s
s s
∅ ∅ ∅ ∅
& , -[ ]
∅ ∅ ∅ ∅ (s )
∅(t) 0 1 s s
s
(( I ) ) s s
(s )(s ) s & Method II
find eigen vector It can also be solved by applying the
M son’s g n ormul
4. [Ans. D]
From above, , I - 0 1 8. [Ans. B]
(s)
0 1 u(s) s
(s) x (s)
5. [Ans. C] x (s) u(s) s
p p x (s) y (s)
, - 0q q1
u(s) s x (s)
p q un ontroll l p, q Similarly
x (s) y (s)
u(s) s u(s)
so sx (s) x (s) u(s)
y (s) x (s)
sx (s) x (s) u(s)
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 335
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
y (s) x (s)
ẋ (t) x (t) u(t) y (t) x (t) y
u
ẋ (t) x (t) u(t) y (t) x (t)
ẋ x
[ ] 0 1 0x 1 0 1 u(t)
ẋ From the graph we can find that
x x u ,u x - ( ) ẋ
rom qu st on y ,y y - , - 0 1 ẋ x u… ( )
n
ẋ ( ),x ẋ -
9. [Ans. D]
ẋ x ẋ
x x
From eq. (i) put value of ẋ
*x + = [ ] [x ] + [ ]u
ẋ x ( x u)
x x ẋ x x u…… ( )
x s m l rly y ẋ ( )
y=, - [x ] y x x u … ( )
x ẋ x ( x ) ( u)
[ ]
ẋ x ( x ) u
A=[ ]& B = [ ] In matrix form
ẋ x
[ ] 0 1 0x 1 0 1 u
ẋ
So, AB = [ ][ ] = [ ] x
ẋ 0 1 0x 1 0 1 u
And
=* + x
y , - 0x 1 u
So, the controllability matrix, h y , -x u
⌈ ⌉ =[ ] 11. [Ans. A]
s
10. [Ans. A] sI (s )
For state variable form, we have to find
[(s ) s ]
number of integral (1/s) in the graph
Take inverse Laplace transform both side
Assign output of these integral with state
variable & input of these integral with s
derivative of state variable. ,sI -
1. Then find out the relation between [(s ) s ]
these derivative in terms of state
0 1
variable and input t
2. Similarly we can write the relation
between output and these variable
and input using state flow graph
3. Lets assume & as state variable
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 336
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
12. [Ans. B]
…
[ ] [ ] 2 3
, -
[ 2 3]
Controllable matrix
0 1
, - [ ]
x (t) x ( )
Rank is less than 3, so uncontrollable x (t) x ( )
Observability matrix
o , ( ) - 15. [Ans. B]
Applying linearity property
[ ]
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
n so o s rv l o
o x(t) 0 1 [ ]
13. [Ans. A]
From the state diagram, the state [ ]
equations are
̇
[ ̇ ][ ][ ] [ ] 16. [Ans. D]
̇ (t) ,( I ) -
, I - s
0 1
𝑦 , -[ ] s
s
0 1
The state controllable matrix is s s
, ̇ ̇ -
(t) [s s ]
* +
s
t
The rank of S is 3 0 1
So the system is always controllable
EE
14. [Ans. C] 1. [Ans. B]
ẋ x x ( ) (s) (s )
[ ] 0 1 0x 1 (s)
ẋ ⏟ x ( ) (s) s s s
( ) ( )
(t) (s ). /
( ) ( )
t t (s)
(I t … ) t
(s) s s s
2 3 s x (s) s x (s) sx (s) x (s)
t u(s)
0 1 0 1t 0 1
2 Replacing s by
t x x x
0 1 … x u(t) … ( )
3 t t t
x
t ẋ x
t
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 337
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
x s
ẋ x 0
1
t , s
- 0 1
Replacing eq.(i) (s )(s )
ẋ x x x u(t) (s )
, -0 1
s
ẋ x x x u(t)
(s )(s )
ẋ x s s
ẋ x (s )(s ) s s
ẋ x x x u(t)
ẋ x
5. [Ans. B]
[ẋ ] [ ] [x ] [ ] u(t)
ẋ x 0 1
s
o [ ] ( I ) 0 1
s
s (s )(s )
2. [Ans. D] ( I )
s [ s ]
(s) , - (0 1 )0 1
s ( )
3. [Ans. A] [s s s ]
m m ( ) s
s ( ( )) s ( )
0 1
4. [Ans. C]
Selecting x (t) and x (t) as state variables 6. [Ans. C]
x (t) , AB] | ≠ controllable
ẋ (t) x (t) x (t) u(t)
t (s) ( I ) & (t) ( (s )) has
x (t)
ẋ (t) x (t) u(t) exponential with positive power
t
ẋ (t) x (t) Unstable
[ ] 0 1[ ] 0 1 u(t)
ẋ (t) x (t)
ẋ 7. [Ans. A]
M , -
o 0 1 0 1
0 1
y(t) x (t)
x (t) t(M ) ≠ ontroll l
y(t) , -[ ]
x (t) M , - 0 1
y
t(M ) ot o s rv l
o , -&
, I - s
0 1 0 1 8. [Ans. A]
s
s Y(t) , - *, I - (s)+
0 1
s s
( I ) 0 1
s s
0 1
, I - s
(s )(s )
, I - [s ]
r ns r un t on
, I - s
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 338
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
s(s ) s
[, I - (s)]
[s(s )] [(s ) s ]
x (t) * I + 0 1
[ ] ,, I - (s)- t
x (t)
[ ] 12. [Ans. A]
y(s)
r ns r un t on (s)
x (t) (s)
Y(t) , -[ ]
x (t) ( I )
lm (s) l ms ( )
s s(s s )
10. [Ans. C] IN
v n 0 1 0 1 1. [Ans. C]
(s)
or ontroll l (sI )
(s)
, - 0 1
u(t) (t) → (s)
≠ ontroll l (s) (sI )
For observability:
y(t) s → (sI )
, - 0 1
ot o s rv l 2. [Ans. A]
(s) ( I )
11. [Ans. C] ( I ) [ ]
( )
0 1
( I ) 0 1
State transition matrix I ( )
s
I 0 1 (s) ., -0 1 0 1/
s ( )
s
0 1 -0 (s)
s ., 1/
I ( )
(s )
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 339
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
3. [Ans. B]
The poles of the s/y are obtained from the
s/y matrix, f
det (SI – F )= 0
0 1
S(S + 2) + 4 = 0
4. [Ans. A]
T(s) = ( I )
, - 0 10 1
( )
( )
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 340
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Input
Output
~ i
(B)
(A) 6V
Input
(B) 6V Output
(C)
12V
(C) 12V
Input
Output
6V
(D)
(D)
6V Input
Output
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 341
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE - 2008
4. In the following limiter circuit, an input 6. The bias current through the diodes is
voltage = 10sin100 t is applied. (A) 1 mA (C) 1.5 mA
Assume that the diode drop is 0.7V when (B) 1.28 mA (D) 2 mA
it is forward biased. The Zener
breakdown voltage is 6.8V.The maximum 7. The ac output voltage is
and minimum values of the output (A)
voltage respectively are (B)
(C)
1k
(D)
D1
D2
8. A Zener diode, when used in voltage
6.8 V
Z
stabilization circuits, is biased in
(A) reverse bias region below the
(A) 6.1V, 0.7 V (C) 7.5 V, 0.7 V breakdown voltage
(B) 0.7 V, 7.5 V (D) 7.5 V, 7.5 V (B) reverse breakdown region
(C) forward bias region
ECE - 2009 (D) forward bias constant current mode
5. In the circuit below, the diode is ideal. The
voltage V is given by ECE - 2012
9. The diodes and capacitors in the circuit
shown are ideal. The voltage v(t) across
the diode is
ECE - 2011
Statements for Linked Answer Questions 6 (A) –1 (C) 1 –
and 7 (B) i (D) 1 – i
In the circuit shown below, assume that
the voltage drop across a forward biased
diode is 0.7V. The thermal voltage
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 342
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE/EE/IN - 2013
11. In the circuit shown below, the knee
current of the ideal Zener diode is 10 mA. (A) both and are ON
To maintain 5 V across RL, the minimum (B) is ON and is OFF
value of RL in and the minimum power (C) both and are OFF
rating of the Zener diode in mW, (D) is OFF and is ON
respectively , are
14. The diode in the circuit shown has
= 0.7 Volts but is ideal otherwise.
100
If = 5sin(𝜔𝑡)Volts, the minimum and
maximum values of (in Volts) are,
ILoad respectively,
10V
RL
VZ=5V
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 343
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
+ +
D1
D2
i
z ~ Vi
10V 5V
V0 RL =
(A)
16. Two silicon diodes, with a forward
voltage drop of 0.7 V, are used in the
circuit shown in the figure. The range of
10
input voltage for which the output
voltage is
10
(B)
(A) 5
(B)
(C)
(D) 5
EE - 2006 (C)
1. What are the states of the three ideal
diodes of the circuit shown in figure? 10
5 10
10V
5A
(D)
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 344
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE - 2007 (B)
3. The three – terminal linear voltage
regula r i e e a l a
resistor as shown in the figure. If Vin is
10 V, what is the power dissipated in the
transistor?
+10V
(C)
RL
Vin
6.6V
Zener diode
(D)
(A) 0.6 W (C) 4.2 W
(B) 2.4 W (D) 5.4 W
EE - 2008
4. The equivalent circuits of a diode, during
forward biased and reverse biased
conditions, are shown in the figure.
0.7
+ + V
5. In the voltage doubler circuit shown in
he igure he wi h ‘S’ i l e a
+
Assuming diodes D1 and D2 to be ideal,
load resistance to be infinite and initial
capacitor voltages to be zero, the steady
state voltage across capacitors C1 and C2
will be
~ 𝜔𝑡
S
~ i
EE - 2009
6. The following circuit shown has a source
voltage Vs as shown in the graph. The
current through the circuit is also shown
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 345
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
10V 15V
15
10
(A) 4V (C) 7.5V
5 (B) 5V (D) 12.12V
Vs (Volts)
0
EE - 2011
-5 8. A clipper circuit is shown below.
-10 1k
-15
0 100 200 300 400
Time (ms) D
1.5 ~
1.0 5V
Current (mA)
0.5
a
4.3
a
a
(B)
10
EE - 2010 4.3
7. Assuming that the diodes in the given
circuit are ideal, the voltage is 4.3 10
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 346
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
5.7
1.7V
0.7
0.7 5.7
(A) (C)
(B) (D)
(D)
10 IN - 2011
2. Assuming zener diode has current-
voltage characteristics as shown below on
the right and forward voltage drop of
diode is 0.7 V, the voltage in the
10
circuit shown below is
EE - 2014
9. The sinusoidal ac source in the figure has
an rms value of . Considering all
√
possible values of , the minimum value
of in to avoid burnout of the Zener I
diode is __________
2.7V V
0.7V
√ ~
(A) 3.7 V (C) 2.2 V
(B) 2.7 V (D) 0 V
IN - 2008
1. In the circuit shown below, the ideality
factor of the diode is unity and the
voltage drop across it is 0.7V. The
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 347
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE
1. [Ans. B]
When , zener diode is in forward When
bias so
When , zener diode is in reverse
bias, so when , zener diode
will be OFF and .
When , zener diode will be in
breakdown region and .
4. [Ans. C]
When , is forward bias and
2. [Ans. C]
are OFF, and
Option – C, Circuit makes Full –wave
When is +10V, are ON and zener
rectifier.
diode is in reverse bias so
V
3. [Ans. C]
For zener 5. [Ans. A]
and When , diode is ON and V =
When , diode is OFF and V = 1 V
So V = min (
6. [Ans. A]
7. [Ans. B]
r
When , current
~ r
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 348
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
10. [Ans. D]
8. [Ans. B]
Zener diode operated in reverse in i
breakdown region.
i
r
Since diode will be forward biased voltage
across diode will be 0.7 V
i
Stabilized
~ 5v
40 mA
10 V
la per ea e i ier 10 mA
he ex i e y he la pi g
section clamp the positive peak to 0 volts
When zener starts
and negative peak to 2 volts. So whole
will be held @ 5V.
cos ( i l wer y 1 volts
pu i
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 349
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
1k i
y
i
tz
1k
w X
When Z is relatively positive to y
Both D1& D2 are & l a When positive maximum
Gets shorted.
i
13. [Ans. D]
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 350
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
So current through
Current through 1k , mA
i
So mA
= 0.5893
Power dissipated in transistor
i i r hi
i 4. [Ans. A]
When diode is OFF, the equivalent circuit
is shown as follows:
i
i i r hi
i
EE
~
1. [Ans. A] i
Let is ON, OFF and OFF, then
equivalent circuit
5. [Ans. D]
In this case, 10A When , is ON and is OFF so
A charges upto 5V and .
So voltage across diode When , is ON and is OFF, so
charges by -10 V and
So is in reverse bias i.e. it is OFF. So in steady state,
Voltage across diode V it is and
also in Reverse bias so OFF.
Voltage across diode it is in 6. [Ans. A]
forward bias and ON. It is
2. [Ans. A]
When , and are OFF, so
When
, is ON and OFF so, mA, and diode conducts
, diode will be reverse bias
and I will become zero.
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 351
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
10. [Ans. B]
S
S
i This is less than reverse breakdown
voltage of diode . So our
assumption is correct
i
3. [Ans. 10]
Diode goes to forward biased due to
10 V and 8V across diode and current
i through diode is
i
4. [Ans. *] Range 40 to 43
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 352
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Nodal at
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 353
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE - 2006
9.
1. An n- channel depletion MOSFET has
following two points on its curve:
(i) d
(ii)
Which of the following Q-points will give
the highest trans-conductance gain for
small signals.
(A)
(B) The value of current is approximately
(C) (A) 0.5 mA (C) 9.3 mA
(D) (B) 2 mA (D) 15 mA
ECE - 2011
ECE - 2007
5. For a BJT, the common – base current
2. The DC current gain ( ) of a BJT is 50.
g i α .98 d he c ec r b e
Assuming that the emitter injection
junction reverse bias saturation current
efficiency is 0.995, the base transport
. . This BJT is connected in the
factor is
common emitter mode and operated in
(A) 0.980 (C) 0.990
(B) 0.985 (D) 0.995 the active region with a base drive
current . The collector current
3. For the BJT circuit shown, assume that for this mode of operation is
the of the transistor is very large and (A) 0.98 mA (C) 1.0 mA
= 0.7 V. The mode of operation of the (B) 0.99 mA (D) 1.01 mA
BJT is
10 kΩ 6. In the circuit shown below, for the MOS
transistor, and the
threshold voltage . The voltage
at the source of the upper transistor is
2V 6V
1 kΩ
5V W/L = 4
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 354
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE - 2013 10. For the MOSFETs shown in the figure, the
7. In the circuit shown below, the silicon threshold voltage | | = 2 V and
npn transistor Q has a very high value of ( ) . . The value of
. The required value of R2 in k to
(in mA) is ______.
produce IC = 1mA is
VCC
3V
R1
IC
60 k
R2
RE
500
(A) 20 (C) 40
(B) 30 (D) 50 11. For the MOSFET shown in the figure,
assume W/L = 2, = 2.0 V,
8. In a MOSFET operating in the saturation
100 / and = 0.5 V. The
region, the channel length modulation
transistor switches from saturation
effect causes
region to linear region when (in Volts)
(A) an increase in the gate – source
is__________
capacitance
(B) a decrease in the transconductance
(C) a decrease in the unity –gain cutoff
frequency
(D) a decrease in the output resistance
ECE - 2014
9. For the n-channel MOS transistor shown
in the figure, the threshold voltage is
0.8 V. Neglect channel length modulation
EE - 2006
effects. When the drain voltage =1.6 V,
1. Consider the circuit shown in figure. If
the drain current was found to be 0.5
the of the transistor is 30 and ICBO is 20
mA. If is adjusted to be 2 V by changing
nA and the input voltage is + 5 V, then
the values of R and , the new value of
transistor would be operating in
(in mA) is
+12V
. Ω
Ω
Q
+5V
(A) 0 mA (C) 4.3 mA
(B) 3.6 mA (D) 5.7 mA
.
EE - 2010
5. The transistor circuit shown uses a silicon
transistor with = 0.7V, and a
dc current gain of 100. The value of is
+10 V
(A) d
(B) e er e d 10 k 50 k
(C) e er e d
(D) d e er e
EE - 2007
3. The common emitter forward current
g i f he r i r h w i F = 100. 100
+10V
Ω
(A) 4.65V (C) 6.3V
(B) 5V (D) 7.23V
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 356
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
I IN - 2006
I
1. The biasing circuit of a silicon transistor
(C) (D) is shown below. If = 80, then what is VCE
for the transistor?
V V +12V
EE - 2011
7. The transistor used in the circuit shown
RB Ω RC Ω
be w h f d is negligible.
15k 2.2k
8
1k D
= 0.7V
.
(A) 6.08 V (C) 1.2 V
(B) 0.2 V (D) 6.08 V
IN - 2007
2. In the circuit shown below, . .
If the forward voltage drop of diode is
0.7V, then the current through collector
will be
(A) 168 mA (C) 20.54 mA
(B) 108 mA (D) 5.36 mA
EE - 2014
8. The transistor in the given circuit should .
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 357
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
10 V IN - 2014
6. In the figure, transistors T and T have
Ω
2V identical characteristics. of
transistor T is 0.1 V. The voltage is
Ω high enough to put T in saturation.
Voltage of transistors T T and T is 0.7
V. The value of ( ) in V is ___________.
9
T
The voltage is
(A) 0.2 V (C) 7.4 V
(B) 2 V (D) 10 V
IN - 2010
4. The matched transistors and shown T T
in the adjoining figure have =100.
Assuming the base-emitter voltages to be
0.7V, the collector-emitter voltage V2 of
the transistor is
IN - 2013
5. In the transistor circuit as shown below,
the value of resistance RE in k is
approximately,
+10V
IC=2.0 mA
1.5k
15k .
. Vout
6k VCE=5.0 V
RE
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 358
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE 5. [Ans. D]
1. [Ans. D] α
From the below graph it is clear that α
.98
a increase conductance i.e. slope of 9
.98
graph is increased.
. .
6. [Ans. C]
The transistor which has
12mA and
6
So that transistor in saturation region.
V
The transistor which has
Transfer characteristic of n-channel D- Drain is connected to gate
MOSFET. So that transistor in saturation
3. [Ans. B]
Given is large so d 7. [Ans. C]
Assuming BJT is in active
Applying KVL in Base. Emitter loop
.
.
. 9.8
w .9
.
So BJT is in saturation ~
4. [Ans. B]
Assuming . d
.
=1mA i ce is very large
.
So, eg igib e
So,
= 2.04 mA 2 mA ge dr cr e i er f re i r
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 359
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
. . .
.
w r gi e circ i
r . .
r . . b i i g i
.
. .
. .8
. .
8. [Ans. D]
EE
9. [Ans. C] 1. [Ans. B]
ere Let the device is in saturation and
i r i regi . V
.
Collector current = 5.3mA
.
. . .8 .
For saturation = 0.178 mA
.
. Base voltage .
. current through 100 re i ce
.8 .
.
. .
. = 0.127 mA
.
c rre hr gh re i ce
.
10. [Ans. *] Range 0.88 to 0.92
= 0.29 mA
Base current . 9 .
= 0.163 mA
So this is less than it means device
is not in saturation. It is in active region.
2. [Ans. C]
When . he will be in
reverse active mode .i.e. Reverse on and
will be ON.
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 360
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
8. [Ans. *] Range 22 to 23
9. To calculate max, take end condition
.
9 i .
.
. i
.9
i .
ci e
.
Ti i c i e regi .
.8
4. [Ans. B] .
.
IN
1. [Ans. B]
.
.
9
9
. and drop across diode = 0.7
. . So device is not active region.
.
Let the device is in saturation and
. V
i ery rge .
.9
As both transistors are perfectly matched .9
and . of both transistors. .
8
. mA .
6. [Ans. C]
When V will be + ve both transistor and
diode will be on making V across them
Zero and Current I will be flow and when
V is -ve both will be off offering infinite
resistance so current I will be Zero.
.
7. [Ans. D]
Transistor is in Saturation region
.
.
.
.
.
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 361
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Apply KVL . 8
. For matched transistor
.
. di is same for both the
transistors)
Now apply KVL in the outer port of
transistor
9 . 8
9. .8
Apply KVL to output terminals
5. [Ans. A]
9. . 10 V
.9 . .8 2m A
. Ω V=IR=1.5k × 2mA=3V
15k
3. [Ans. C] =10-3=7V
10V gi e
2V
6k
gi e
. be
. 6. [Ans. *] Range 5.5 to 5.8
gi e
9
Now again apply KVL to the collector
resistor of the right and transistor
T
.
.
. .
. T T
.
4. [Ans. B] .
rre hr gh re i ce
.
.
i Apply KVL on path 1
9 .
. .
=1.66mA
.
.
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 362
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
.
Tr i r ide ic
y h
. –
.
. .
.98 .
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 363
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 364
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(A) ( )= ( i )
(B) ( )= ( i )
(C) ( )= i
(D) ( )= i
ECE - 2010
8. The amplifier circuit shown below uses a
silicon transistor. The capacitors and (A) Ω (C) Ω
(B) Ω (D) Ω
can be assumed to be short at signal
frequency and the effect of output ECE - 2013
resistance can be ignored. If is 10. The small-signal resistance(i.e., dVB/dID)
disconnected from the circuit, which one in k offered by the n – channel MOSFET
of the following statements is TRUE? M shown in the figure below, at a bias
point of VB =2V is (device data for M:
device transconductance parameter
kn μnCox(W/L) 4 μ / , 2 threshold
voltage VTN=1V and neglect body effect
and channel length modulation effects)
VB
ID
~
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 365
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE - 2014
11. For the amplifier shown in the figure, the
BJT parameters are
and thermal voltage = 25 mV. The
voltage gain ( / ) of the amplifier is
_____ .
(A) g (C) g
(B) (D)
μF
μF
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 366
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(A) 1 (C) 20
(B) 10 (D) 100
IN - 2006
1. An amplifier circuit is shown below.
Assume that the transistor works in
active region. The low frequency small-
signal parameters for the transistor are
g = 20 mS, 0 = 50, =, =0. What
is the voltage gain, ( ) of the
amplifier?
+Vcc (A) 3.75 (C) 9
(B) 4.5 (D) 19
Ω
IN - 2009
Common Data Questions 4 and 5
Ω
Vi ~ The circuit shown in the figure uses three
identical transistors with = 0.7V and
Gi e : = = Ω
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 367
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Q3
R3
12V
= 6V
2. [Ans. B]
in increased by 10%, i.e.
By KVL,
4μ
i e ge
By KVL, in E – B loop,
e e e
3. [Ans. A]
6. [Ans. D]
4. [Ans. C] Voltage gain ( )( )
Both transistor carry same current and
u i e ge
both are in saturation
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 368
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
( ) e i
7. [Ans. B]
The e i e we f u u ge
is
h
h
( i ) For the calculation of gain we need to
calculate . so DC analysis is required
8. [Ans. A]
The moment is disconnected from the
circuit,
h ( h )
but with capacitor, h
which also reduces voltage gain
So, increases and decreases.
9. [Ans. C]
i = 1 + 0.1 cos ( )
Calculate = 3V
Solution:
whe e i he he ge
[ ] 44
e u e
4
10. [Ans. B]
μ
( )
L
μ
( )
L
i
μ ( )
L
( ) i
4
4
4 i ( )i
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 369
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
i
i μ
g e i
i i
i i
i e e
4 4
f he e e figu e
i i
( ) i i
( )i ( )
Now assuming that is very large, the
i ( ) ( )
collector current g flows through the
i
emitter terminal.
( ) i
g
g
4 4 4 4 g
g
So if g which is nearly
12. [Ans. *] Range 1.04 to 1.12
constant g
( )
( )
13. [Ans. B]
This is a common-collector configuration.
15. [Ans. *] Range 9.39 to 9.41
i i e ( )i eg i e can vary
u between 12V in the positive direction and
0V in the negative direction biased
around
So, positive excursion of output voltage =
`
4
Replacing the transistor with T –
Negative excursion of output voltage
equivalent model, we get
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 370
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
i i
i
i
~ 4
i
(i i ) i
i i
( )i i 4 ( )
i
( ( ) )
i
i i
2. [Ans. D]
i ( )i
g whe e
g
Small signal analysis of circuit
i g and Q point to be in
the middle of the load line
( ) i
~ g
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 371
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
~ Ω
Vi
w L he e e i e i ui
4. [Ans. A]
Emitter voltage of transistor,
g
L ① 10 V
i i (i g ) So
Where i i
i i i (i g i )
i (
) 5. [Ans. B]
i When output is taken between one
( )i collector and ground then
(i g )
g (i e i g e e g i )
i
i and if take the output between two
[ ] collectors then differential gain.
i
g
2. [Ans. C] collector resistance
For CB, current gain is close to unity while
g /
voltage gain is very high.
and here output is taken between one
3. [Ans. A]
collector and ground therefore gain
g
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 372
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE - 2010
Common Data for Questions 1 and 2 RD
Consider the common emitter amplifier 10 k C
shown below with the following circuit V0
parameters: Vi
M
g A/V, RL
, 10 k
and
(A) 8 (C) 50
(B) 32 (D) 200
ECE - 2014
ECE - 2013
3. The ac schematic of an NMOS common –
source stage is shown in the figure below, IN - 2011
where part of the biasing circuits has 1. The amplifier shown below has a voltage
been omitted for simplicity. For the n- gain of an input esistance of
channel MOSFET M, the transconductance and a lower 3-dB cut-off frequency of 20
gm =1mA/V, and body effect and channel Hz. Which one of the following statements
length modulation effect are to be is TRUE when the emitter resistance is
neglected. The lower cutoff frequency in doubled?
Hz of the circuit is approximately at
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 373
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
v ~
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 374
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
~ [ ]
IN
1. [Ans. A]
h
g The small signal model is
The resistance seen by the source
h
h
h
2. [Ans. B]
Lower cut-off frequency due to h
f
h h doubled Zi
increases
ou e ec eases
3. [Ans. A]
owe frequency decreases as
w increases
c
s inc eases
w ec eases
ec ease ec eases
f
f ≅8
p ifie
p ifie
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 375
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
2k𝛀
ECE - 2007 1nF
μH
2. In a transconductance amplifier, it is
desirable to have
(A) A large input resistance and a large
output resistance
(B) A large input resistance and a
2k𝛀
small output resistance 2.7V
(C) A small input resistance and a 2k𝛀
large output resistance ~
(D) A small input resistance and a
small output resistance
(A) Maximum (C) Unity
ECE - 2009 (B) Minimum (D) Zero
3. In the circuit shown below, the op-amp is
ECE - 2014
ideal the transistor has
5. In the ac equivalent circuit shown in the
figure, if is the input current and is
Decide whether the feedback in the
very large, the type of feedback is
circuit is positive or negative and
determine the voltage V at the output of
the op-amp
10V
V
+
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 376
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
10
(B)
10
5
~
(C)
(A) Voltage shunt feedback
(B) Current series feedback
(C) Current shunt feedback 5
(D) Voltage series feedback
10
7. The desirable characteristics of a
transconductance amplifier are (D)
(A) high input resistance and high output
resistance
(B) high input resistance and low output 10
resistance
(C) low input resistance and high output
resistance 5
(D) low input resistance and low output
resistance
EE - 2009
EE - 2006 2. The nature of feedback in the op-amp
1. A relaxation oscillator is made using circuit shown is
OPAMP as shown in figure. The supply +6V
2
voltages of the OPAMP are 12V. The K
voltage waveform at point P will be
R1
Vin ~ 6V
R2
C _ (A) Current - Current feedback
+
2kΩ (B) Voltage - Voltage feedback
(C) Current - Voltage feedback
P (D) Voltage - Current feedback
10kΩ
10kΩ
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 377
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE - 2014
3. In the Wien Bridge oscillator circuit
shown in figure, the bridge is balanced
when
μF
IN - 2007
1. A FET source follower is shown in the
( ) figure below:
√
+ 15 V
( )
μF
( )
√
( )
1
4. An oscillator circuit using ideal op-amp
and diodes is shown in the figure.
ECE/IN - 2013
2. In the feedback network shown below , if
the feedback factor k is increased , then
the
The time duration for +ve part of the Vin V1 A0 Vout
cycle is and for ve part is . The
value of will be _______________
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 378
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE 6. [Ans. B]
1. [Ans. D] Current Series
Ideal transconductance amplifier has O/P is taken at collector which is voltage
infinite input and output resistance. emitter node will be current and
resistor is grounded
2. [Ans. A] Series
3. [Ans. D] 7. [Ans. A]
EE
1. [Ans. A]
2 2 Output will be either at .
( Refer Diagram below) When output will be at diode
connected to resistance will be on
making voltage at point P equal to 6V.
When output is at diode connected
5v
to 2 resistance will be on making
voltage at point equal to .
V
+
+
- 2. [Ans. B]
-
+ It is voltage – voltage feedback.
+
3. [Ans. C]
Barkhausen criteria for oscillation (for
positive feedback)
5. [Ans. B]
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 379
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
( )( )
(
2
Real and imaginary part on LHS and RHS
are same so imaginary part = 0
( )
2
( 2 )
~ ( )
( ) ( )
( )
2 2
2
2
2
[ ]
For (- Ve) cycle capacitor discharges from
2 2
Apply KCL at node ( )
( )
( )
2
K ( 2 )
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 380
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
( 2 ) ( ) IN
1. [Ans. D]
2 Feedback in this circuit is drain voltage as
( )
negative.
2
2 2. [Ans. A]
( )
2 Given connection is voltage series F/B.
2
[ ] increases and decreases
2
y q
2
2
( )
[ 2 ]
( )
( )
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 381
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
1 kΩ
k 1 kΩ
k k
k
(A) =√
(B) =e
(C) = ln 2
k
(D) = ln 2
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 382
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
6. The transfer function (s)/ (s) is 10. Consider the Schmidt trigger circuit
(A) (C) shown below
(D) k
(B)
7. If sin t and
sin t , then the minimum k
and maximum values of (in radians)
k
are respectively
(A) –π/ and π/ (C) –π and
(B) and π/ (D) –π/ and A triangular wave which goes from 12V
to 12V is applied to the inverting input of
ECE - 2008 the OPAMP. Assume that the output of the
8. Consider the following circuit using an OPAMP swings from +15V to 15V.The
ideal OPAMP. The I-V characteristics of voltage at the non-inverting input
the diode is described by the relation switches between
I= (e ) where m (A) 12V and +12 V
and V is the voltage across the (B) 7.5V and 7.5V
diode (taken as positive for forward bias) (C) 5V and +5V
(D) 0V and 5V
D 4k
ECE - 2009
= 1 11. In the following astable multivibrator
circuit, which properties of t depend
100k on ?
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 383
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE - 2010
12. Assuming the OP AMP to be ideal, the
voltage gain of the amplifier shown below
is
(A) (C) ( )
(B) (D) ( )
ECE/EE/IN - 2013
15. In the circuit shown below what is the
output voltage (Vout) if a silicon transistor
Q and an ideal op – amp are used?
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 384
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
+15 V Q
1 k
k k
Vout
5V .7
15 V
+15 V
+15 V
1 k Vout
+1V -15 V
-15 V (A) (C)
(B) (D)
1 k 1 k
20. In the differential amplifier shown in the
(A) 4 (C) 8 figure, the magnitudes of the common-
(B) 6 (D) 10 mode and differential-mode gains are
and , respectively. If the resistance
ECE - 2014
is increased, then
17. In the low-pass filter shown in the figure,
for a cut-off frequency of 5 kHz , the value
of (in k ) is ________
k n
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 385
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(B)
(A) (C)
(B) (D)
(C)
12V
0.7V
(A) a bandpass filter
(B) a voltage controlled oscillator
(C) an amplitude modulator (D)
(D) a monostable multivibrator
EE -2006
1. For a given sinusoidal input voltage, the 0.7V
voltage waveform at point P of the
clamper circuit shown in figure will be 12V
EE -2007
2. The circuit shown in the figure is
~
oad
r
Vin
(A) A voltage source with voltage
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 386
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
k +10 V
8
10K
7
+
k 5.0V
IC 555 3
10K
S 0.01 10V
2, 6 k 5.0V
C 4 1
10V
EE -2008
5. The block diagrams of two types of half
wave rectifiers are shown in the figure.
The transfer characteristics of the
rectifiers are also shown within the block.
P Q
(C)
V0 V0
Vin 0 V0 Vin V0
Vin
0 Vin
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 387
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(A)
5V
2.5V
t(sec)
(B)
t(sec)
0
2.5V
5V
(C)
5V
0
t(sec)
5V
(D)
5V
0
t(sec)
5V
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 388
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
z
pamp
rms
The gain vs frequency characteristic of
output (Vo) will be k
(A)
Gain
(A) πm leading by 0
(B) πm leading by 0
(C) 1 π m leading by 900
0 (𝛚)
(D) πm lagging by 0
(B)
10. An ideal op-amp circuit and its input
Gain waveform are shown in the figures.
The output waveform of this circuit will
be
0 (𝛚)
(C)
Gain
6V
k
0 (𝛚)
+
(D) k
3V
k
Gain
0 (𝛚)
t t
EE -2009
9. The following circuit has k
C = 10 F . The input voltage is a sinusoid
at 50Hz with an rms value of 10V. Under
ideal conditions, the current is from the
source is
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 389
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(A)
t t
(B)
t
t t t
t
t t t
(C)
EE -2010
11. Given that the op-amp is ideal, the output
voltage is
(D)
EE -2011
12. For the circuit shown below,
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 390
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE/EE/IN -2012
14. The circuit shown is a
(| |)
utput 𝛚
ntput
(| |)
(A) (C) /
(B) (D)
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 391
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
𝛚
/ ( )
/
( )
or
/
/
𝛚
/
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 392
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
k
Vin
(A) 50%
(B) 5%
(C) 50%
(D) negligible amount R2
(A) v0 1 (v v 1 )
R1 2
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 393
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
8 4
I=5 mA 3
(A) 1.0 mV (C) 2.5mV
Output
6 (B) 2.0 mV (D) 3.0 mV
555
2 7
discharge IN - 2007
(C= 0.1 uF) 9. When light falls on the photodiode shown
1
in the following circuit, the reverse
saturation current of the photodiode
(A) 20 kHz (C) 40 kHz
changes from to .
(B) 30 kHz (D) 45 kHz
k
Statement for linked answer questions 6
and 7
In the Schmitt trigger circuit shown
below, the Zener diodes have VZ (reverse
saturation voltage) = 6V and VD (forward
voltage drop) = 0.7V Assuming the op – amp to be ideal, the
output voltage, of the circuit.
(A) does not change
(B) changes from 1 V to 2V
(C) changes from 2 V to 1 V
(D) changes from 1 V to 2V
.
10. Consider the linear circuit with and ideal
6. If the circuit has the input lower trip point
op-amp shown in the figure below.
(LTP)=0V, then the value of is given as
1 2
(A) 0.223 (C) 4.67
’ ’
(B) 2.67 (D) ∞
kΩ
-
7. The input upper trip point (UTP) of the Vi Vo
+
Schmitt trigger is
(A) 1.5 V (C) 2.42V
(B) 2.1 V (D) 7V The Z-parameters of the two port
feedback network are kΩ
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 394
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(A)
Vin
o/ i
4 dB
1 dB The circuit is a
(A) Low pass filter
20dB/decade
(B) Level shifter
f (C) Modulator
21. 9kHz (D) Precision rectifier
(B)
/ 13. Consider the triangular wave generator
0 dB shown below.
3 dB 40dB/decade
R kΩ
Input
1 kΩ
10 kΩ Output
f
21. 9kHz
(C)
o/ i
Assume that the op amps are ideal and
4 dB have ± 2 V power supply. If the input is a
1 dB
± 5 V, 50 Hz square wave of duty cycle
40 dB/decade 50%, the condition that results in a
triangular wave of peak to peak
amplitude 5 V and frequency 50 Hz at the
21. 9kHz f
output is
(A) RC = 1 (C)
(B)
(D) 5
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 395
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
0 +
t +
m + k
(C) cc k
VC cc m
cc
2/3 VCC
0
t
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 396
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Common Data Question for Q.No. 17, 18 & 21. A differential amplifier shown below has
19 a differential mode gain of 100 and a
Consider the op-amp circuit shown in the CMRR of 40dB. If . and
figure below: . , the output V0 is
k k
--
+ (A) 10V (C) 11V
(B) 10.5V (D) 15V
- 22. The op-amp circuit shown below is that of
- a
17. If . . and 7
and the op-amp is ideal , the value of the
is
(A) k (C) k
k
(B) k (D) k k k
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 397
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
24. For the op-amp circuit shown below is 27. The input resistance of the circuit shown
approximately equal to in the figure, assuming an ideal op-amp, is
2R
R 3R
k k
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 398
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 399
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
36. The value of of the series regulator (C) 6.7 V and 4.7 V
shown below is (D) 5.3 V and 3.3 V
40 V(DC)
kΩ
38. Assuming base-emitter voltage of 0.7V
and β of transistor , the output
voltage in the ideal opamp circuit
kΩ shown below is
5V
6 V(DC)
kΩ Ω
(A) 24 V (C) 30 V
(B) 28 V (D) 32 V 5V
1kΩ
is
~V
sin
470k
22k
0.25sin t
~ V0
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 400
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
R2
mA
10 k
X R1
10 k Z
Y
5V,
50Hz
~ V0 R3 V0
V1 R4
(A) 0.45 (C) 0.7
(B) 0.5 (D) 0.9
Fig. b
(A) 0 Hz (C) 2 kHz 42. Assuming its differential gain to be 10 and
(B) 50 Hz (D) 50kHz the op – amp to be otherwise ideal , the
CMRR is
Statement for Linked Answer Questions 42 (A) (C)
and 43 (B) (D)
A differential amplifier with signal
terminals X, Y, Z is connected as shown in 43. The differential amplifier is connected as
Fig. (a) below for CMRR measurement shown in Fig. (b) above to a single strain
where the differential amplifier has an gage bridge. Let the strain gage resistance
additional constant offset voltage in the vary around its no – load resistance R by
output. The observations obtained are : ± 1%. Assume the input impedance of the
when Vi= 2V, V0=3mV, and when Vi=3V, amplifier to be high compared to the
V0=4mV. equivalent source resistance of the
bridge, and the common mode
characteristic to be as obtained above.
The output voltage in mV varies
approximately from
(A) +128 to – 128 (C) +122 to – 122
(B) + 128 to – 122 (D) +99 to – 101
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 401
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
. 7
~
k k
(A) = 800 nA, =50 nA
(B) = 800 nA, =100nA
(C) = 400 nA, =50nA
(D) = 400 nA, 100nA 48. The figures show an oscillator circuit
having an ideal Schmitt trigger and its
45. The amplifier in the figure has gain of -10 input-output characteristics. The time
and input resistance of 50 k . The value period (in ms) of t is___________.
of and are
t
output
k
nput
(A) k k
(B) k k
(C) k k
(D) k k
. k
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 402
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE 4. [Ans. C]
1. [Ans. D] 2 kΩ
dv
k dt
( ) ( )
k
k
.
k k
k k
2. [Ans. D] ( ) ( ) .
k k
.
k k .
k
5. [Ans. D]
Applying KCL
k
exp ( )
k
Volt across 24 k due to virtual exp ( )
ground concept. So voltage across 12k k
is 3V ln i
k
ow ln
k
ln
k
watts ln
3. [Ans. B] 6. [Ans. A]
Unregulated voltage increases by 20%
i. e. New regulated voltage = 18V
watts
increases
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 403
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
10. [Ans. C]
( ) ( )
. k
( ) ( )
k
j k
j
j From KCL
j s
j
s
s k k k
s s
s s
..
7. [Ans. C] Threshold depends on output
s s So, when
s s
s
s When
s s
tan tan
tan 11. [Ans. A]
inimum value of π at ∞
maximum value of at 12. [Ans. C]
a
8. [Ans. B]
c
⁄
(e )
Where and b
Voltage across diode = 60 mV
Voltage across 4k resistor s k
k Op-amp is ideal, so it will satisfy the
m virtual ground property
Total voltage is m m a c
m . So, we can redraw the circuit as
9. [Ans. B]
At low frequency, capacitor is open and
inductor short so,
At high frequency capacitor is short and
inductor open so,
so it is low pass filter.
Circuit is similar to standard inverting
amplifier
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 404
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
[ ( )]
13. [Ans. B]
i
i i
i
Hence given circuit is a high pass filter
i
15. [Ans. B]
k
.7
Redraw the given circuit
Case (1)
5V
i
For non-zero value of , diode must be
off, so i
Then by virtual short
equivalent connection for transistor is
t
0
t
.7 0.7V
When , both diode are
conducting so =0V 16. [Ans. C]
ain of stage
14. [Ans. D] k k
( ) ( )
At k k
Hence circuit can be redrawn as below
1k k
-2V
m i m
i
1k Vout
i
+1V
-15 V
1k 1k
t ∞ ∞
Hence circuit can be redrawn as below Gain of stage II = * +
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 405
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
.
. k z if decreases CMRR increases
k k
a
.7
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 406
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE 5. [Ans. B]
1. [Ans. D] From the transfer characteristic of the
When is positive, will be –ve and rectifier P is
diode will be OFF, so V for
When is negative, will be ve and for
diode will be ON, so .7
2. [Ans. D]
Voltage at non inverting terminal,
From the transfer characteristics of the
rectifier Q is
Due to virtual ground for
current through Load, for
r
So this circuit acts as a current source
with current
3. [Ans. A]
An astable multi-vibrator is providing
pulses as given below.
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 407
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
magnitude i v
ere π
s s
Let, is only on non-inverting terminal π mA
and it will be lagging by 90°
( )
10. [Ans. D]
k
( )
( ) k
12. [Ans. D]
C First section is differential amplifier
having gain off 1.
. .
= .
So gain frequency characteristics will
be as option (D)
9. [Ans. D]
Voltage at inverting terminal
So Output is
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 408
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
( ) 15. [Ans. B]
x
y
y
Applying superposition theorem
When y = 0
x x
when x
y/
13. [Ans. D] y
Low Pass Filter High Pass Filter
y x
from equation and
16. [Ans. A]
k
i
20Hz 30Hz
Pass band
14. [Ans. B]
f
V= =0
= =
=- =
= s
High pass Fitter with f rad /sec
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 409
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
17. [Ans. D]
3. [Ans. C]
When Op-Amp is used in ve feedback
then voltage difference between the
-
- terminals is treated as zero.
4. [Ans. A]
When The equivalent circuit is as follows:
is on
is off
( ) ( ) . ------------- (1)
when and
is on
is off ⟹ * +
From equation (1)
⟹ * +
=( )
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 410
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
5. [Ans. B] 8. [Ans. D]
It is a sawtooth wave generator across DC output Voltage that is output offset
capacitor C. voltage,
( )
So maximum offset (dc voltage) at the
output will be,
t ( ) m
T T T
m m
d m
o
dt T T
d 9. [Ans. B]
dt
d k
dt .
a
T
f k z
T
The given circuit is
6. [Ans. C]
pply K at ‘a’
.7
=0
When
. When
I=
When reverse circuit of the photodiode
I . =0
.
changes from 100 to , the output
1.5 = voltage change from 1V to 2V
= 4.47
10. [Ans. D]
Given that the imp. Parameters are
7. [Ans. C] k k
6.7V k
k
I k
1.5V k
k
I=
. .
=
. Then the given op-amp circuit is
.
=I . = .
.
= .
= 2.45V
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 411
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
k k 12. [Ans. D]
R R
k
k .
a
Vin
b
pply K at ‘a’
pply K at ‘x’ t
Case-1
When ve half cycle then switch (s)
ain is closed and circuit will become
R R
11. [Ans. B]
p .
Vin
k k
p
k ( )
( )
7k
.
Case -2
When ve half cycle then switch s is
The given circuit is a second order low
open and circuit will become
pass filter therefore it has a
R R
dB/decade and it has 3 dB cut-off
frequency as
f .
π√
. k z Vin
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 412
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
No circuit flow through left side Op-Amp through resistor . But is shorted
due to open switch so out. So discharge time constant
= .So capacitor will
instantly discharge so correct output is in
So, the circuit as a rectifier (fullwave)
option (A)
13. [Ans. B]
15. [Ans. B]
O/P of first OPAMP
The UTP value selected in such a way that
t ∫ t dt, where k to recover a square wave of same
and O/P of second OPAMP frequency from the input signal
t t When The output is
∫ t dt When
K and
∫ t dt When
input is , 50Hz square wave. O/P We can recover a square wave of same
should be triangular wave of . frequency from the corrupted input signal
50Hz means 20msec, so in 10msec O/P when UTP and LTP value are
should charge from . to . ,
when . 16. [Ans. B]
k
t ∫ dt
k
-
+ +
m
+ k
k
- m
-
14. [Ans. C] Apply KCL at node
KΩ
RA reset .
discharge
KΩ RB out
. .
̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
tr gger .
.
threshold
. . .
ground .
.
.
Capacitor C charges toward through Now, Apply KCL at Node
and until in raises upto 2/3 .
This voltage is the threshold voltage of .
For an ideal op-amp
pin 6 which drives comparator 1 to
. .
trigger the flip-flop so that the output at
.
pin 3 goes low. In addition, the discharge
. .7 7
transistor is driven on. Causing the output
. m
at pin 7 to discharge the capacitor
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 413
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
17. [Ans. B] K K
k k . K . K
20. [Ans. A]
-- 21. [Ans. B]
+
. and
.
-
- d
Apply the KCL at the inverting node
[ ] . .
.
Put, 7 . and .
. . 22. [Ans. D]
7 [ ]
At low frequency, C is open and
. At high frequency C is short and
. 7 .
( )
k
so it is a high pass filter with max. gain of
18. [Ans. C] 2.
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 414
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
24. [Ans. B] .
Equivalent circuit Now first open the zener diode then
circuit will be
k
k k
k
k
k k
.
Similarly, by neglecting current through So zener will be on and circuit will be as
K compare to current through k
i
resistance,
i .
k
.7 k
m
.7
.7 .
o will lie between and .
. . Because zener will be on then current 1
5.2 V mA will be divided in two parts and
output will be – 10V < < 3.2V
25. [Ans. A] f output
s s then i . m
i . m
s [ ] oi i
hence this is not possible
So it is all - pass filter.
When .
Then i . m
26. [Ans. B]
. .
Zener diode is in reverse bias. The i . m
equivalent circuit is, here i i i
k
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 415
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
k
Input resistance
⃗ a
b
Voltage at inverting terminal, k
pply K at a
Gain =
7k
s 7 k
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 416
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
So input impedance seen from with Since, and are all matched
respect to ground is 7k transistors
Now put So, say
The input impedance from with Then m
respect to ground or . m
7 7 k lso
7k . m
35. [Ans. A]
7k The ideal op-amp based circuit is shown
7 k
in figure 1. with T-network at the input
and feedback paths,. Note the specific
relations between resistances and
Now voltage at point P is
capacitances used. It can be shown that
7 7
this circuit acts as a double integrator and
hence it is a low pass filter specifically
By virtual ground capacitor, voltage at
transfer function
point Q is
. .
7
k
Now apply KCL at point Q
k 7 k
.
.
igure
33. [Ans. B]
k
s
s
s s
or .
m . . sec
s
. s s
The frequency response is given by
j which shows the gain falls by
40 dB per decade
Clearly m
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 417
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
37. [Ans. D]
When input voltage (During ve k
cycle)
Forward biased
Reverse biased
.7
ow .
39. [Ans. A]
.
1kΩ f
π π .
Where . sin t
f . k z . sin t
.7 40. [Ans. A]
.7 or
.7 41. [Ans. C]
.7 For Op-Amp
. Analysis
.7
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 418
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
s . k z
T. 7
s
d . k z
k .
d d
Lower 3 dB dominant frequency is 0.5
ere kHz.
Total response
one pole
s and reject response
OP-Amp is low pass response; east attenuated
frequency k z
Low frequencies
z
k z
f
. k z k z
s s
T.
s s
* +
43. [Ans. B]
* +
5V
* +* j +
R R
* j +
High pass response
R
High frequencies
[ ]
. k z
For variation is
d
7 . varies from 12.48mV to 12.56mV
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 419
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
m , given
k .
from bridge i
For change . m .
=127.8 mV
For change 47. [Ans. *]Range 15 to 16
op amp . m m It is second-order low pass system. t’s
. m m high cut-off-frequency
. m f
O/P varies from 7. m to . m π√
ere f k
44. [Ans. D] c c . 7
In an OPAMP,
f
nput bias current π√ k . 7
n / n . z
π k . 7 .
input offset current
n n 48. [Ans. *] Range 8.0 to 8.5
45. [Ans. B] T ln [ ]
Given k and gain
For an inverting amplifier, Gain = / ln [ ]
-10 / k .
Then k Time period .
. m secs
46. [Ans. 0.6]
k k
i
. k
i c
d
virtual ground
K at ode
i
i i
k . k k k
ki
ki ki
oi
. k k
ki
i
. k
. ki ki
ki . ki
ki
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 420
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Power Amplifiers
EE - 2007 EE - 2009
1. The input signal Vin shown in the figure is 2. Transformer and emitter follower can
a 1 KHz square wave voltage that both be used for impedance matching
alternates between +7V and 7V with a at the output of an audio amplifier. The
50% duty cycle. Both transistors have the basic relationship between the input
same current gain, which is large. The power Pin and output power Pout in both
circuit delivers power to the load resistor the cases is
RL. What is the efficiency of this circuit for (A) Pin = Pout for both transformer and
the given input? Choose the closest emitter follower
answer. (B) Pin > Pout for both transformer and
emitter follower
(C) Pin < Pout for transformer and
Pin = Pout for emitter follower
(D) Pin = Pout for transformer and
Pin < Pout for emitter follower
EE
1. [Ans. C]
load voltage = ±6.3 V
So efficiency
2. [Ans. D]
For emitter follower
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 421
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE-2006 ECE-2014
1. A new Binary Coded Pentary (BCP) 5. The number of bytes required to
number system is proposed in which represent the decimal number 1856357
every digit of a base-5 number is in packed BCD (Binary Coded Decimal)
represented by its corresponding 3-bit form is __________.
binary code. For example, the base-5
number 24 will be represented by its BCP EE-2007
code 010100. In this numbering system, 1. The octal equivalent of the HEX number
the BCP code 100010011001 AB.CD is
corresponds to the following number in (A) 253.314 (C) 526.314
base-5 system (B) 253.632 (D) 526.632
(A) 423 (C) 2201
(B) 1324 (D) 4231 EE-2014
2. A cascade of three identical modulo-5
2. The number of product terms in the counters has an overall modulus of
minimized sum-of-product expression (A) 5 (C) 125
obtained through the following K-map is (B) 25 (D) 625
(where, “d” denotes don’t care states)
1 0 0 1 3. Which of the following is an invalid state
0 d 0 0 in an 8-4-2-1 Binary Coded Decimal
0 0 d 1 counter
1 0 0 1 (A) 1 0 0 0 (C) 0 0 1 1
(A) 2 (C) 4 (B) 1 0 0 1 (D) 1 1 0 0
(B) 3 (D) 5
IN-2006
ECE-2007 1. A number N is stored in a 4-bit 2’s
3. X = 01110 and Y = 11001 are two 5-bit complement representation as
binary numbers represented in two’s a3 a2 a1 a0
complement format. The sum of X and Y It is copied into a 6-bit register and after a
represented in two’s complement format few operations, the final bit pattern is
using 6 bits is, a a a a a 1
(A) 100111 (C) 000111 The value of this bit pattern in 2’s
(B) 001000 (D) 101001 complement representation is given in
terms of the original number is N as
ECE-2008 (A) 32 a3 + 2N + 1 (C) 2N – 1
4. The two numbers represented in signed (B) 32 a3 – 2N – 1 (D) 2N + 1
2’s complement form are P = 11101101
and Q = 11100110. If Q is subtracted IN-2008
from P, the value obtained in signed 2’s 2. The result of (45)10 – (45)16 expressed in
complement form is 6-bit 2’s complement representation is,
(A) 100000111 (C) 11111001 (A) 011000 (C) 101000
(B) 00000111 (D) 111111001 (B) 100111 (D) 101001
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 422
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
IN-2009 IN-2011
3. The binary representation of the decimal 4. The base of the number system for the
number 1.375 is, addition operation 24 + 14 = 41 to be
(A) 1.111 (C) 1.011 true is
(B) 1.010 (D) 1.001 (A) 8 (C) 6
(B) 7 (D) 5
2. [Ans. A]
EE
1 0 0 1 1. [Ans. B]
0 d 0 0 Hex number (AB.CD)
0 0 d 1 ⏞
1010 ⏞ 1011 ⏞ 1100 ⏞ 1101
1 0 0 1 For finding its octal number, we add one
zero in both extreme and group 3 bit
together
3. [Ans. C]
010
⏟ 101⏟ 011⏟ 110⏟ 011⏟ 010⏟
x = 01110
y = 11001 quivalent octal number 253 632
x y( ) = 100111
Carry discard it 2. [Ans. C]
00111 in 6 bits will be 000111 Overall modulus = 5 = 125
4. [Ans. B] 3. [Ans. D]
igned 2 s complement of BCD counter counts up to 1001
P = 11101101
o P = 00010011 IN
igned 2 scomplement of 1. [Ans. D]
= 11100110 Given number is a a a a in 2’s
P = P (2 s complement of )
complement form.
= 00010011
We know that in 2’s complement form if
11100110
we copy MSB at left of MSB any times the
11111001
number remains unchanged.
2 s complement of (P ) = 00000111
So a a a a = a a a a a a =
When we left shift a number by 1 bit then
5. [Ans. *] Range 3.9 to 4.1
it is multiplied by 2, a a a a a 0 = 2
A decimal digit is represented by 4 bit in
Now,
BCD format, so for a decimal number with
a a a a a 0 1=a a a a a 1=2 1
digits requires 4d bit and
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 423
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
2. [Ans. C]
(45) (45) = ( 24) = (101000)
3. [Ans. C]
0.375 × 2 = 0.750
0.750 × 2 = 1.5
1.5 × 2 = 1.0
Hence answer is 1.011
4. [Ans. B]
Let the base is x, Here
(24) (14) = (41)
(4 x 2 x) (4 x 1 x)
= (4 x 1 x )
4 + 2x + 4 + x = 4x + 1
x=7
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 424
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE-2007 ECE-2014
1. The Boolean expression 5. The Boolean expression ( )( ̅)
̅̅ ̅ ̅ ̅ ̅̅ ̅ ̅ can ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
( ̅) ̅ simplifies to
be minimized to (A) X (C) XY
(A) ̅̅ ̅ ̅ ̅ ̅ (B) Y (D) X+Y
(B) ̅̅ ̅ ̅ ̅̅
(C) ̅ 6. Consider the Boolean function, F(w, x, y,
(D) z) = wy + xy + ̅ xyz + ̅ ̅ y + xz + ̅ ̅ ̅.
Which one of the following is the
ECE-2009 complete set of essential prime
2. If X = 1 in the logic equation implicates?
[X+Z{ ( +X ) }] { + ( X + Y)} (A) ̅̅ (C) ̅ ̅̅
=1 then (B) (D) ̅̅
(A) Y = Z (C) Z = 1
(D) Z = 0 7. For an n-variable Boolean function, the
(B) Y =
maximum number of prime implicants is
(A) ( ) (C)
EC/EE/IN -2012
3. In the sum of products function
(B) (D) ( )
( ) ∑( ), the prime implicants
are EE-2010
(A) ̅ ̅ Statement for Linked Answer Questions1
(B) ̅ ̅ ̅̅ ̅ and 2
The following Karnaugh map represent a
(C) ̅ ̅ ̅ ̅
function .
(D) ̅ ̅ ̅ ̅̅ ̅
F
ECE-2013 YZ
4. In the circuit shown below, Q1 has X 00 01 11 10
negligible collector – to – emitter F
saturation voltage and the diode drops YZ
0 1 1 1 0
negligible voltage across it under forward
bias. If Vcc is +5 V, X and Y are digital X 00 01 11 10
signals with 0 V as logic 0 and as logic 1 0 0 1 0
1, then the Boolean expression for Z is 0 1 1 1 0
1. A minimized form of the function is
R1 (A) 1 0 (C)0 1 0
Z
(B) (D)
R2
X Q1
Diode 2. Which of the following circuits is a
realization of the above function ?
Y
(A) XY (C) X
(B) (D)
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 425
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(A) ( )
X
F
(A) Y
Z
X
(B) F
X Y
Z
F ( )
(B) Y
Z
X
(C) F
Y
X Z
(C) F
Y
Z 4. The SOP (sum of products) form of a
X
(D) Boolean function is (0,1,3,7,11), where
F
Y inputs are A,B,C,D (A is MSB, and D is
X Z LSB). The equivalent minimized
(D) F expression of the function is
Y (A) (̅ )( ̅ )( ̅ ̅)( ̅ )
X Z
(B) ( ̅ )( ̅ )( ̅ ̅ )( ̅ )
F (C) (̅ )( ̅ )( ̅ ̅ )( ̅ ̅ )
EE-2014Y (D) (̅ )( ̅)( ̅ ̅)( ̅ )
Z
3. Which of the following logic circuits is a
realization of the function F whose IN-2006
Karnaugh map is shown in figure 1. Min-term (Sum of Products) expression
for a Boolean function is given as follows.
f(A, B, C) = m (0, 1, 2, 3, 5, 6) where A is
the MSB and C is the LSB. The minimized
expression for the function is
(A) A + (B C) (C) (B C)
( ) (B) (A B) + C (D)
IN-2007
2. A logic circuit implements the Boolean
function F = ̅ . Y + X .̅ . ̅ . It is found that
the input combination X = Y = 1 can
never occur. Taking this into account, a
( )
simplified expression for F, is given by
(A) ̅ + ̅. ̅ (C) X + Y
(B) X + Z (D) Y + X. ̅
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 426
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
IN-2009
5. The minimal sum-of-products expression
for the logic function f represented by the
given Karnaugh map is
PQ
RS
00 01 11 10
00 0 1 0 0
0 1 1 1
01
11 1 1 1 0
10 0 0 1 0
(A) QS +
(B) +
(C) +
(D)
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 427
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE 4. [Ans. B]
1. [Ans. D] X Y Z Comments
K-map corresponding to given Boolean 0 0 0 Transistor off
expression diode ON
CD 0 1 1 Transistor off
AB 00 01 11 10
diode rev biases
00 1
1 0 0 Transistor ON
01 1
diode rev biases
11 1
1 1 0 Transistor ON
10 1 diode rev biased
So, ̅Y=Z
̅̅ ̅ ̅ ̅̅
OR 5. [Ans. A]
̅̅ ̅ ̅ ̅ ̅̅ ̅̅ ( )( ̅) (̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
̅) ̅
( ̅ ̅) ̅̅̅̅ ̅
[ ] ̅̅ ̅̅̅̅
̅
6. [Ans. D]
2. [Ans. D] yz
wx ̅̅
* ( ( ̅))+ [ ( )] 1 1
By putting X = 1 1 1 xz
* ( ( ))+ [ ̅( )] 1 1 1 1
y
[ ] 1 1 1 1
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 428
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE 2. [Ans. D]
1. [Ans. B] ̅ ̅̅
YZ Truth table:
00 01 11 10
X X Y Z F
0 1 1 1 0
0 0 0 0
1 0 0 1 0
0 0 1 0
F = ̅ ̅ + YZ 0 1 0 1
0 1 1 1
2. [Ans. D] 1 0 0 1
From the figure it is clear that, two NAND 1 0 1 0
gates generate the ̅ ̅ and now two 1 1 0 x
AND gates with inputs ̅ ̅ and inputs 1 1 1 x
Y and Z is used to generate two terms of
SOP form and now OR gate is used to sum K – map
them and generate the F. YZ
X 00 01 11 10
3. [Ans. C] 0 0 0 1 1
̅̅
1 1 0 x x
̅̅ [by consensus theorem]
4. [Ans. A]
̅ ̅ ̅ ̅
X
(̅ )( ̅ ̅)( ̅)( ̅)
F=Y+X
3. [Ans. D]
F = 1 if X > Y, so following will be K – map
of function F.
00 01 11 10
00 0 0 0 0
01 1 0 0 0
11 1 1 0 1
10
IN 1 1 0 1
1. [Ans. C] F= ̅ + ̅ ̅̅̅ + ̅̅̅
From K – map
BC 4. [Ans. A]
A 00 01 11 10
0 1 1 1 0
By K – map
1 0 1 0 1
f = ̅ + B ̅ + ̅C
=̅+B C
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 429
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
PQ RS
00 01 11 10
00 1 0 0 1
01 0 0 0 0
11 0 0 0 0
10 1 1 1 1
5. [Ans. A]
PQ
RS 00 01 11 10
Q
S 00 0 1 0
0
01 0 1 1 1
11 1 1 1 0
10 0 0 1 0
6. [Ans. A]
̅ ̅̅ ̅ ̅ ̅̅ ̅
̅ ̅( ̅ ) ̅̅ ( ̅)
̅̅ ̅ ̅
̅̅ [ ̅ ̅]
̅̅ [( ̅ )( ̅)]
̅̅ ( ̅)
̅̅ ̅
̅( ̅)
̅
(̅ )(̅ )
( ̅)( ̅)
Alternative method:
00 01 11 10
0 1 0 0 1
0 1 0 1 1
( ̅)( ̅)
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 430
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Logic Gates
ECE-2011
(A) P NOR Q (C) P OR Q
6. The output Y in the circuit below is
(B) P NAND Q (D) P AND Q
always “1” when
3. Which of the following Boolean P
ECE-2012
7. In the circuit shown
5 Volts
A
C
(A) ̅y y̅
B (B) ̅y̅ y̅̅
Y (C) ̅y̅ y
C (D) ̅y̅̅ y
(A) ̅̅ ̅ (C) (̅ ̅) ̅
(B) ( ) (D)
1024 A
E XOR
A0 A9 2 B
1024
E
A10
A11
1024
1 XOR Y
A12
A13 11
A14 input 10 E
01
A15
S1 S0 00
C
XOR
D
A. 0C00H 0FFFH, 1C00H 1FFFH,
(A) S is always either zero or odd
2C00H 2FFFH, 3C00H 3FFFH
(B) S is always either zero or even
B. 1800H 1FFFH, 2800H 2FFFH,
(C) S = 1 only if the sum of A, B, C and D
3800H 3FFFH, 4800H 4FFFH
is even
C. 0500H 08FFH, 1500H 18FFH,
(D) S = 1 only if the sum of A, B, C and D
3500H 38FFH, 5500H 58FFH
is odd
D. 0800H 0BFFH, 1800H 1BFFH,
2800H 2BFFH, 3800H 3BFFH EE-2009
2. The complete set of only those Logic
ECE-2014 Gates designated as Universal Gates is
9. The output F in the digital logic circuit (A) NOT, OR and AND Gates
shown in the figure is (B) XNOR, NOR and NAND Gate
(C) NOR and NAND Gates
(D) XOR, NOR and NAND Gates
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 432
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
5V
(A) 1 (C) X
(B) 0 (D) ̅
τ
T/2
IN-2006
1. All the logic gates in the circuit shown (B) Vav
below have finite propagation delay. The
circuit can be used as a clock generator, if 5V
Vav
Y τ
T/2
(C)
Vav Vav
X
(A) X = 0 (C) X = 0 or 1 5V
(B) X = 1 (D) X = Y
IN-2007 τ
T/2
2. Two square waves of equal period T, but (D)
with a time delay τ are applied to a digital Vav
circuit whose truth table is shown in the
following figure.
2.5V
X Y Output
0 0 1 τ
T/2
0 1 0
1 0 0 IN-2009
1 1 1 3. The diodes in the circuit shown are ideal.
X A voltage of 0V represents logic 0 and
+5V represents logic1.The function Z
1 realized by the circuit for inputs X and Y
is
+ 5V
t
T/2 T
Y
1 X Z
Y
τ τ T/2 t
The high and the low levels of the output (A) Z=X + Y (C) Z =̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
of the digital circuit are 5 V and 0 V, (B) Z=XY (D) Z=̅̅̅̅
respectively. Which one of the following
figures shows the correct variation of the
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 433
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
IN-2010 EC/EE/IN-2013
4. The logic gate circuit shown in the figure 5. A bulb in a staircase has two switches,
realizes the function one switch being at the ground floor and
A the other one at the first floor. The bulb
X can be turned ON and also can be turned
OFF by any one of the switch irrespective
Z of the state of the other switch. The logic
of switching of the bulb resembles
Y (A) An AND gate (C) A XOR gate
(B) An OR gate (D) A NAND gate
(A) XOR (C) Half adder
(B) XNOR (D) Full adder
ECE 5. [Ans. D]
1. [Ans. B] P = ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅ = ̅ ̅ = 4
A Q = ̅̅̅̅ = ̅ + ̅ = 2
B
AB + CD
R = A ⊕ B = A̅ + ̅B = 3
S = A B = AB + ̅ ̅ = 1
C
D
6. [Ans. B]
2. [Ans. D] The output Y expression in the ckt
When P = Q = 1, then OUT = 1 (Majority circuit)
P = Q = 0, then OUT = 0 So that two or more inputs are ‘1’, is
P = 0, Q = 1, then OUT = 0 always ‘1’.
P = 1, Q = 0, then OUT = 0
7. [Ans. A]
So, it is AND gate
In NMOS circuit
Since & are in parallel so those
3. [Ans. D]
represent ( ) & is in sense, so it
X= ;Y=P+Q represents ‘dot’ operation and the whole
Z = XY = . (P + Q) function should be inverted or it is
=( )( ) complementary logic.
⊕ So,
∴ ⊕ ⊕ ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
( ) ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅ ̅ ̅ ̅ ̅
4. [Ans. D] 8. [Ans. D]
For 3 input XNOR for output to be one, For RAM #1
two input must be one, and we know that
⏟0 0 0 0 ⏟1 0 0 0 ⏟ ⏟
0 0 ower add
2- input XOR & XNOR gate are 0 0 0
complementary & hence only 1(1’s) will ⏟
0000 ⏟ 1 0 1 1 ⏟ 1⏟1 ighest add
be generated & C=1 is required 0
i.e, When A = 0, B = 0 and C = 1, So range of add for RAM #1 0 00
then F = 1 0
which is present only in option D
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 434
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
9. [Ans. A] IN
( ⊕ )(( ⊕ ) ) 1. [Ans. B]
( ⊕ )(( ⊕ ) ( )̅) When X = 1, equivalent circuit is
( ⊕ )
(̅ ̅) Y
̅ ̅
This circuits act as clock generator.
10. [Ans. A]
2. [Ans. C]
C 0 1
A ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅ ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
When τ = 0 X and Y will be same and
B out-put will be equal to dc of 5V.
0
A ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅ When τ = , X and Y will be complement
B AB of each other and output will be equal to
y ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
̅̅̅̅̅̅̅ ( ) ̅̅̅̅ dc 0.
( ) (̅ ̅) When τ increases from 0 to , O/P will
̅ ̅
decrease from 5V to 0V linearly.
EE
3. [Ans. B]
1. [Ans. B]
When any of X or Y is zero, Z = 0. For
⊕ ⊕ ⊕ from the given
X = Y = 1, Z = 1
diagram. We know that sum of any
number of bits is XOR of all bits.
4. [Ans. A]
So S ⊕ ⊕ ⊕ ⊕
X y
S=Y⊕Y
S = either zero or even because LSB is
x Z
zero (always).
Y y y
2. [Ans. C] Z= y. y = y y =x⊕y
NOR and NAND are designated as
universal logic gates, because using any 5. [Ans. C]
one of them we can implement all the When both switches in on position, bulb
logic gates. is off
When both switches in off position, bulb
3. [Ans. A] is off
Y= .̅ ̅. ̅ ̅ 1 Bulb
X Y 0 0 0
1 0 1 0 1 1
0 1 1 1 0 1
1 1 0
It is a XOR gate
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 435
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
1 4kΩ 100kΩ
R (A) 4 V, 3 V, 2 V (C) 4 V, 4 V, 4 V
2
4kΩ
Q4
(B) 5 V, 5 V, 5 V (D) 5 V, 4 V, 3 V
D
Q2 4. The output (Y) of the circuit shown in the
Q1
Q3
figure is
1kΩ
-
ECE - 2009
2. The full forms of the abbreviations TTL (A) ̅ ̅ (C) ̅ ̅
and CMOS in reference of logic families (B) ̅ ̅ ̅ (D) ̅
are
(A) Triple Transistor Logic and Chip EE - 2010
Metal Oxide Semiconductor 1. The TTL circuit shown in the figure is fed
(B) Tristate Transistor Logic and Chip with the waveform X (also shown). All
Metal Oxide Semiconductor gates have equal propagation delay of
(C) Transistor Transistor Logic and 10ns. The output Y of the circuit is
Complementary Metal Oxide x
Semiconductor 100 ns
(D) Tristate Transistor Logic and
Complementary Metal Oxide Silicon
1
ECE - 2014
3. In the following circuit employing pass 0 t
transistor logic, all NMOS transistors are
identical with a threshold voltage of 1V.
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 436
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
X IN - 2007
Y
1. A CMOS implementation of a logic gate is
shown in the following figure:
5v
(A)
Y X
Y PMOS
1
0
t NMOS
(B)
Y
The Boolean logic function realized by the
circuit is.
1 (A) AND (C) NOR
(B) NAND (D) OR
0 t
(C) IN - 2014
Y
2. The figure is a logic circuit with inputs A
and B and output Y. = + 5 V. The
circuit is of type
1
t
0
(D)
Y
0 t
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 437
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE EE
1. [Ans. B] 1. [Ans. A]
reverse active, saturation X
Y
saturation, cut off
2. [Ans. C] A B
TTL – Transistor Transistor Logic
CMOS – Complementary Metal Oxide
1
Semiconductor X
0
3. [Ans. C] A
Suppose all NMOS at saturation
B
For
1 & Y=X B
4
For
IN
( 1)
1. [Ans. C]
(4 ) NOR Gate
4 (4 ) 2. [Ans. D]
4 Given circuit is of the standard 2 input
NAND gate.
1
(4 ) 4
4
4. [Ans. A]
The given circuit is CMOS implementation
If the NMOS is connected in series, then
the output expression is product of each
input with complement to the final
product.
̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
̅ ̅
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 438
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE - 2006 S
1 0 1 1 D Q A
1. The point P in the following figure is
MSB LSB
stuck-at-1. The output f will be CK FULL
A ADDER
f
0 0 1 1 D Q B
C0
B Shift Registers 0 Ci
P CK
0 Q D
0
C
CK
(A) ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅ (C) ̅
(B) ̅ (D) A
CLOCK
(A) S =0, C0= 0 (C) S = 1, C0= 0
2. Two D-flip-flops, as shown below, are to
be connected as a synchronous counter (B) S = 0, C0= 1 (D) S = 1, C0= 1
that goes through the following Q1Q0 ECE - 2007
sequence 4. For the circuit shown, the counter state
………… (Q1 Q0) follows the sequence
The inputs and respectively should
be connected as
̅̅̅̅ ̅̅̅̅
c c
(A) ̅̅̅̅ and
(A) ………
(B) ̅̅̅̅ and
(B) ………
(C) ̅̅̅̅ and ̅̅̅̅
(C) ………
(D) ̅̅̅̅ ̅̅̅̅and
(D) ………
3. For the circuit shown in figure below, two 5. The following binary values were applied
4-bit parallel-in serial-out shift registers to the X and Y inputs of the NAND latch
loaded with the data shown are used to shown in the figure in the sequence
feed the data to a full adder. Initially, all indicated below:
the flip-flops are in clear state. After X=0, Y=1; X=0, Y=0; X=1, Y=1
applying two clock pulses, the outputs of The corresponding stable P, Q outputs
the full adder should be will be
X P
Q
Y
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 439
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
P=0, Q=1
(C) P=1, Q=0; P=1, Q=1; P=1, Q=0 or 1
P=0, Q=1 CLK
(D) P=1, Q=0; P=1, Q=1; P=1, Q=1 0
T
6. In the following circuit, X is given by t
t
0 I0 0 I0
4-to-1 4-to-1
1 I1 1 I1
1 MUX MUX Which of the following waveforms
I2 1 I2 Y X
0 I3 Y 0 I3 correctly represents the output at ?
S1 S0 S1 S0
1
A B C
(A)
0
2T
t
(A) 1
(B) 0
(B)
4T
(C)
t
(D) (C) 1
ECE - 2008 0
7. For the circuit shown in the following 2T
t
figure, are inputs to the 4:1
(D) 1
multiplexer. R(MSB) and S are control
0
bits.
4T
t
z
9. For the circuit shown in the figure, D has a
transition from 0 to 1 after CLK changes
from 1 to 0. Assume gate delays to be
negligible
̅
Consider
P2 Q2 P 2 Q2
(i) Push Button pressed/not Pressed in a
(A) NAND : first (0, 1) then (0, 1) equivalent to logic 1/0 respectively.
NOR: first (1, 0) then (0, 0) (ii) A segment glowing / not glowing in the
(B) NAND : first (1, 0) then (1, 0) display is equivalent to logic 1/0
NOR: first (1, 0) then (1, 0) respectively.
(C) NAND : first (1, 0) then (1, 0)
NOR: first (1, 0) then (0, 0) 13. If segment a to g are considered as
(D) NAND : first (1, 0) then (1, 1) functions of and , then which are of
NOR: first (0, 1) then (0, 1) the following is correct?
(A) g ̅ d c e
12. What are the minimum number of (B) g d c e
(C) g ̅ e b c
2 to. 1 multiplexers required to
generate a (D) g e b c
2-input AND gate and a 2-input Ex-OR
gate? 14. What are the minimum numbers of NOT
(A) 1 and 2 (C) 1 and 1 gates and 2-input OR gates required to
(B) 1 and 3 (D) 2 and 2 design the logic of the driver for this
7-segment display?
(A) a d
(B) a d
(C) a d
(D) a d
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 441
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE - 2010
Data D Q Y
15. The Boolean function realized by the logic D Q
circuit shown is
Clock
(D) ∑ 5
ECE - 2014
̅ ̅ ̅
20. Five JK flip-flops are cascaded to form the
circuit shown in Figure. Clock pulses at a
frequency of 1 MHz are applied as shown.
c The frequency (in kHz) of the waveform
(A) … (C) … at Q3 is _____.
(B) … (D) …
ECE - 2011
17. Two D flip – flops are connected as a c c c c c
The connections to the inputs and 21. The digital logic shown in the figure
are satisfies the given state diagram when Q1
(A) is connected to input A of the XOR gate.
(B)
(C)
(D)
̅̅̅̅ ̅̅̅̅
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 442
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(C) ̅
(D) ̅ ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
(A) … (C) …
23. In the circuit shown, choose the correct (B) … (D) …
timing diagram of the output (y) from the
given waveforms a d . 25. The circuit shown in the figure is a
atch atch
E ̅ E ̅
̅
utput y
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 443
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(A) ̅ ̅ ̅̅
(B) ̅ ̅ ̅
(C) ̅̅ ̅ ̅
(D) ̅ ̅ ̅̅
(A) ̅ ̅
(B) ̅ ̅
(C) ̅ ̅
(D) ̅̅ ̅
28. If X and Y are inputs and the Difference
(D = X – Y) and the Borrow (B) are the
30. A 16-bit ripple carry adder is realized
outputs, which one of the following
using 16 identical full adders (FA) as
diagrams implements a half-subractor?
shown in the figure. The carry-
propagation delay of each FA is 12 ns and
the sum-propagation delay of each FA is
15 ns. The worst case delay (in ns) of this
16-bit adder will be __________
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 444
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE - 2011
3. A two-bit counter circuit is shown below.
J Q J Q
K ̅ K ̅
EE - 2006
1. A 4 1 MUX is used to implement a 3 –
CLK
input Boolean function as shown in figure.
The Boolean Function F(A,B,C) If the state of the counter at the
implemented is clock time t is “ ” the the state
of the counter at t (after three clock
A
cycles) will be
(A) 00 (C) 10
‘ ’ F (A, B, C) (B) 01 (D) 11
‘ ’
EE - 2013
4. The clock frequency applied to the digital
circuit show in the figure blow is 1 kHz. If
B C
(A) F (A,B,C) = (1,2,4,6) the initial state of the output Q of the flip
(B) F (A,B,C) = (1,2,6) – f p is ‘ ’ the the freque cy f the
(C) F (A,B,C) = (2,4,5,6) output wavefrom Q in kHz is
(D) F (A,B,C) = (1,5,6)
X Q
EE - 2008 T Q
2. A 3 line to 8 line decoder, with active low
outputs, is used to implement a CLK >
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 445
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
f ip f p
t
̅
f ip f p
f ip f p
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 446
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
IN - 2006 IN - 2007
1. Given that the initial state (Q1Q0) is 00, Statement for Linked Answer Questions 3 & 4
the counting sequence of the counter Consider the circuit shown in the following
shown in the following figure is, Q1Q0 = figure.
‘ ’
J0 Q J1 Q1
0
CLK ̅ ̅1
K0 K
0 1
(A) 00 11 01 10 00
(B) 00 01 11 10 00
(C) 00 11 10 01 00
(D) 00 10 01 11 00
3. The correct input-output relationship
2. A combinational circuit using a 8-to-1
between Y and ( , ) is
multiplexer is shown in the following
(A) Y= + (C) Y= ⨁
figure. The minimized expression for the
(B) Y= (D) Y= ⨁
output (Z) is
CLK
Identify the INCORRECT statement.
(A) (C)
(B) (D)
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 447
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
6. A MUX circuit shown in the figure below 9. The output F of the multiplexer circuit
implements a logic function . The shown below expressed in terms of the
correct expression for is inputs P, Q and R is
Z 1 R I0
MUX out F1
̅ I1
4 1 MUX Y F
̅ 0
̅ I2
S
R I3 S1 S0
X 1
MUX out
0 F0 P Q
̅
(A) F=P⨁Q⨁R
S
Y (B) F = PQ + QR + RP
(C) F = (P ⨁ Q) R
(A) (̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅)⨁ (C) ⨁ ⨁̅
(D) F = (P ⨁ Q) ̅
(B) (̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅) ⨁ (D) ⨁ +Z
Q0 Q1 Q2
J Q J Q J Q J Q Q3 (A) 5 ns (C) 20 ns
Clock
KCLR KCLR KCLR K CLR
(B) 10 ns (D) 50 ns
IN - 2009
11. The figure below shows a 3-bit ripple
counter, with as the MSB. The flip-
̅̅̅̅̅̅̅ ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅ flops are rising-edge triggered. The
counting direction is
Q1
J Q 1 J Q 1 Q Q2
Y 1 J
Clock
7. In the above figure, Y can be expressed as CLK CLK CLK
(A) (C) 1 K ̅ 1 K ̅ 1 K ̅
(B) (D) (A) always down
(B) always up
8. The above circuit is a (C) up or down depending on the initial
(A) Mod – 8 Counter state of only
(B) Mod 9 Counter (D) up or down depending on the initial
(C) Mod – 10 Counter states of and
(D) Mod – 11 Counter
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 448
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
12. In the figure shown, the initial state of Q is 15. Consider the given circuit
0. The output is observed after the
application of each clock pulse. The
output sequence at Q is
1 J Q
CLOCK CLK
In this circuit, the race around
K ̅ (A) Does not occur
(B) Occurs when CLK = 0
(C) Occurs when CLK = 1 and A =B =1
(D) Occurs when clk = 1 and A = B = 0
(A) 0 0 0 0 . . . (C) 1 1 1 1 . . .
(B) 1 0 1 0 . . . (D) 1 0 0 0 . . . 16. The state transition diagram for the logic
circuit shown is
IN - 2011
13. The circuit below shows as up/down
counter working with a decoder and a x
flip-flop. Preset and clear of the flip-flop ̅ x
are asynchronous active-low inputs e ect
̅ ̅ ̅ ̅ ̅ ̅ ̅ ̅
3 to 8 Decoder
C B A(L.SB)
̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
reset Count
D Q Down
Flip-Flop Up/down Counter
Clock
c ear ̅
̅̅̅̅̅̅̅ Count Up
Clock
ECE/EE/IN - 2012
14. The output Y of a 2-bit comparator is logic
1 whenever the 2-bit input A is greater
than the 2-bit input B.
The number of combinations for which
the output is logic 1, is
(A) 4 (C) 8
(B) 6 (D) 10
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 449
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
IN - 2013 IN - 2014
17. The digital circuit shown below uses two 18. Frequency of an analog periodic signal in
negative edge- triggered D flip- flops. the range of 5 kHz - 10 kHz is to be
Assuming initial condition of and measured with a resolution of 100Hz by
as zero, the ouput of this circuit is measuring its period with a counter.
Assuming negligible signal and transition
delays the minimum clock frequency and
D1 D0 minimum number of bits in the counter
needed, respectively, are:
D-Flip-flop D-Flip-flop (A) 1 MHz, 10-bits
̅̅̅̅ ̅̅̅̅ (B) 10 MHz, 10-bits
(C) 1 MHz, 8-bits
(D) 10MHz, 8-bits
Clock
(A) 00, 01, 10, 11, ……
clock
(B) 00, 01, 11, 10, ……
(C) 00, 11, 10, 01, ……
(D) 00, 01, 11, 11, ……
ECE S = 1, ,C=1
1. [Ans. D]
When P is stuck at 1, f = A 4. [Ans. B]
B
f The i/p to first F/F = ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
The i/p to second F/F =
C 0 0 0 0 (initially
( ) [( )] at rest)
1st 0 0 1 1
2. [Ans. A] clk
Present State Next State 2nd 1 1 0 0
3rd 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1 0 1 So sequence generated
0 1 1 1 1 1 00, 01, 10, 00
1 1 1 0 1 0
5. [Ans. C]
1 0 0 0 0 0
When X = 0, Y = 1 then P = 1 and Q = 0
So and X = 0, Y = 0 then P = 1 and Q = 1
X = 1, Y = 1 then P = 0 and Q = 1 or
3. [Ans. D] P = 1 and Q = 0
Before clock pulse S = C = 0
After first clock pulse A = B = 1 So 6. [Ans. A]
S = 0, C=1 Let the output of first MUX is Y
After second clock pulse A = B = 1 So Y = ̅B + A̅ = A ⨁ B
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 450
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 451
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
17. [Ans. D] ̅
Q(present) Q (next) y
0 0 1 1 1 1
1 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0 1 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 ̅
⨀
̅̅̅̅ ̅̅̅̅
̅
18. [Ans. A]
Given Y=1, this implies
Both the output of D- flip flop
should be 1 i.e, input at first flip flop is 1 So wave form is correct
and for output of 2nd flip flop to be 1,
24. [Ans. D]
inverted output of first flip should be 1 in
This is a figure of Johnson counter
previous clock, for which input must be 0
So
so data is changing from 0 to 1.
19. [Ans. D] 0 0
From the CKT 1 0
0 is connected to & 1 1
d ‘ ’ is c ected t and 0 1
0 0
1 0
20. [Ans. *] Range 62.4 to 62.6 So =
.5 z
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 452
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
3. [Ans. C]
Clock Input Output
̅
Initial 1 0
state
1 1 0 1 1 1
utput f first ̅ ̅ 2 0 1 1 0 0
et 3 1 0 0 1 0
utput f sec d ̅ ̅
4. [Ans. B]
27. [Ans. C] X Q
T Q
̅ ̅̅ ̅̅̅ ̅ ̅ ̅̅
̅ ̅ ̅̅ CLK >
28. [Ans. A]
̅ From above Fig.
̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
̅ . ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
̅ ]
[
29. [Ans. C] ecause ̅ a ways
̅̅ ̅̅ ̅ ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
̅ a ways
̅ ̅ ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
̅ . ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
̅
̅̅̅̅
. ̅
30. [Ans. *] Range 194.9 to 195.1
i put a ways
Worst case propagation delay
r ‘ ’ f ip flop if input is =1 then output
= carry propagation delay of 15FA stages
will be complemented at the time of
+ max(carry Pd & sum Pd of last FA
triggering.
stage) CLK
5 5
5 s
T
EE
1. [Ans. A] 2T
F (A, B, C)= f .5 f
̅̅ ̅̅ ̅ ̅ .5
̅̅ ̅̅ ̅ ̅ ̅ .5 z
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 453
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
5. [Ans. D] IN
1. [Ans. A]
x Clock
( )
1 1 0 0
gate 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 0 0 0 1
6. [Ans. A]
1 1 1 1 1 0
Gray code output
1 1 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 2. [Ans. C]
o/p 0 0 1
0 0 0 1 1
0 1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1 0
( )
1 1 1 1 1
1 0 1
1 0 1 ( )( )
When ̅
E utput
e ect i puts
utput 3. [Ans. B]
Y=
7. [Ans. A]
T-FF to JKFF is given by eq
4. [Ans. B]
̅
a d
This is implemented on options [A]
So initially it means
8. [Ans. C] so after one clock cycle
Let is initially high. Since is from will be 010.
will be high for time. The
waveform is shown below: 5. [Ans. D]
01 10, both = 1 so and
̅ both will toggle.
t
6. [Ans. B]
trigger
t
7. [Ans. A]
̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
Y = ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅ . ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
t
= +
=
t
8. [Ans. C]
Whenever Y=1, then clear input of all the
s receives ‘ ’ a d utputs f the
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 454
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
1 0 1
1 0 1
1
̅
13. [Ans. D]
Initially Q=0 and count up ( ̅ =1) is active next = . .
so it started counting up and when it = A.CLK + Q
reaches to 5 then decoder output at pin 5
next = A.CLK +
becomes 0 and preset will be active and it If CLK = 1 and A and B = 1
will set Q and it will make the counter
mode down and count becomes 4, then 3 then } No race around
then 2 then 1 then 0, as soon as it reaches If CLK = 1 and A = B = 0
0, decoder output at pin 0 is low and clear
is active and Q goes to 0 and ̅ = 1 so up is } No race around
active a d it c u ts ……
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 455
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
16. [Ans. D]
State table
A D
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
1 0 0 0
1 1 1 1
From State table
A=O
Q=O Q=1
A=O
A=1 A=1
17. [Ans. B]
State table
Present Next
state state
0 0 0 1 0 1
0 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 0 1 0
1 0 0 0 0 0
00, 01, 11, 10, 00
18. [Ans. C]
i c c freque cy
z z
5
i
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 456
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
AD /DA Convertor
= 6.2
Clock
(C)
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 457
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Johnson
Clock
Counter
EE-2006
1. A student has made a 3 – bit binary down
(A) counter and connected to the R – 2R
ladder type DAC [Gain = ( 1 KΩ/2R)] as
shown in figure to generate a staircase
waveform. The output achieved is
different as shown in figure. What could
be the possible cause of this error?
R R R 1kΩ
(B) 2R +12V
2R 2R 2R
Vo
Counter 12V
1kHz
clock
10kΩ
7
6
(C) 5
4
3
2
1
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ms
IN-2006
Common Data for Questions 1 and 2
ECE-2014 An R-2R ladder type DAC is shown below.
7. For a given sample-and-hold circuit, if the If a switch status is ‘0’ 0 is applied and if
value of the hold capacitor is increased, a switch status is ‘1’ 5 is applied to the
then corresponding terminal of the DAC.
(A) droop rate decreases and acquisition
time decreases
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 458
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
IN - 2010
+ 5. A 4-bit successive approximation type
5V
ADC has a full scale value of 15V. The
1. What is the output voltage (V0) for the sequence of the states, the SAR will
switch status S0=0,S1=1,S2=1? traverse, for the conversion of an input of
. 8.15V is
(A) V (C) V
(A) ( )
. tart tart
(B) V (D) V conversion conversion
1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
2. What is the step size of the DAC?
(A) 0.125 V (C) 0.625 V 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0
(B) 0.525 V (D) 0.75 V
1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0
IN-2007 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1
3. The circuit shown in the figure below
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
works as a 2-bit analog to digital
converter for 0 ≤ ≤3 . End End
3V conversion conversion
1.0kΩ Circuit 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0
0.5kΩ
0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
End End
The MSB of the output , expressed as a conversion conversion
Boolean function of the inputs , , , is
given by
IN-2014
(A) (C)
6. A thermopile is constructed using 10
(B) (D) +
junctions of Chromel-Constantan
(sensitivity 60μ /°C for each junction)
IN-2009
connected in series. The output is fed to
4. An 8- it ADC with 2’s complement
an amplifier having an infinite input
output, has a nominal input range of 2V
impedance and a gain of 10. The output
to +2V. It generates a digital code of 00H
from the amplifier is acquired using a
for an analog input in the range
– 7.8125mV to +7.8125mV. An input of
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 459
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
10-bit ADC, with reference voltage of 5 V. DAC output and input to be positive, the
The resolution of this system in units of maximum error in conversion of the
°C is _________ analog sample value is:
Input tart of conversion
Comparator
ample ( C)
7. An N-bit ADC has an analog reference l
Control
voltage V. Assuming zero mean and l logic
uniform distribution of the quantization Reset l Clock
error, the quantization noise power will
l l
be: R 2R p
adder counter
(A) (C) DAC
( ) ( )
l
(B) (D) l utpt uffer
( ) √ Ena le
End of
l
l l Conversion
8. The circuit in the figure represents a (E C)
counter-based unipolar ADC. When SOC is (A) directly proportional to
asserted the counter is reset and clock is (B) inversely proportional to
l
enabled so that the counter counts up and (C) independent of
the DAC output grows. When the DAC (D) directly proportional to clock
output exceeds the input sample value, frequency
the comparator switches from logic 0 to
logic 1, disabling the clock and enabling
the output buffer by asserting EOC.
Assuming all components to be ideal,
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 460
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 461
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
i.e 2V → 128
.
2R 2R 2R
1.5V → 128 = 96
It is 96 for 1.5 analog input, while is
5 5
given an 96 = 2 complement of +96
= 2’s complement of 01100000
2R
=10100000
5 = A0H
≡ 2R
2
5
5. [Ans. A]
By characteristics of SAR ADC.
R
15 6. [Ans. * ] Range 0.800 to 0.833
≡
2
R For 10 junctions the thermopile voltage
will be 600 μ = 0.6 m
When it measured through amplifier of
∴ = gain 10, its voltage will be 6 mV. So, the
2. [Ans. C] thermopile sensitivity after amplification
Step size = = = 0.625 is 0.006 V/° C
Which will be input to ADC of resolution
3. [Ans. B] = /2 1
Truth table of ADC is ADC resolution = 5/1023=0.00488
In terms of temperature, the resolution is
0 0 0 0 0 0.00488/0.006=0.814
0 0 1 0 1
0 1 1 1 0 7. [Ans. A]
1 1 1 1 1
⇒ = 8. [Ans. A]
Maximum error is equal to step size
4. [Ans. D] which is directly proportional to .
8 – it ADC o/p is in 2’s complement form aximum Error =
i.e it represents 127 128 2 1
i/p voltage Range = 2 to 2
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 462
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Semiconductor Memory
ECE-2014
1. If WL is the Word Line and BL is the Bit
Line, an SRAM cell is shown in ̅̅̅̅
̅̅̅̅
EE-2009
1. The increasing order of speed of data
access for the following devices is
i. Cache Memory
̅̅̅̅ ii. CDROM
iii. Dynamic RAM
iv. Processor Registers
v. Magnetic Tape
(A) (v), (ii), (iii), (iv), (i )
(B) (v), (ii), (iii), (i), (iv)
(C) (ii), (i), (iii), (iv), (v)
(D) (v), ( ii), (i) , (iii), (iv)
̅̅̅̅
IN-2011
1. An bit RAM is interfaced to an 8085
microprocessor. In a fully decoded Scheme
if the address of the last memory location
of this RAM is 4FFFH, the address of the
first memory location of the RAM will be,
(A) 1000 H (C) 3000 H
(B) 2000 H (D) 4000 H
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 463
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE
1. [Ans. B]
For an SRAM construction four MOSFETs
are required (2-PMOS and 2-NMOS) with
interchanged outputs connected to each
CMOS inverter. So option (B) is correct.
EE
1. [Ans. B]
Processor registers has highest speed.
Followed by cache memory then dynamic
ram (slower than static ram because of
refreshing required)
IN
1. [Ans. C]
Capacity of chip
= last memory address – First memory
address+1
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 464
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Microprocessors
ECE-2006 3. In the circuit shown, the device connected
1. An I/O peripheral device shown in to Y5 can have address in the range
Figure (b) below is to be interfaced to an
8085 microprocessor. To select the I/O
o de ice
device in the I/O address range D4 H - D7
hip e ec
H, its chip-select (̅̅̅) should be
o
connected to the output of the decoder
decode
shown in Figure (a) below.
0 ̅̅̅̅̅̅
A2 LSB 1
2 ̅̅̅̅̅̅
3 8
A3 3
Decoder 4 ̅
5
A4 MSB 6
7
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 465
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE-2008
̅̅̅̅̅
3. The contents (in Hexadecimal) of some of
the memory location in an 8085A based
system are given below
Address Contents
.. ..
(A) MVI A, F8H (C) OUT F8H 26FE 00
(B) IN F8H (D) LDA F8F8H 26FF 01
2700 02
6. n mic op oce o execu e “
2701 03
H” wi h a ing add e oca ion
2702 04
1FFEH (STA copies the contents of the
.. ..
accumulator to the 16-bit address
The contents of stack pointer (SP),
location). While the instruction is fetched
Program counter (PC) and (H, L) are
and executed, the sequence of values
2700H, 2100H and 0000H respectively,
written at the address pins is
when the following sequence of
(A) 1FH, 1FH, 20H, 12H
instruction are executed,
(B) 1FH, FEH, 1FH, FFH, 12H
2100 H: DAD SP
(C) 1FH, 1FH, 12H, 12H
2101 H: PCHL
(D) 1FH, 1FH, 12H, 20H, 12H
The contents of (SP) and (PC) at the end
of execution will be
EE-2006
(A) PC = 2102 H, SP = 2700 H
1. In an 8085 microprocessor based system,
(B) PC = 2700 H, SP = 2700 H
it is desired to increment the contents of
(C) PC = 2800 H, SP = 26 FE H
memory location whose address is
(D) PC = 2A02 H, SP= 2702 H
available in (D, E) register pair and store
the result in same location. The sequence
EE-2009
of instructions is
4. In an 8085 microprocessor, the contents
(A) XCH G (C) INXD
of the Accumulator, after the following
INRM XCH G
instructions are executed will become
(B) XCH G (D) INRM
XRA A
INXH XCH G
MVI B, F0H
SUB B
2. A software delay subroutine is written as
(A) 01 H (C) F0 H
given below:
(B) 0F H (D) 10 H
DELAY: MVI H, 255 D
MVI L, 255 D
EE-2010
LOOP: DCR L
5. hen a “ dd ” in uc ion i
JNZ LOOP
executed, the CPU carries out the
DCR H
following sequential operations
JNZ LOOP
internally:
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 466
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Note: EE-2014
(R) means content of register R 7. An output device is interfaced with 8-bit
((R)) means content of memory location microprocessor 8085A. The interfacing
pointed to by R circuit is shown in figure
PC means Program Counter
SP means Stack Pointer
(A) (SP) incremented ecode
(PC) Addr u pu o
((SP)) (PC)
(B) (PC) Addr
((SP)) (PC) ̅ u pu e ice
(SP) incremented ̅
̅̅̅̅̅
(C) (PC) Addr ̅
(SP) incremented The interfacing circuit makes use of 3
((SP)) (PC) Line to 8 Line decoder having 3 enable
(D) ((SP)) (PC) lines ̅ ̅ The address of the device
(SP) incremented is
(PC) Addr (A) (C)
(B) (D)
EE-2011
6. A portion of the main program to call a 8. In an 8085 microprocessor, the following
subroutine SUB in an 8085 environment program is executed
is given below. Address location - Instruction
: 2000H XRA A
: 2001H MVI B, 04H
LXI D, DISP 2003H MVI A, 03H
LP: CALL SUB 2005H RAR
: 2006H DCR B
: 2007H JNZ 2005
It is desired that control be returned to 200AH HLT
LP + DISP + 3 when the RET instruction At the end of program, register A contains
is executed in the subroutine. The set of (A) 60H (C) 06H
instructions that precede the RET (B) 30H (D) 03H
instruction in the subroutine are
(A) POP D (C) POP H 9. In 8085 microprocessor, the operation
DAD H DAD D performed by the instruction LHLD
PUSH D PUSH H is
(A) H
(B) POP H (D) XTHL
(B) H
DAD D INXD
(C) H
INX H INX D
(D) H
INX H INX D
INX H XTHL
IN-2006
PUSH H
1. An 8085 assembly language program is
given as follows. The execution time of
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 467
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
each instruction is given against the 4. A snapshot of the address, data and
instruction in terms of T-state. control buses of an 8085 microprocessor
Instruction T-states executing program is given below:
MVI B, 0AH 7T Address 2020H
LOOP: MVIC, 05H 7T Data 24H
DCR C 4T IO/ ̅ Logic high
DCR B 4T ̅̅̅̅ Logic high
JNZ LOOP 10T/7T ̅̅̅̅̅ Logic Low
The execution time of the program in The assembly language instruction being
terms of T-states is executed is
(A) 247 T (C) 254 T (A) IN 24H (C) OUT 24H
(B) 250 T (D) 257 T (B) IN 20H (D) OUT 20H
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 468
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
When this program halts, the accumulator (A) 3000H (C) AFFFH
contains (B) 4FFFH (D) C000H
(A) 00H (C) 70H
(B) 06H (D) 76H 11. The subroutine SBX given below is
executed by an 8085 processor. The value
8. Consider a system consisting of a in the accumulator immediately after the
microprocessor, memory, and peripheral execution of the subroutine will be:
devices connected by a common bus. SBX: MVI A, 99H
During DMA data transfer, the ADI 11H
microprocessor MOV C, A
(A) only reads from the bus RET
(B) only writes to the bus (A) 00H (C) 99H
(C) both reads from and writes to the (B) 11H (D) AAH
bus
(D) neither reads from nor writes to the IN-2014
bus 12. A microprocessor accepts external
interrupts (Ext INT) through a
IN-2010 Programmable Interrupt Controller as
9. In an 8085 processor, the main program shown in the figure.
calls the subroutine SUB1 given below.
When the program returns to the main dd e u x
program after executing SUB1, the value
x
in the accumulator is og ammab e
aa u n e up
Address Opcode Mnemonic con o e
2000 3E 00 SUB1: MVIA,00h x
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 469
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 470
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
4. [Ans. D] 8. [Ans. A]
XRA A ⇒ H XRA A → clear accumulator
MVI B, F0H ⇒ H MVI B, → B= H
SUB B ⇒ – B will go H
to accumulator H MVI A, → A= H
00 – F0 = 10 H
H RAR → Rotate accumulation
5. [Ans. D] to right A = 10000001
First of all content of PC is loaded into H DCR B → Decrement B, B=
stack. i.e. address of next instruction to be H INZ → ump o when
executed is loaded onto stack. i.e. SP is 2005 z
decremented then PC is loaded by 200 AH HLT
address given in call instruction. After 3 rotation
6. [Ans. C] H
Call take 3 address locations. RET always
returns to LP + 3 location, this stored in 9. [Ans. C]
SP. So to return to LP + DISP + 3 we have LHLD instruction loads the value at
to add DISP to SP. memory location specified by the
POP H immediate
DAD D Value in H and L pair register
PUSH H Value at will be stored in L register
Normal call operation shown. value of will be stored in H
register
CALL SUB IN
1. [Ans. C]
RET
2. [Ans. A]
7. [Ans. B] Since I/O device is memory mapped I/O
To enable decoder Memory related instructions will be
used for data transfer
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 471
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 472
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE - 2010
Common Data for Questions 2 & 3
6. Suppose that the modulating signal is
Consider the following Amplitude
() ( ) and the carrier
Modulated (AM) signal, where
signal is ( ) ( ). Which one
() ( )
of the following is a conventional AM
2. The average side-band power for the AM
signal without over modulation?
signal given above is
(A) ( ) () ( )
(A) 25 (C) 6.25
(B) ( ) , ( )- ( )
(B) 12.5 (D) 3.125
(C) () ( ) () ( )
3. The AM signal gets added to a noise with (D) () ( ) ( )
Power Spectral Density ( )given in the ( ) ( )
figure below. The ratio of average side-
band power to mean noise power would ECE - 2011
be 7. A message signal
()
()
modulates the carrier
() =1MHz to
N0/2
produce an AM signal. For demodulating
the generated AM signal using an
-fc-B fc fc+B fc-B fc fc+B f
envelope detector, the time constant RC
(A) (C) of the detector circuit should satisfy.
(A) 0.5 ms< RC < 1 ms
(B) (D) (B) μ
(C) μ
ECE - 2008 (D) RC >> 0.5 ms
4. Consider the amplitude modulated (AM)
signal . For ECE - 2014
demodulating the signal using envelope 8. Consider sinusoidal modulation in an AM
detector , the minimum value of should system. Assuming no overmodulation, the
be modulation index (𝜇) when the maximum
(A) 2 (C) 0.5 and minimum values of the envelope,
(B) 1 (D) 0 respectively, are 3 V and 1 V, is ________.
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 473
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
() ()
() ()
The bandwidth of the signal at the output
of the modulator (in Hz) is _____.
10. Let () ( ) ( ) be
sampled at 20 Hz and reconstructed using
an ideal low-pass filter with cut-off
frequency of 20 Hz.
The frequency/frequencies present in the
reconstructed signal is/are
(A) 5 Hz and 15 Hz only
(B) 10 Hz and 15 Hz only
(C) 5 Hz, 10 Hz and 15 Hz only
(D) 5 Hz only
IN - 2008
1. Consider the AM signal
s(t) = , ( )- ( ). It is given
that the bandwidth of the real, low – pass
message signal m(t) is 2 kHz. If
the bandwidth of the band-
pass signal s(t) will be
(A) 2.004 MHz (C) 4 kHz
(B) 2 MHz (D) 2 kHz
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 474
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE () , ( )- ( )
1. [Ans. A] ( ) () ( )
Diagonal clipping can be avoided if in option (B),
μ μ () ( ) () ( )
*( ) ( ) +
μ
( ) ( ) Therefore, it is convectional AM signal
without over-modulation.
3. [Ans. B]
7. [Ans. B]
μ
4. [Ans. A]
8. [Ans. *] Range 0.45 to 0.55
Modulated signal
() μ
, -
Condition for envelope detection of an AM
9. [Ans. *] Range 59.9 to 60.1
signal is
()
5. [Ans. C]
()
√
√
After HPF with cutoff
⁄
Power efficiency =
⁄
/2
6. [Ans. C]
Convectional AM signal is
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 475
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
10. [Ans. A]
()
After sampling
( )
11. [Ans. A]
| ( )|
| |
( )
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 476
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 477
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE
1. [Ans. B] ( ) *∫ () +
()
( ) *∫ +
( ) 8
Given
( ) ( )
8
2. [Ans. C] ⁄
Option C is for SSB with upper side band = ⁄ kilo symbols per second
used Minimum Bandwidth required for ISI
transmission ⁄ (symbol rate)
3. [Ans. B]
For phase modulator ⁄
() ()
Maximum phase deviation is 5. [Ans. *] Range 2.4 to 2.6
( ) , ( )- ()
................(1)
For frequency modulator
() ∫ () ( )
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 478
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
() , ( ) ( )- B = 10 × 3 kHz + 9
= 34.5 kHz
This is obtain the power spectral density
random process y(t), we shift the given
2 [Ans. A]
power spectral density process y(t)
so 5 kHz is not a valid one
3 [Ans. D]
T ‘ ’ for FSK NRZ coding
8 8 ( )
( )
8 8
After FSK modulation
The output power = Total area of shaded
regular
, )-
0 1
, -
IN
1 [Ans. B]
If these is ten signals then there will be
needed of 9 guard band
So, the required bandwidth of the channel
is
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 479
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Angle Modulation
ECE - 2011
4. The column-1 lists the attributes and the
column-2 lists the modulation system.
Match the attribute to the modulation
system that best meets it.
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 480
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
2. [Ans. C]
()
() ()
() ()
() () , ( )-
√ ( , )
( )-
Hence x(t) is both AM and FM
3. [Ans. B]
Signal x(t) is
Here,
Power = 8
4. [Ans. B]
In AM, the power of the carrier after
modulation is more than before
Modulation. But, in FM, it remains the
same.
AM-SSB-SC is more suitable for Voice
signal Transmission, since the signal
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 481
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Receivers
chip rate is 88 chips per second. 4. If the deflection threshold is 1, the BER
If the processing gain is desired to be AT will be
LEAST 100, the data rate (A) ⁄ (C) ⁄8
(A) must be less than or equal to (B) ⁄ (D) ⁄
88 bits per sec
(B) must be greater than 88 5. The optimum threshold to achieve
bits per sec minimum bit error rate (BER) is
(C) must be exactly equal to (A) ⁄ (C)
88 bits per sec (B) ⁄ (D) ⁄
(D) can take any value less than
88 bits per sec ECE - 2014
6. The phase response of a passband
ECE - 2012 waveform at the receiver is given by
3. A binary symmetric channel (BSC) has a () ( )
transition probability of 1/8. If the binary where is the centre frequency, and 𝛼
transmit symbol X is such that and 𝛽 are positive constants. The actual
P(X = 0) = 9/10, then the probability of signal propagation delay from the
error for an optimum receiver will be transmitter to receiver is
(A) 7/80 (C) 9/10 (A) (C)
(B) 63/80 (D) 1/10
(B) (D)
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 482
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE 4. [Ans. D]
1. [Ans. B]
Allocated Band width = 5 MHz
Frequency reuse factor = 1/5
Bandwidth allocated for 1 cell
88
8
88 bit/sec
3. [Ans. D]
5. [Ans. B]
T Optimum threshold = the point of
8
’
( ) ( ) ( ) | | | |
8
( ) ( ) . /
( )
8 8
6. [Ans. C]
8
Given phase response
8 () ( )
So, propagation delay,
( )
0 . / 1
[ ]
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 483
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 484
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE - 2010
7. A Hilbert transformer is a
12. ( ) is a stationary process with the
(A) non-linear system
power spectral density ( ) for all .
(B) non casual-system
The process is passed through a system
(C) time-varying system
shown below.
(D) low-pass system
ECE - 2008 () ()
8. Consider a Binary Symmetric Channel
(BSC) with probability of error being p.
To transmit a bit, say 1, we transmit a
Let ( ) be the power spectral density of
sequence of three 1s. The receiver will
( ). Which one of the following
interpret the received sequence to
statements is correct?
represent 1 if at least two bits are 1. The
(A) () for all
probability that the transmitted bit will
(B) () for | | kHz
be received in error is
(A) ( ) (C) () for kHz,
(B) is any integer
(C) ( ) (D) () for ( ) ,
(D) ( ) kHz, is any integer
ECE - 2011
9. Noise with double – sided power spectral
13. X(t) is a stationary random process with
density of K over all frequencies is passed
autocorrelation function
through a RC low pass filter with 3 dB cut
( ) ( ) This process passed
–off frequency of . The noise power at
through the system shown below. The
the filter output is
power spectral density of the output
(A) K (C) K
process Y(t) is
(B) K (D)
H(f) = j
+
10. A memory less source emits n symbols
X(t) Y(t)
each with a probability p. The entropy of
the source as a function of n –
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 485
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
T T
(B) lim
T
T
()
T
0 9 10 11 ( 3 rad/s) T
(A)
(C) [ lim
T
T
() ]
(B) T
IN - 2011
ECE - 2014 2. A square wave (amplitude ± 10 mV,
15. Let X be a real-valued random variable frequency 5 kHz, duty cycle 50%) is
with E[X] and , - denoting the mean passed through an ideal low pass filter
values of X and , respectively. The with pass band gain and cut-off frequency
relation which always holds true is of 0dB and 10kHz, respectively. The
(A) ( , -) , - “ ”
(B) ( , -) ( , -) additively into a zero mean noise process
(C) , - ( , -) of one sided power spectral density (PSD)
(D) , - ( , -) of 25pWH up to a frequency of 2 MHz.
the PSD of the noise is assumed to be zero
16. Consider a random process beyond 2 MHz. the signal to noise ratio of
() √ ( ) where the the output is
random phase is uniformly distributed (A) 0 dB (C) 1.0 dB
in the interval [0,2 ]. The auto- (B) 0.1 dB (D) 3 dB
correlation , ( ) ( )- is
(A) ( ( ))
(B) ( ( ))
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 486
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
5. [Ans. A]
So signal can be recovered easily The distance between the two closet points
So samples will be co-related in time in constellation -1 is d1 = 2a.
2. [Ans. A] The same in constellation-2, d2 = √
( ) ( ) | ( )| Since d1> d2, Probability of symbol error in
constellation 1 is lower
| ( )|
6. [Ans. C]
Probability of no error in n bits = (1 – p)n
( ) Probability of one error in n bits
j = n.p(1-p)n-1
= ( – ) + nP ( – )
Low pass RL filter
7. [Ans. C]
3. [Ans. A]
The o/p y(t) of an Hilbert Transformer for
L ( )
an i/p of ( ) () ∫
This is not a Time Invariant system
R
8. [Ans. A]
Probability of Error = 3 error + 3 (2 error
and 1 correct)
(j ) =
j ( )
Comparing with (i) & (ii)
= +3 ( )
R = 4, L = 1
9. [Ans. C]
4. [Ans. B]
Constellation 1 ()
j j
() () √ √
() √ | ( )|
() √ √
| ( )|
Energy of ( )
8
Average Energy of constellation
∫( )
Constellation 2
()
()
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 487
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
13. [Ans. A]
∫
( ) +
x(t) y(t)
10. [Ans. A] –
( ) ∑ () () ()
Where Pi = Probability of individual T j ()()()
symbol. Since probability of each symbol is () ,j - ()
same, therefore, ( ) |j | ()
() ( ) ()
() T, ( )-
( ) ∑ ()
, → -
11. [Ans. B] () , -
SNR >> 1
14. [Ans. B]
( ) Sx ( ) ( - 104)
( )
When SNR is doubled
( )
( ) ⏟ 0 9 10 11 ( 3rad/s)
⏟
As we know P.S.D is even function so
part can be expected,
( )
12. [Ans. D] ( ) ( )
() , () ( T)-
( ) j ( ) j ( )
( )
( ) j j
( ) ( ⁄ )
As we know ( ) ( ) | ( )| for
( ) , ( )-
| ( )| ( ) ∫ ( )
| ( )| [ ]
Either [( ) ]
T ( )
T ( ) , ( )-
( ) As there in no component on
So No DC component
, ( )-
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 488
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
, - ( , -) 10 mV
∫ , ( ) - ( )
( ) , ( )- 8 watt
Power in noise signal
IN
1. [Ans. C]
Standard deviation is a measure of rapidity (S/N) in dB = 10log. /
of change in a random variable. = 2.098 dB
It can be expressed as
* ∫ () +
T
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 489
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Digital Communications
a
4. A source generates three symbols with
b
probabilities 0.25, 0.25, 0.50 at a rate of
3000 symbols per second. Assuming
5 1 0 1 5 x
independent generation of symbols, the
most efficient source encoder would have 7. The values of a and b are
average bit rate as (A) a = 1/6 and b = 1/12
(A) 6000 bits/sec (C) 3000 bits/sec (B) a = 1/5 and b = 3/40
(B) 4500 bits/sec (D) 1500 bits/sec (C) a = 1/4 and b = 1/16
(D) a = 1/3 and b = 1/24
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 490
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
f
10. In delta modulation, the slope overload 2B B +B +2B
distortion can be reduced by
(A) Decreasing the step size
12. Three functions ( ) ( ) ( ), which
(B) decreasing the granular noise
are zero outside the interval [0,T],
(C) decreasing the sampling rate
are shown in the figure. Which of the
(D) increasing the step size
following statements is correct?
()
11. In the following scheme, if the spectrum
M(f) of m(t) is as shown, then the T T
spectrum Y(f) of y(t) will be T
M(f)
()
f
B 0 +B
( )
()
m(t)
+
+ y(t)
Hilbert
transformer
(A) ( ) ()
( )
(B) ( ) ()
(A) Y(f)
(C) ( ) ()
(D) ( ) ()
f
B 0 +B
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 491
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 493
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 494
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
IN - 2009
1. A 50% duty cycles square wave with zero
mean used as a baseband signal in an
ideal frequency modulator with
sinusoidal carrier of frequency . the
modulated signal is given as and input to
an ideal phase demodulation circuit
(Circuit that produces an output
proportional to the difference in phase of
the modulates signal from that of the
carrier). The output of the circuit is
(A) a square wave
(B) a train of impulses with alternating
signs
(C) a triangular wave
(D) a sinusoidal wave
IN - 2010
2. In a pulse code modulated (PCM) signal
sampled at and encoded into a n – bit
code, the minimum bandwidth required
for faithful reconstruction is
(A) 2 (C) ⁄
(B) (D)
IN - 2014
4. A full duplex binary FSK transmission is
made through a channel of bandwidth 10
kHz. In each direction of transmission the
two carriers used for the two states are
separated by 2 kHz. The maximum baud
rate for this transmission is:
(A) 2000 bps (C) 5000 bps
(B) 3000 bps (D) 10000 bps
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 496
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE ()
1. [Ans. C]
P(t) = u(t) u(t 1)
P(t)
h(t)= s(t)
t 2. [Ans. A]
0 1 () , () ( )- ()
g(t) = P(t) * P(t) p(t)
g(t)
0 t
1
0 1 2
t
g(t)
S(t)=g(t) (t 2)*g(t)=g(t) g(t 2)
g(t – 2)
t 0
2 3 4 2
s(t)=10(1+m(t)) 𝑡 (𝑡)
S(t) = g(t) g(t 2)
m(t) =0.5g(t), comparing AM equation
s(t) with (i)=0.5t
Modulating signal = t(form equation of
line)
3 4
0 1 2 Modulation index = 0.5
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 497
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
3. [Ans. B]
∫ ( ) ∫
8. [Ans. D]
For (𝑡) and (𝑡) to be different
minimum step size of is needed else ∫ ( )
they will be same.
4. [Ans. B] ∫ ∫ ∫
( )
. /
As it comes in the form of 0/0 so applying
x(t)
LH rule
1 ( )
2 ( )
5 t
0 1 2
8
6. [Ans. C]
Sampling rate = Nyquist Rate
()
For first term NR = 6k and
For second term NR = 4k
10. [Ans. D]
Total NR = 6k Hz
By increasing step size, slope overload
distortion can be reduced.
7. [Ans. A]
To maximize the entropy, all the decision 11. [Ans. A]
boundaries should be equiprobable. y(t) is equal to SSB wave having LSB and
carrier frequency equal to B.
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 498
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
15. [Ans. B]
Quantization Noise = ,where =
0 B f
B
Y(f)
quantization Noise
SSB having LSB
To Reduce Noise by a factor 4. L should
be increased by a factor of 2. So required
levels
2 256 = 512 levels.
0 B f
B
16. [Ans. D]
12. [Ans. A]
Two functions f(x) & g(x) are said to be
orthogonal if T
T
∫ () () ∫ () () T
T T 17. [Ans. C]
T
We know that
13. [Ans. B]
While using the bipolar pulses to transmit
bits 0 and 1, the minimum bandwidth 8
requires for distortion free transmission
is four times the theoretical bandwidth
(Nyquist Bandwidth).
Nyquist bandwidth, ( )
8
Minimum bandwidth in bipolar signaling
is Hence closest answer is 0.0667 V so
correct option is C
8
18. [Ans. B]
14. [Ans. C] For +ve values
Signal to noise ratio
( )
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 499
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
23. [Ans. D]
Symbol error Probability in M-ary PSK is
erfc[√( η) ( )- b in
24. [Ans. B]
( ) ∫ ( ) Probability of error in coherent BPSK
*√ +
∫ ( )
Phase difference 450 decreases the signal
energy by a factor of Cos2
21. [Ans. D]
Since all the 4 levels are equi-probable,
*√ +
the entropy of the source will be
maximum. Since, two quantized samples
are transmitted per sec, message rate
25. [Ans. D]
r = 2. Thus, the information rate
If all the symbols are equi-probable, the
R = r.H=4bps.
entropy of the source will be maximum.
Since , only the first two are of same
22. [Ans. D]
probability, the entropy will not be
The points in the Constellation diagram of
maximum, but will be less than the
4-PSk are with co-ordinates (0, r1) and
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 500
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
27. [Ans. C]
u v 31. [Ans. *] Range 1.4 to 1.42
+1 +1 2
+1 0
+1 0
, - ( ) ( ) * +
So signal energy increases 4 times as
𝑃, - ( ) ( )
Noise energy increase 2 times
𝑃, -
( )
( )
(√ ) (√ )
( ) (√ √ ) ( √ )
28. [Ans. D]
F (x) = P{X x} 32. [Ans. *] Range 1.99 to 2.01
G (x) = P {2X x} The number of losses read and the
= P {X x/2} probability of its occurrence is given
For positive value of x, below
F(x) G(x) is always greater than zero
L=1 ( )
For negative value of x.
F(x) G(x) is ve
L=2 ( )
but .[F (x) G(x)].x 0
L=3 ( )
29. [Ans. *] Range 7.99 to 8.01
L=4 ( )
( )
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 501
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
( )
* ( ) ∫ ()
( ) + ∫
, - 0 1
j
[ ]
34. [Ans. *] Range 0.34 to 0.36 j
For output to be of equal probability [ () ( )]
∫
[ () ( )]
( ){
37. [Ans. *] Range 0.24 to 0.26
[ ] T
, -
8
T
T
38. [Ans. C]
Shifting operation does not change PSD
() ( ) ()
35. [Ans. C]
( ) ( ) ()
For BFSK, we know the average
Scaling operating change PSD
probability of symbol error is
( ) ( ) ( )
(√ )
() () ( )
( )
T
39. [Ans. *] Range 199 to 201
j Nyquist frequency
The peak to peak amplitude = 2V
Step size = 0.75V
(√ ) (√ ) ( )
, -
⁄
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 502
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
I
( )
( )
To get ( ) we should find probability of ( ) ( )
( ) ( ) ( )
( )
8
( ) ( | )
( ) ( ) ( )
( )
( ) ( ) [ ] ( | ) ( )
( )
8
41. [Ans. A] 8
It is properly of Poisson distribution
event occur with known average rate and
independent of time 44. [Ans. *] Range 15.9 to 16.1
For M-PSK we know
42. [Ans. C]
( ) ( )
( )
√
2 45. [Ans. C]
( ) ( ) ( | )
( ) ( | )
√
( ) ( | )
( )
√ ( | )
At optimum threshold for minimum ( )
probability of error
( ⁄ ) ( )
|
( ⁄ ) ( )
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 503
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
( )
( )
( ) ( ( ))
( ) ( )
( ) ( )
√ √
IN
1. [Ans. A]
We will get square wave at the output
2. [Ans. C]
According to Nyquist sampling theorem
for the faithful reconstruction of signal
3. [Ans. A]
Given
samples/sec
We know that,
samples/sec
In given signals only 50 Hz signal is
satisfying Nyquist criteria, and there are
no signals like 70 Hz and 75 Hz. Hence
correct option is (a)
4. [Ans. B]
Bandwidth for each direction = baud rate
+separation of carriers
(10Hz/2) = baud rate +2kH
Then, baud rate is
= 5000 2000=3000bps
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 504
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Semiconductor Theory
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 505
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE - 2009
ECE - 2010
10. The ratio of the mobility to the diffusion
14. At room temperature, a possible value for
coefficient in a semiconductor has the
the mobility of electrons in the inversion
units
layer of a silicon n channel MOSFET is
(A) (C) V.
(A) 450 /V s (C) 1800 /V s
(B) cm (D)
(B) 1350 /V s (D) 3600 /V s
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 506
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
The electron concentration at the edge of 20. At T = 300 K, the hole mobility of a
the depletion region on the p-side is semiconductor μ = 500 /V-s and
(A) = 26 mV. The hole diffusion constant
(B)
in /s is ______
(C)
(D)
21. The donor and accepter impurities in an
17. A silicon bar is doped with donor abrupt junction silicon diode are
impurities = atoms/ . and ,
Given the intrinsic carrier concentration respectively. Assume that the intrinsic
of silicon at T = 300 K is carrier concentration in silicon
= . Assuming complete = at 300K. = 26 mV
impurity ionization, the equilibrium and the permittivity of silicon
electron and hole concentrations are = 4 F/cm. The built-in
(A) = potential and the depletion width of the
= diode under thermal equilibrium
(B) = conditions, respectively, are
= (A) 7 d
(C) = (B) 8 d
= (C) 7 d
(D) = (D) 8 d
=
22. An ideal MOS capacitor has boron doping-
18. Assume electronic charge concentration of in the
= ⁄ = and substrate. When a gate voltage is applied,
electron mobility μ = 1000 /V s. If a depletion region of width 0.5µm is
the concentration gradient of electrons formed with a surface (channel) potential
injected into a P-type silicon sample is of 0.2 V. Given that
, the magnitude of electron = 88 4 F/cm and the relative
diffusion current density (in A/ ) is permittivities of silicon and silicon
_________. dioxide are 12 and 4, respectively, the
peak electric field (in V/µm) in the oxide
19. When a silicon diode having a doping region is__________
concentration of =9 on
p-side and = on n-side 23. The cut-off wavelength (in μ ) of light
is reverse biased, the total depletion that can be used for intrinsic excitation of
width is found to be 3 μm. Given that the a semiconductor material of bandgap
permittivity of silicon is = 1.1 eV is__________
4 , the depletion width on
the p-side and the maximum electric field 24. Consider a silicon sample doped with
in the depletion region, respectively, are = donor atoms. Assume
(A) 7μ d ⁄ that the intrinsic carrier concentration
(B) μ d4 ⁄ = . If the sample is
(C) μ d 4 ⁄ additionally doped with
(D) μ d 4 ⁄
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 507
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
( )
N type semiconductor
If is the lowest energy level of the
conduction band, is the highest energy ( )
level of the valance band and is the
Fermi level, which one of the following
represents the energy band diagram for
the biased N-type semiconductor?
1. [Ans. D] =
= = Using mass action law =
( ) ( )
So, = =
= = 20, 000
6. [Ans. A]
2. [Ans. B]
The electric field will be perpendicular to =
both V and B, and in B V direction.
=
7
3. [Ans. A] =
The injected minority carrier current is =
diffusion current and it is because of =
concentration gradient.
7. [Ans. B]
4. [Ans. B]
Minority concentration = =
= =7 =
7
i,e, = = ( )
( )
d( ) =
5. [Ans. D] ( )
By the law of electrical neutrality
= =
as =
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 508
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
15. [Ans. C]
=
7 =
= 8 7 = 8 7μ Put, =μ
= μ
8. [Ans. D] Hence, = μ
It is p-type substrate ,and also add So, it depends upon carrier concentration
positive charge, C V plot moves right side and electric field
17. [Ans. D]
10. [Ans. A]
=
= =
μ
μ =
=
= =
11. [Ans. C]
= ( ) =
12. [Ans. B] =
N side is heavily doped
⁄ 18. [Ans. *] Range 3990 to 4010
=( ) d d
d
= 7 volts =
d
d
= ⁄
13. [Ans. *] d
=
= =
=4
μ
=
88 4 19. [Ans. B]
= 9 =
= d = ( )
d
14. [Ans. B] 9 = = μ
The mobility of electrons in Si is 1350
=
/ V-sec.
=
=4
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 509
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
= ( = 8 μ
)
Since there is a dielectric- dielectric
21. [Ans. D] boundary at x = 0, we have to apply
boundary condition at the oxide –
= ( ) semiconductor interface, since the field
lines are everywhere perpendicular to the
= ( ( )
) interface, we get
= 8 = ( )
d =* ( )+ 4 = 8 = 4 μ
d 25. [Ans. D]
( )
N type
Given =
Point B is at higher potential than point A.
= μ d d
so the potential variation across the
=
semiconductor will be like
=
An ideal MOS capacitor does not contain
any stored charge in the oxide region. So
the field in the oxide region is constant.
Also since the substrate is uniformly Since, electron energy varies in opposite
doped the field distribution within the direction with respect to potential since
depletion region is similar to that of a pn = the energy band diagram will
junction, it varies linearly with distance, be like option D
being zero in the bulk p-region (substrate)
Now, = ( ) = Area under the
triangular field distribution
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 510
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 511
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE - 2013
=
12. In a forward biased pn junction diode, the
sequence of events that best describes the
= = μ
mechanism of current flow is
(A) Injection, and subsequent diffusion
8. The magnitude of the electric field at
and recombination of minority
= is
carriers
(A) 1 kV/cm (C) 10 kV/cm
(B) Injection, and subsequent drift and
(B) 5 kV/cm (D) 26 kV/cm
generation of minority carriers
(C) Extraction, and subsequent diffusion
9. The magnitude of the electron drift
and generation of minority carriers
current density at = is
(D) Extraction, and subsequent drift and
(A) 2.16 × A/
recombination of minority carriers
(B) 1.08 × A/
(C) 4.32 × A/
ECE - 2014
(D) 6.48 × A/
13. Consider an abrupt PN junction
(at T = 300 K) shown in the figure. The
10. Compared to a p n junction with
depletion region width on the N-side
= = , which one of the
of the junction is 0.2 and the
following statements is TRUE for a p n
permittivity of silicon ( ) is
junction with = = ?
44 F/cm. At the junction, the
(A) Reverse breakdown voltage is lower
approximate value of the peak electric
and depletion capacitance is lower
field (in kV/cm) is _________.
(B) Reverse breakdown voltage is higher
and depletion capacitance is lower
(C) Reverse breakdown voltage is lower
and depletion capacitance is higher
(D) Reverse breakdown voltage is higher =
and depletion capacitance is higher
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 512
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
1. [Ans. C] 9. [Ans. A]
Varactor diodes are used in tuned circuits J=nμ
and zener diodes is used as voltage =
reference when it is in reverse bias. = 2.16
Schottky diode is used as high frequency
switch. 10. [Ans. C]
Zener breakdown voltage is lower for
2. [Ans. A] higher doping.
During storage time, diode will be ON, so Depletion capacitance is inversely
= 5V during 0 <t . proportional to width of depletion and
higher the doping lower width. So when
3. [Ans. C] doping is higher depletion capacitance is
Between and voltages, tunnel diode higher.
acts as negative resistance.
11. [Ans. D]
I
Ve resistance For Si forward bias voltage change by
℃
℃
=
d
12. [Ans. A]
Depletion region
4. [Ans. A]
Depletion width √( ) ⊖⊕
P ⊖⊕ r +
⊖⊕
=√
=2
+ –
= 4 m.
V
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 513
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE - 2006
Gate
1. “
” P+
a reduction of the effective base-width
Source n W Drain
caused by
(A) electron-hole recombination at the
base P+
Gate
(B) the reverse biasing of the base-
collector junction (A) 4
(C) the forward biasing of emitter-base √
(B) [ ]
junction √ ( )
(D) the early removal of stored base (C)
√
ECE - 2007
4. The measured trans conductance of an
2. Group I lists four different semiconductor
NMOS transistor operating in the linear
device. Match each device in Group I with
region is plotted against the gate voltage
its characteristic property in Group II
at a constant drain voltage . Which
Group I Group II
of the following figures represents the
A. BJT 1. Population
expected dependence of on ?
inversion
(A)
B. MOS 2. Pinch off Voltage
Capacitor
C. Laser 3. Early effect
Capacitor
D. JFET 4. Flat-band
voltage
(A) P-3, Q-1, R-4, S-2 (B)
(B) P-1, Q-4, R-3, S-2
(C) P-3, Q-4, R-1, S-2
(D) P-3, Q-2, R-1, S-4
ECE - 2008
3. The cross section of a JFET is shown in
the following figure. Let be – 2V and let
(C)
be the initial pinch-off voltage. If the
width W is doubled (with other
geometrical parameters and doping levels
remaining the same), then the ratio
between the mutual transconductances of
the initial and the modified JFET is
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 514
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 515
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
9. Estimate the output voltage for =1.5 Common Data for Q. 12 and 13
V. [Hints: Use the appropriate current- The channel resistance of an N-channel
voltage equation for each MOSFET, based Ω
on the answer to Q. 8] when the full channel thickness (tch) of
(A) 4 (C) 4
√ μ is available for conduction. The
√
built-in voltage of the gate P+N junction
(B) 4 (D) 4
√
√ (Vbi) is –1V. When the gate to source
voltage (VGS) is 0 V, the channel Is
ECE - 2010 d d μ d d
10. In a uniformly doped BJT, assume that , built-in voltage and hence the thickness
and are the emitter, base and available for conductio 8μ
collector dopings in atoms/ ,
respectively. If the emitter injection + GAT
efficiency of the BJT is close to unity, VGS E
P+
which one of the following conditions is
– Source Drain
TRUE? N
(A) = =
P+
(B) and
(C) = and
(D)
12. The channel resistance when = is
ECE - 2011 (A) 480 (C) 750
11. For the BJT in the circuit shown below, (B) 600 (D) 1000
= = 7 = 7 . The
switch is initially closed. At time = , the 13. The channel resistance when =
switch is opened. The time at which is
leaves the active region is (A) 360 (C) 1000
5V (B) 917 (D) 3000
ECE - 2014
0.5 mA
14. A good current buffer has
(A) low input impedance and low output
impedance
μ
(B) low input impedance and high
output impedance
=
(C) high input impedance and low
output impedance
4 Ω
(D) high input impedance and high
output impedance
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 516
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 517
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
5. [Ans. B]
is in saturation. For both and ,
is same, so is also in saturation.
√
= , as gate current in MOSFET is =
zero. As both MOSFETs are identical and
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 518
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
= = =
√ 8 √
= = =
√ =
=4
d ( )
= =
At = = μ ;
9. [Ans. D]
(Given = Ω)
√
= =4 = 8μ =7 Ω
11. [Ans. C] =√ = = ( μ )
5V
= μ
So that channel thickness = 4
μ
0.5 mA 8μ 7
μ
8
= 7 = Ω
14. [Ans. B]
=
15. [Ans. *] Range 5.7 to 5.9
= 7
4 Ω =
=
=
Apply KVL at the BE junction =
7 4
= = = =
4 Ω 4 Ω
Always = ; At collection junction
( )= ( = = ) =
= = always constant =
= = 44 7
= 44
= = 78 8
= 7 (4 )
= 7 4 ( = ) = 78
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 519
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
17. [Ans. B] = 8 8
By KVL, 7=
4
=
( )
=
18. [Ans. A]
= (μ μ ) =
= √ (μ μ ) ( )
= ( )
( )= [ ]
( ) d
d
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 520
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 521
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 522
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
1. [Ans. C] 7. [Ans. A]
for each MOS is 2.5 V Gate source capacitance is
= d
= =
=4 μ ⁄ d d
So = ( ) = 3.9 as between gate and source
there is SiO2
= ( ) A1 = μ = 20
=4 μ =2
d1 = 1 nm = m
2. [Ans. C] So
89 9
3. [Ans. A] =
Boron is acceptor impurity, so high = 94
concentration makes substrate. = 9
= 7
4. [Ans. B]
Wet oxidation method is more suitable 8. [Ans. A]
for thick layer ( μ ) Source body junction capacitor
A standard and practice is to grow a thin
layer, because = =
d d
1. Oxides layers are very uniform Here = 11.7 as there is Si only
2. Resistive few defects exists at oxide = μ μ = m2
silicon interface d = depletion width of p-n junction
d = 10 mm = m
5. [Ans. D] So
= / and = / 89 7
=
= = 10
= 8
So holes in volume v is, H = pV = ,
=
since holes number cannot be a decimal
number so H = 0
9. [Ans. D]
6. [Ans. A] The designed characteristics and
requirements of the fabricated oxide can
be mainly influenced by the used oxidant
species. With dry oxidation, normally
V high-quality thin oxide films are
0 produced. During wet oxidation, the
silicon water is settled to a water vapour
temperature. Wet oxide grow really fast
compared to any oxidation, which is the
Vi biggest advantage.
VT
n VDD/2 VDD
VDD–VTn
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 523
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
10. [Ans. A]
d d
=μ (( )– )
= = Ω
12. [Ans. D]
13. [Ans. C]
14. [Ans. D]
= [( ) ]
= = = =
In saturation region
( ) = ( )
√
√ = ( )
√
√ √
= =√ = 7 7
√
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 524
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE - 2014
2. When the optical power incident on a
d d μ d
is 0.8 A/W, the photocurrent generated
( μ ) ________
1. [Ans. B]
Zener diode and avalanche photo diode –
Reverse bias, 4
Solar cell and laser diode – forward bias. = 87 μ
87 μ
2. [Ans. *] Range 7.99 to 8.01
( )
( )=
( )
=
8
= 8μ
3. [Ans. A]
In order to generate electron hole
pairs
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 525
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Electromagnetic Field
(
√
) (D) ∮ ∇ × ⃑ . ⃑⃑⃑ ∫ ∫ ⃑⃑⃑ . ⃑⃑⃑⃑
(B) ⃑ ŷ
√
( ) 6. Two infinitely long wires carrying current
(C) ⃑ ŷ
√
are as shown in the figure below. One
( )
(D) ⃑ ŷ wire is in the y-z plane and parallel to the
y-axis. The other wire is in the x-y plane
ECE - 2008 and parallel to the x-axis. Which
3. For static electric and magnetic fields in components of the resulting magnetic
an inhomogeneous source-free, medium field are non-zero at the origin?
z
which of the following represents the
corr ct form of two of Maxw ’s
equations? y
(A) ∇. (C) ∇×
∇×B ∇×B
(B) ∇. (D) ∇×
x
∇.B ∇.B
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 526
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE - 2010
7. If ⃑ x â ∮ ⃑ .
xyâ over the path
shown in the figure is,
y a
0 X
⁄ ⁄
ECE - 2013
√ √
11. Consider a vector field ⃑ r . The closed
(A) 0 (C) 1
loop line integral ∮ ⃑ can be expressed
(B) (D) √
√ as
(A) ∯ ∇ × ⃑ ⃑⃑⃑⃑s over the closed surface
ECE - 2011
bounded by the loop
8. Consider a closed surface S surrounding a
(B) ∰ ∇ ⃑ v over the closed volume
volume V. IF r is the position vector of a
bounded by the loop
point inside S, with ̂ the unit normal on
S, the value of the integral ∯ r. ̂ is (C) ∭ ∇ ⃑ v over the open volume
bounded by the loop
(A) 3V (C) 10V
(B) 5V (D) 15V (D) ∬(∇ × ⃑ ) ⃑⃑⃑⃑s over the open surface
bounded by the loop
ECE - 2012
ECE - 2014
Statement for Linked Answer Questions 9
12. In spherical co-ordinates, let â â denote
and 10
unit vectors along the , directions.
An infinitely long uniform solid wire of
radius a carries a uniform dc current of si cos t r â m
r
density .
And
.
9. The magnetic field at a distance r from the si cos t r â m
r
center of the wire is proportional to represent the electric and magnetic field
(A) r for r < a and 1/r2 for r > a components of the EM wave at large
(B) 0 for r < a and 1/r for r > a distances r from a dipole antenna, in free
(C) r for r < a and 1/r for r > a space. The average power (W) crossing
(D) 0 for r < a and 1/r2 for r > a the hemispherical shell located at
r m is _______.
10. A hole of radius b (b < a) is now drilled
along the length of the wire at a distance 13. If r xâ yâ zâ a |r| r
d from the center of the wire as shown th iv r ∇ r = ____________
below.
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 527
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 528
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE - 2008 EE - 2013
7. A coil of 300 turns is wound on a non- 12. The curl of the gradient of the scalar field
magnetic core having a mean defined by x y y z 4z x is
circumference of 300 mm and a cross- (A) 4xya yza zxa
sectional area of 300 mm2. The (B) 4a a a
inductance of the coil corresponding to a (C) 4xy 4z a x yz a
magnetizing current of 3A will be y zx a
(Given that μ = 4 x 10-7 H/m) (D)
(A) 37.68 μH (C) 37. 68 μH 13. The flux density at a point in space given
(B) 113.04 μH (D) 113. 04 μH
by B 4xa ya a m . The
8. A capacitor consists of two metal plates value of constant k must be equal to
each 500 × 500 mm2 and spaced 6 mm (A) 2 (C) +0.5
apart. The space between the metal plates (B) 0.5 (D) +2
is filled with a glass plate of 4mm
thickness and a layer of paper of 2 mm 14. A dielectric slab with 500 mm x 500 mm
thickness. The relative permittivities of cross-section is 0.4 m long. The slab is
the glass and paper are 8 and 2 subjected to a uniform electric field of
respectively. Neglecting the fringing a a mm. The relative
effect, the capacitance will be (Given that permittivity of the dielectric material is
= 8.85 x F/m) equal to 2. The value of constant is
(A) 983.33 pF (C) 637.5 pF . × m . The energy stored in
(B) 1475 pF (D) 9956.25 pF the dielectric in Joules is
(A) . × (C) .5
9. Two point charges = 10 μC and (B) . × (D)
= 20μC are placed at coordinates
(1,1,0) and ( 1, 1,0) respectively, the EE - 2014
total electric flux passing through a plane 15. is the capacitance of a parallel plate
z = 20 will be capacitor with air as dielectric (as in
(A) 7.5 μC (C) 15.0 μC figure (a)). If, half of the entire gap as
(B) 13.5 μC (D) 22.5 μC shown in figure (b) is filled with a
dielectric of permittivity , the
10. An extra high voltage transmission line of
expression for the modified capacitance is
the length 300 km can be approximated
by a lossless line having propagation a
constant . radians per km.
(A) ⁄ (C) ⁄
Then the percentage ratio of the length to (B) (D)
wavelength will given by
(A) 24.24% (C) 19.05% 16. The following four vector fields are given
(B) 12.12% (D) 6.06% in Cartesian co-ordinate system. The
EE - 2012 vector field which does not satisfy the
11. The direction of vector A is radially property of magnetic flux density is
outward from the origin, with | | r (A) y a z a x a
where r x y z and k is a (B) z a x a y a
constant. The value of n for which ∇ A=0 (C) x a y a z a
is (D) y z a x z a x y a
(A) 2 (C) 1
(B) 2 (D) 0
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 529
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
17. A parallel plate capacitor consisting two 19. A hollow metallic sphere of radius r is
dielectric materials is shown in the figure. kept at potential of 1 Volt. The total
The middle dielectric slab is placed electric flux coming out of the concentric
symmetrically with respect to the plates. spherical surface of radius R r is
ot (A) 4 r (C) 4
(B) 4 r (D) 4
am s μ
B
4
z
Assuming right handed
coordinate
system, magnetic field intensity, ⃑⃑ at
coordinate (2,1,0) will be
̂w r m
4
B ̂ m
̂ m
m
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 530
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE B B
* +a
1. [Ans. D] μ x y
∇×
From stokes theorem
5. [Ans. B]
∮ . ∬( ). s rom sto ’s th or m
2. [Ans. A] ∮ ∮∇× s
z axis
iv ∇×
∮ ⃑ ⃑⃑⃑ ∬ ⃑ ⃑⃑⃑⃑s
x axis x axis
6. [Ans. D]
z
z axis
cos √ √
( )
y
cos
⃑ . . .
â x
√
⃑ . â â × â â
â × â â
3. [Ans. D] Non-zero field components x and z
rom Maxw ’s quatio
∇.B 7. [Ans. C]
∇× ⃑ xyâ x â
xâ yâ
For static magnetic field,
xâ yâ
∇×
⃑. xy x x y
y
4. [Ans. C]
∇×B μ S
3 R
∇×B
μ
a a a 1
P Q
|| ||
μ 0 X
B B ⁄ ⁄
√ √
B B P-Q: y=1 dy=0
* a a
μ z z ⁄ ⁄
√ x √
B B ∫ ⃑ . ⃑⃑⃑ ∫ x x |
( )a + ⁄
x y √ ⁄
√
Q-R:
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 531
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
x 11. [Ans. D]
√
By curl stroke theorem
4
∫ ⃑ . ⃑⃑⃑ ∫ ( ) y
√ ∮⃑ . c
R-S: ∬ ∇ × ⃑ . s ov r o surfac
Y=3 ,dy=0
⁄ ⁄√
√ 12. [Ans. *] Range 55.4 to 55.6
∫ ⃑ . ⃑⃑⃑ ∫ x x x |
⁄ ⁄√ In phasor notation
√
⃑ si â m
r
= ( ) .
⃑⃑ si â m
S-P: r
x= x So, average poynting vector is
√
⃑ (⃑ × ⃑⃑ )
∫ ⃑ . ⃑⃑⃑ ∫ ( ) y .
si si â
√ r r
.
si â
So, ∮ ⃑ . ∫ ⃑. ∫ ⃑ . ⃑⃑⃑ r
Average power crossing
∫ ⃑ . ⃑⃑⃑ ∫ ⃑ . ⃑⃑⃑
∫⃑ â r si
=1 ∫ . si
8. [Ans. D]
. ∫ si ∫
Apply the divergence theorem
.
∯ r. ⃑ x ∭ ∇. r
x x
r. ( ) ( ) ∫si cos
r r r
x x ∫si si
( )
r r
r
(r. ) ∫si cos
x x
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 533
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
3. [Ans. A] 9. [Ans. C]
Force = Net flux will be half of the total charge,
= = 15µC
Energy = = 0.835J
.
F= . 4 10. [Ans. D]
m . ra ia s m
4. [Ans. B]
wav gth 4 4 .
v .
√ ×
. i gth
f .4 u ( ) .
× wav gth 4 4 .
. u ×
× .
.
11. [Ans. A]
Length = 3× √ × × ⃑
× × . r ̂
=185 km ∇. ⃑ r . r
5. [Ans. A] . r
harg ’i radius r = × r .
r r
or ∇. ⃑
r
r r
r
12. [Ans. D]
6. [Ans. A] cur [∇ sca ar]
iv rg c ∇.
13. [Ans. A]
=
cos xy yx si xy ∇. B 4x y
x y z
cos xy y si xy cos z . z 4
zcos z
14. [Ans. B]
7. [Ans. B]
L= 15. [Ans. A]
× × × Case (i)
=
×
= 113.09µH
8. [Ans. B] h
C=
. × × × × ×
= 4.4nF
×
. × × × ×
×
.
C = 1.467nF
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 534
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
.h
gio
h
.
4
Case(ii)
h
( )
18. [Ans. C]
.h
h
m t r
[ ] am s
sourc
16. [Ans. C] m t r
̅ magnetic flux density [w
If B m ]
̅
∇. B
̅ B â
i. . if B B â B â
̅ 4 am s
∇. B
sourc
B B B Z
Must qua to z ro
x y z
̅
B ̅
B ̅
B
̅
Option (A) : ∇. B
μ 4 m s 4μ
̅
Option (B) : ∇. B ̅
B ̂ ̂w m
̅
Option (C) : ∇. B x y z
μ am s μ
̅
Option (D) : ∇. B ̅
B ( ̂) ̂w m
μ
17. [Ans. C] ̅
B ̂w m
̅
B μ
⃑⃑ ̂ am m
̅ ̅ = cross product of
Note: Direction of B
current direction and radial drections
respectively [Biot – savart’s aw]
4 4
gio
4
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 535
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
19. [Ans. A] × √ √
⃑ â â
4 |r | |r |
|r̅ | |r̅ | √ 4 √
(√ √ )
â
√
√ √
√
(√ √ )
â
The net flux leaving any closed surface is √
equal to charge enclosed in it √ √
Total electric flux leaving the √
co c tric s h r of ra ius ‘ ’ charg √ √ √ √ √
⃑ * +
co tai y th m ta s h r of ra ius ‘r’ √ √
ot tia at a oi t o m ta ic s h r
̅ √ [ 4̂]
4 r
̅ ̂ wto ⁄ o um
4 r
iv ot
4 r
(flux ) leaving the sphere of radius
‘ ’ 4 r
20. [Ans. B]
Method of image:
A perfect conducting plate acts like a
mirror for the existing charge by the
introduction of virtual charge opposite to
the existing charge and equivalent distant
from it
z axis
√ X
r̅
ou om s
√ √
r̅
√
ou om s
X
⃑ ⃑ ⃑ imag
√ √
⃑ â â
4 |r | |r |
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 536
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EM Wave Propagation
σ1 μ1 μ0 σ2 μ2 μ0 Dielectric
r1 = 3 r2 = 4
E1 E2
(A) √ (C) 2
x<0 x>0
(B) √ (D) 3
x=0
(A) ECE - 2008
(B) ̂ + ̂ ̂ 7. A uniform plane wave in the free space is
normally incident on an infinitely thick
(C) ̂ + ̂ + ̂
dielectric slab (dielectric constant
(D) ̂ + ̂ + ̂
). The magnitude of the reflection
coefficient is
4. A medium of relative permittivity =2
(A) 0 (C) 0.5
forms an interface with free-space. A (B) 0.3 (D) 0.8
point source of electromagnetic energy is
located in the medium at a depth of 1
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 537
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE - 2010 11. The electric and magnetic fields for a TEM
8. The electric field component of a time wave of frequency 14 GHz in a
harmonic plane EM wave travelling in a homogeneous medium of relative
nonmagnetic lossless dielectric medium permittivity and relative permeability
has an amplitude of 1 V/m. If the relative μ are given by
permittivity of the medium is 4, the ⃗ )
̂ ⁄
magnitude of the time average power ⃗⃗ )
̂ ⁄
density vector ) is
Assuming the speed of light in free space
(A) ⁄ (C) ⁄ to be 3 × m/s, the intrinsic
(B) ⁄ (D) ⁄
p f fr p b h
relative permittivity of the medium and
9. A plane wave having the electric field
the electric field amplitude are
component ⃗ β )̂
(A)
V/m and traveling in free space is
incident normally on a lossless medium (B)
with μ μ and which occupies (C)
the region . The reflected magnetic (D)
field component is given by
(A) + ) ̂ A/m 12. A current sheet ̂ lies on the
(B) + ) ̂ A/m dielectric interface between two
dielectric media with μ in
(C) + ) ̂ A/m Region – 1 ( ) and μ in
(D) + ) ̂ A/m Region – 2 ( ). If the magnetic field in
Region – 1 at is
ECE - 2011 ⃗⃗ ̂ + ̂ , the magnetic field
10. Consider the following
statements in Region – 2 at is
regarding the complex Poynting vector ⃗
(Region – 2) :
for the power radiated by a point source μ
in an infinite homogeneous and lossless
medium Re(⃗ ) denotes the real part of ⃗ ,
S denotes a spherical surface whose (Region – 1) : μ
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 538
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(B) ̂ +̂ )
√ ⃗ r
)
(C) ̂ ̂ ) √
rf r
√
(D) ̂ ̂ )
√
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 539
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
1. [Ans. C] 4. [Ans. D]
â – βz) + â – βz + ⁄ )
fr p )
) )
⁄ ) )
⁄ ) )
)
)
For total reflection √
) ( )
√
r
√
) √
⇒r
√
Left circularly polarized ( Direction of area of cross section r
propagation = + ̂ direction)
5. [Ans. D]
2. [Ans. A] For free space ,
)
=
=√ √
√ √
= √( √ ) + )
⇒ )
p
⇒
3. [Ans. C]
Tangential component and will be 6. [Ans. D]
same, for normal component
⇒ √
⇒
√
⇒
⇒ ⃗ + ⃗ + ⃗ √ √
7. [Ans. C]
Dielectric constant of free space,
Dielectric constant of dielectric
slab,
Magnitude of reflection coefficient,
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 540
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
√ √ 10. [Ans. C]
| |
√ +√ Complex poynting vector, ⃗ ⃗ ⃗⃗ )
| | Average poynting vector, ⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗ ⃗)
+
Point source is isotropic and radiates
power uniformly in the radial direction.
=0.5 r p rr
∫ ̂ ∮ ∫ (⃗ ) ̂
8. [Ans. C]
I reamain constant at any radial distance
from the source.But as W= r
For point source, ⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗ ⃗ ) decrease
with increasing radial distance from the
source, according to the factor .
μ
√
11. [Ans. D]
μ ⃗ )
̂
)√
⃗⃗ )
̂
β
r
9. [Ans. A] f
⃗ β ) ̂ v/m
The wave is travelling in + y direction.
(̂ ⃗ ) But,
√
β )̂ √
β )̂
√ √ √
√ √
+
√ +√
√ √ √ √ 12. [Ans. A]
√ +√ √ +√ ̂
⃗ ̂
+
Therefore , reflected magnetic field And
μ
component, μ μ
μ
+β )̂ Normal component in x direction
Which indicates that the reflected wave is )̂ ̂
travelling in – y direction.
̂ + ̂
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 541
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
13. [Ans. A]
) √ )
)+√ )
f z
̅ [ ̅ + ̅ ] [ ]
̅ [ )̅
)
14. [Ans. C]
+ )̅ ] √
The given oblique incidence is an vertical
polarization i.e., ̅ is parallel to the plane
16. [Ans. C]
of incidence, ̅ is perpendicular to the
plane of incident. +
̅ [ ̅ ̅ ]
[ ] )
r h pr b
)
⇒√ √ p
⇒ )
)
h f
Force on a point charge +q is equals to
β + ) )
r f r )
)
Substituting equation (1) we get ff r
̅
r h p
[ )̅
[ ) )] Note: A prefect conducting plate acts like
)̅ ]
mirror for the existing charge
)
̅ [ ̅ ̅ ] √
√ √
17. [Ans. A]
)
̅ [̂ ̂ ] √ ̂ z ) ̂ z+ )
√
̂ z+ )
Two planar components
15. [Ans. A]
z+ )̂
The reflection co-efficient for parallel
z+ )̂
polarization is given by
Amplitudes unequal and phase diff
√ Hence it is elliptically polarized
z 0:
+√ ⇒ + )̂
+ )̂
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 542
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
√
r
√
r
√
√
r
√
√
( )
√
( )
√
√
( )
√
18. [Ans. D]
⃗ ̂ p
)
Perfect conductor on conductor = air
interface
̂ ⃗
| | |⃗ |
r f ̂
( ̂ +̂ +̂ ⃗ +̂ )
̂ p r
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 543
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Transmission Lines
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 544
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
8
Ω section to a 200 Ω section. If the
Z
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 545
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Z 5 Ω Z 1 Ω
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 546
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
1. [Ans. D] =
When at t= 0 switch is closed voltage
which will travel towards load is =
V+ = V =
3. [Ans. D] 6. [Ans. D]
For ec ion Z ⁄4
⁄4
Z Z
Z
Z 5 Z Z
5
Z
Z Z = 2
(5 ) Z = = 2
Z 25
1
( ) So Z
Z 12.5
Z Z Z =
.
8.34 25 Ω
.
∴Z 3
.
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 547
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Z √ √
10. [Ans. A]
Voltage maximum in the line is observed
Z √
.
exactly at
G= =
( ) Therefore ‘z ’ hould be real
. . VSWR z 1 Ω (∵ Vol age
= √R = √ .1 =0.002
( )
minimum at load)
8. [Ans. B]
11. [Ans. *]
For transmission line, Z 6
Z ln(b a)
( √ ) √
Z = 30 × 2 = 60 6
ln(2.4)
For transmission line, √1 .89
15.5 Ω
Z jZ an
Z Z [ ]
12. [Ans. B]
=Z [ ] Concepts: Matching section should be
have length
but Z Z jZ l odd multiple of ( ⁄4)
= j30 opera ing waveleng h
Z and Zin2 are in series Solution:
Z Z Z l
Therefore, Reflection co-efficient,
= 5 Ω 1 Ω 2 Ω
= ma ching
ec ion
=
or 429 z l .175m
4 4 1
√
| | √ . or 1 z l . 75 m
VSWR = = 1.64 4 4 2
√ .
Length l should be integral multiple of
9. [Ans. C] both l and l
The line is matched as Z Z 5 Ω and ∴ l mul iple of of l l
hence reflected wave a absent. mul iple of .525m
For the travelling wave, given: Hence 1.05 is the appropriate solution
Phase difference for a length of
2 mm π 4 rad
Frequency of excitation = 10 GHz
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 548
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
W ⁄4 ran former
Z 5 Ω Z 1 Ω
h W 17. [Ans. B]
W h TEM wave travelling in the positive x
direction
Z √
Electric field and magnetic field goes in
– y and z direction respectively
V
√
Since the separation between the plates 18. [Ans. *] Range 32.99 to 34.01
reduced by a factor of 2 A
1. Phase velocity not effected
Z 5 Ω .5
2. Characteristic impedance becomes 5 Ω
1 Ω
half Z Z
3. Characteristic impedance becomes
half of the original
Z
Z 4 5 ohm
Z
Z Z (1 Ω)
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 549
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(1 )(5 )
Z
(15 )
Z 33.33 ohm
(Z ) ree pace
(Z )
3 ielec ric
Incident angle
(3â √3â ). (â )
co
√12
1
co ( ) 6
2
in
√ 2 nell aw
in
in in √
√3 1 1
in
2 √3 2
3
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 550
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE - 2007
P: Coaxial Q: cylindrical
3. An air filled rectangular wave guide has
inner dimensions of 3cm 2cm. The
R: Rectangular
wave impedance of the mode of
propagation in the waveguide at a (A) Only P has no cut-off –frequency
frequency of 30GHz is (free space (B) Only Q has no cut-off -frequency
impedance ) (C) Only R has no cut-off -frequency
(A) 308 (C) (D) All three have cut-off –frequencies
(B) (D)
ECE - 2011
4. The ⃗ field in rectangular waveguide of 8. The modes in a rectangular waveguide
inner dimension given by are denoted by where m and
⃗ ( ) ( ) ( )̂ n are the Eigen numbers along the larger
and smaller dimensions of the waveguide
Where is a constant ,and a and b are
the dimensions along the x-axis and the respectively. Which one of the following
y-axis respectively. The mode of statements is TRUE?
propagation in the waveguide is (A) The mode of the waveguide
(A) (C) does not exist
(B) (D) (B) The mode of the waveguide
ECE - 2008 does not exist
5. A rectangular waveguide of internal (C) The and the modes both
dimensions (a = 4 cm and b = 3 cm) is to exist and have the same cut – off
be operated in mode. The minimum frequencies
operating frequency is (D) The and the modes both
(A) 6.25 (C) 5.0 exist and have the same cut – off
(B) 6.0 (D) 3.75 frequencies
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 551
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE - 2014
11. In the following figure, the transmitter Tx
sends a wideband modulated RF signal
via a coaxial cable to the receiver Rx. The
output impedance of Tx, the
characteristic impedance of the cable
and the input impedance of Rx are all
real.
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 552
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
1. [Ans. C]
6. [Ans. D]
, for T
√
. . 7. [Ans. A]
√
Coaxial cable has no cut off frequency.
18×
⇒ 8. [Ans. A]
’ gul
2. [Ans. A] waveguide.
Microwave signals usually amplitude
9. [Ans. C]
modulated because to know the
⃗ ( ̂ ̂ ̂ ) ( )
characteristic parameters such as
qu O ll g w l g … Since perfect conductor will reflect wave
The measurement system should be totally. Let reflected wave is ⃗⃗⃗⃗ .
sensitive Tangential component of incident wave is
⃗ ̂ ̂
3. [Ans. C] Since at the boundary net tangential field
will be zero. For this tangential
√
√ ( ) component of reflected wave (⃗ ) and
tangential component of incident wave
√( ) ( ) must cancel out each other, for this.
√
For ⃗ ̂ ⃗
⇒ . Reflected wave will have normal
√
component such that it will cancel out
= = 10GHz the normal component of incident
= 399.85 wave, so it will be 𝑎̂
√ ( )
Also the direction of propagation will
be in –x direction.
4. [Ans. A] So ⃗ ( ̂ ̂ ̂ ) ( )
⃗ ( ) ( ) ( )̂
10. [Ans. D]
TE wave in rectangular W/G is and
⃗ ( ) ̅ ̂
= √( ) ( )
u √
⇒ mode and = 2.094 x and = 2.618 x
∴ = 10.05 x
5. [Ans. A]
F g w
√ ∴W ’ g ⇒ =0
√
= √( ) ( )
= √
= 6.25GHz
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 553
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
( )
( )
√ √
| [( ) ( ) ]
√ [√ ]
√ √
⇒ ⇒ ⇒
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 554
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Antennas
ECE - 2006 5. For a Hertz dipole antenna, the Half
1. A mast antenna consisting of a 50 meter Power Beam Width (HPBW) in the E-
long vertical conductor operates over a plane is
perfectly conducting ground plane. It is (A) (C)
base-fed at a frequency of 600-kHz. The (B) (D)
radiation resistance of the antenna in
ohms is ECE - 2012
(A) ⁄ (C) ⁄ 6. The radiation pattern of an antenna in
(B) ⁄ (D) spherical co-ordinates is given by
F(θ) = cos4θ; ≤θ≤ /
2. A transmission line is feeding 1 Watt of The directivity of the antenna is
power to a horn antenna having a gain of (A) 10 dB (C) 11.5 dB
10 dB . The antenna is matched to the (B) 12.6 dB (D) 18 dB
transmission line. The total power ECE - 2014
radiated, by the horn antenna into the 7. For an antenna radiating in free space, the
free-space is electric field at a distance of 1 km is found
(A) 10 Watts (C) 0.1Watt to be 12 mV/m. Given that intrinsic
(B) 1 Watt (D) 0.01Watt
impedance of the free space is Ω , the
magnitude of average power density due
ECE - 2007
to this antenna at a distance of 2 km from
3. A ⁄ dipole is kept horizontally at a
the antenna (in nW/m ) is __________
height of ⁄ above a perfectly
conducting infinite ground plane. The 8. Match column A with column B.
radiation pattern in the plane of the Column A Column B
dipole ( ⃗ plane) looks approximately as 1. Point electromagnetic P. Highly
(A) y (B) y source directional
2. Dish antenna Q. End fire
3. Yagi-Uda antenna R. Isotropic
z
(A) 1 P (C) 1 Q
z
(C) y (D) 2 Q 2 P
y
3 R 3 R
(B) 1 R (D) 1 R
z z
2 P 2 Q
ECE - 2008 3 Q 3 P
4. At 20 , the gain of a parabolic dish
antenna of 1 meter diameter and 70%
efficiency is
(A) 15dB (C) 35 dB
(B) 25dB (D) 45dB
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 555
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
1. [Ans. A]
So gain = 0.7 × 6 ×( )
Since antenna is installed at conducting
ground, = 18.67×
= 42.7 dB.
= ( )
= = , = 5. [Ans. C]
Hertz dipole radiation field, Eθ ∝ sin θ
= ( ) HPBW in the E-plane is shown in Fig.
below:
= =
θ= 0
2. [Ans. B] = at θ = = at θ =
√ √
Gain of antenna is directive gain i.e.
different from that of amplifier. It radiates
same power, so 1W.
HPBW
3. [Ans. B]
The radiation pattern of the dipole ( / ) θ= 0 θ= 0
6. [Ans. A]
|F(θ)|
Directi it =
|F(θ)|
|F(θ)| =
/
Directi it = =
d= / z
= log = dB
y
7. [Ans. *] Range 47.6 to 47.8
Average power density at 1 km distance
=
d= z
=
4. [Ans. D] =
Gain = 6( ) = ( ) ower densit ∝ /d
at m d
D = m, = = = cm =( )
at m d
Efficiency = 70%
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 556
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
at m=
= W/m
= W/m
= nW/m
8. [Ans. B]
Isotropic: - Emits the radiation in all
directions {hypothetical point source]
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 557